Updatd

Home EUŠÖ˜Aî•ñ

Ž©“®ŽÔŒ^Ž®”F’èŠÖŒW
UN/ECE Regulation’è‹` —pŒêˆê——

”EA B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z ‹L†EƒMƒŠƒVƒƒ•¶Žš y––”öz
î•ñŒ¹(Source) Ž©“®ŽÔŒ^Ž®”F’èŠÖŒW UN/ECE Regulation—Þ ˆê—— ‚à•¹‚¹‚Ä‚²ŽQÆ‚ð

UN/ECEŽ©“®ŽÔŒ^Ž®”F’èˆÈŠO‚Ì—pŒê‚Í ŠÂ‹«AÈƒGƒlAˆÀ‘S‹K§ŠÖŒW —pŒê ˆê—— ‚ð‚²ŽQÆ‰º‚³‚¢B
Top@Sort MK —pŒê ‘Ώەª–ì ’è‹` Source
1 (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ First axis (symbol 1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.9. "First axis (symbol 1)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to the observation half-plane;
No.104 2014-03-14
2 (symbol) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Second axis (symbol 2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.12. "Second axis (symbol 2)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to both the first axis and the reference axis. The positive direction of the second axis lies in the observation half-plane when – 90‹ ƒ ƒÀ1 ƒ 90‹ as shown in Annex 1, figure 1.
No.104 2014-03-14
3 point belt [No.080 2013-08-24] @ 3-point belt strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "3-point belt" for the purposes of this Regulation also includes belts with more than three anchorage points;
No.080 2013-08-24
30 minute power (Maximum) [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Maximum 30 minutes power Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at Direct Current (DC) voltage as set out in paragraph 5.3.2 of Regulation No 85.
No.083 2015-07-03
30 minute power (Maximum) [No.085 2006-11-24] @ Maximum 30 minutes power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at DC voltage as defined in paragraph 5.3.1, which a drive train can deliver over a period of 30 minutes as an average.
No.085 2006-11-24
30 minute power (Maximum) [No.085 2014-11-07] @ Maximum 30 minutes power Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Maximum 30 minutes power" means the maximum net power of an electric drive train at DC voltage as defined in paragraph 5.3.1 of this Regulation, which a drive train can deliver over a period of 30 minutes as an average;
No.085 2014-11-07
3D H machine [No.014 2007-12-06A4] @ Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of eHf points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;
No.014 2007-12-06
3D H machine [No.016 2007-11-30A15] @ Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of "H" points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this annex;
No.016 2007-11-30
3D H machine [No.017 2006-12-27A3] @ Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of "H" points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;
No.017 2006-12-27
3D H machine [No.017 2010-08-31A3] @ 3-D H machine seats, their anchorages and any head restraints [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
APPENDIX 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE THREE-DIMENSIONAL "H" POINT MACHINE (*) (3-D H machine)
1. BACK AND SEAT PANS
2. BODY AND LEG ELEMENTS
Figure 1 3-D H machine elements designation [}]
Figure 2 Dimensions of the 3-D H machine elements and load distribution (Dimensions in millimeters)
No.017 2010-08-31
3D H machine [No.025 2010-08-14A3] @ Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of eHf points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this Annex.
No.025 2010-08-14
3D H machine [No.029 2010-11-20A4] @ Three-dimensional H point machine (3-D H machine) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE eHf POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of eHf points and actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this Annex.
No.029 2010-11-20
3D H machine [No.046 2010-07-10A8] @ Three-dimensional "H" point machine (3-D H machine) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3-D H machine) means the device used for the determination of eHf pointsand actual torso angles. This device is described in Appendix 1 to this annex.
No.046 2010-07-10
3D H machine [No.080 2010-06-30A4] @ "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3 DH machine) Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the eHf point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Three-dimensional "H" point machine" (3 DH machine) means the device used for the determination of eHf points and actual torso angles. This device is described in appendix 1 to this annex;
No.080 2010-06-30
3D reference grid [No.125 2010-07-31] @ Three-dimensional reference grid Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Three-dimensional reference grid" means a reference system which consists of a vertical longitudinal plane X-Z, a horizontal plane X-Y and a vertical transverse plane Y-Z (see Annex 4, appendix, figure 6); the grid is used to determine the dimensional relationships between the position of design points on drawings and their positions on the actual vehicle. The procedure for situating the vehicle relative to the grid is specified in Annex 4; all coordinates referred to ground zero shall be based on a vehicle in running order ( 1 ) plus one front-seat passenger, the mass of the passenger being 75 kg }1 per cent.
2.3.1. Vehicles fitted with suspension enabling their ground clearance to be adjusted shall be tested under the normal conditions of use specified by the vehicle manufacturer.
No.125 2010-07-31
3D reference system [No.014 2007-12-06A4] @ Three-dimensional reference system Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;
No.014 2007-12-06
3D reference system [No.016 2007-11-30A15] @ Three-dimensional reference system Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this annex;
No.016 2007-11-30
3D reference system [No.017 2006-12-27] @ Three dimensional reference system Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;
No.017 2006-12-27
3D reference system [No.025 2010-08-14A3] @ Three-dimensional reference system head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this Annex;
No.025 2010-08-14
3D reference system [No.029 2010-11-20A4] @ Three dimensional reference system protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE eHf POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.9. "Three dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this Annex.
No.029 2010-11-20
3D reference system [No.046 2010-07-10A8] @ Three-dimensional reference system Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in Appendix 2 to this annex;
No.046 2010-07-10
3D reference system [No.080 2010-06-30A4] @ Three-dimensional reference system Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the eHf point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Three-dimensional reference system" means a system as described in appendix 2 to this annex;
No.080 2010-06-30
3point belt [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Three-point belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.3. Three-point belt : A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.
No.016 2007-11-30
3point belt [No.080 2010-06-30] @ 3-point belt Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "3-point belt" for the purposes of this Regulation also includes belts with more than three anchorage points.
No.080 2010-06-30
80 per cent stop valve [No.067 2008-03-14] @ 80 per cent stop valve LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicatorf means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;
No.067 2008-03-14
A (category, Electric regenerative braking system of ) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Electric regenerative braking system of category A, B Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
No.013H 2015-12-22
a (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ a : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force
No.055 2006-12-27
A Class Headlamp [No.112 2014-08-22] @ Classes (A or B) Headlamps headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.
No.112 2014-08-22
A pillar [No.029 2010-11-20] @ A-pillar protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "A-pillar" means the foremost and outermost roof support
No.029 2010-11-20
A pillar [No.125 2010-07-31] @ A pillar Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "A pillar" means any roof support forward of the vertical transverse plane located 68 mm in front of the V points and includes non-transparent items such as windscreen mouldings and door frames, attached or contiguous to such a support.
No.125 2010-07-31
A pillar [REG. No 078/2009] @ A-pillar protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,
1. "A-pillar" means the foremost and outermost roof support extending from the chassis to the roof of the vehicle; REG. No 078/2009
A, B and C (speed, engine) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ engine speeds A, B and C Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine speeds A, B and C" means the test speeds within the engine operating speed range to be used for the ESC test and the ELR test, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;
No.049 2008-04-12
A, B and C (speed, engine) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ engine speeds A, B and C Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine speeds A, B and C" means the test speeds within the engine operating speed range to be used for the ESC test and the ELR test, as set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation;
No.049 2010-08-31
ABS [No.078 2015-01-30] @ ABS (Antilock brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Antilock brake system (ABS)" means a system which senses wheel slip and automatically modulates the pressure producing the braking forces at the wheel(s) to limit the degree of wheel slip.
No.078 2015-01-30
absorber (Energy) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Energy absorber Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Energy absorber : Device designed to disperse energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forming part of a belt assembly.
No.016 2007-11-30
absorber (Energy) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Energy absorber Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Energy absorber
Device designed to disperse energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forming part of a belt assembly.
No.016 2011-09-09
absorber (Energy) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Energy absorber Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Energy absorber
Device designed to disperse energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forming part of a belt assembly.
No.016 2015-11-20
absorber (Energy) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Energy absorber Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Energy absorber" means a device which is designed to dissipate energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forms part of a child restraint.
No.044 2007-11-23
absorber (Energy) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Energy absorber Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Energy absorber" means a device which is designed to dissipate energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forms part of a child restraint.
No.044 2011-09-09
absorber (Energy) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Energy absorber Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Energy absorber" means a device which is designed to dissipate energy independently of or jointly with the strap and forms part of a Child Restraint System.
No.129 2014-03-29
acceleration (Lateral) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Lateral acceleration Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Lateral acceleration" means the component of the acceleration vector of a point in the vehicle perpendicular to the vehicle x axis (longitudinal) and parallel to the road plane.
No.013H 2010-08-31
acceleration (Lateral) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Lateral acceleration Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Lateral acceleration" means the component of the acceleration vector of a point in the vehicle perpendicular to the vehicle x axis (longitudinal) and parallel to the road plane.
No.013H 2015-12-22
acceleration (Pre) [No.051 2007-05-30] @ Pre-acceleration Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Pre-acceleration" means application of acceleration control device prior to AA' for the purpose of achieving stable acceleration between AA' and BB'.
No.051 2007-05-30
acceleration (Reference) [No.051 2007-05-30] @ Reference acceleration Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Reference acceleration" means the required acceleration during the acceleration test on the test track.
No.051 2007-05-30
acceleration (Target) [No.051 2007-05-30] @ Target acceleration Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Target acceleration" means an acceleration at a partial throttle condition in urban traffic and is derived from statistical investigations.
No.051 2007-05-30
access [No.049 2008-04-12A9] @ access Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"access" means the availability of all emission-related OBD data including all fault codes required for the inspection,
diagnosis, servicing or repair of emissions related parts of the vehicle, via the serial interface of the standard diagnostic connector;
No.049 2008-04-12
Access [No.083 2012-02-15A11] @ Access Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access" means the availability of all emission-related OBD data including all fault codes required for the inspection, diagnosis, servicing or repair of emissions-related parts of the vehicle, via the serial interface for the standard diagnostic connection (pursuant to Appendix 1 to this Annex, paragraph 6.5.3.5).
No.083 2012-02-15
Access passage [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Access passage Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access passage" means the space extending inwards into the vehicle from the service door up to the outermost edge of the upper step (edge of the gangway), intercommunication staircase or half-staircase. Where there is no step at the door, the space to be considered as access passage shall be that which is measured according to annex 3, paragraph 7.7.1. up to a distance of 300 mm from the starting position of the inner face of the dual panel.
No.107 2006-12-27
Access passage [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Access passage Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access passage" means the space extending inwards into the vehicle from the service door up to the outermost edge of the upper step (edge of the gangway), intercommunication staircase or half- staircase. Where there is no step at the door, the space to be considered as access passage shall be that which is measured according to Annex 3, paragraph 7.7.1 up to a distance of 300 mm from the starting position of the inner face of the test gauge.
No.107 2010-09-29
Access passage [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Access passage Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Access passage" means the space extending inwards into the vehicle from the service door up to the outermost edge of the upper step (edge of the gangway), intercommunication staircase or half-staircase. Where there is no step at the door, the space to be considered as access passage shall be that which is measured according to Annex 3, paragraph 7.7.1 up to a distance of 300 mm from the starting position of the inner face of the test gauge.
No.107 2015-06-18
access to information [REG. No 692/2008] @ access to information emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles
23. "access to information" means the availability of all vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information, required for the inspection, diagnosis, servicing or repair of the vehicle. REG. No 692/2008
accessory fitted to the container [No.067 2008-03-14] @ Accessories fitted to the container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicatorf means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;
No.067 2008-03-14
accessory fitted to the container [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Accessories fitted to the container using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container:
2.5.1. Manual valve;
2.5.2. Pressure sensor/indicator;
2.5.3. Pressure relief valve (discharge valve);
2.5.4. Pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
2.5.5. Automatic cylinder valve;
2.5.6. Excess flow valve;
2.5.7. Gas-tight housing.
No.110 2011-05-07
Accessory fitted to the container or tank [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Accessories fitted to the container or tank using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.1. "Manual valve" means valve which is operated manually.
4.16.2. "Pressure sensor/indicator" means a pressurised device which indicates the gas or liquid pressure.
4.16.3. "Excess flow valve" means valve which automatically shuts off or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.
4.16.4. "Gas-tight housing" means a device that vents gas leakage to outside the vehicle including the gas ventilation hose.
No.110 2015-06-30
accumulation schedule (Service) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Service accumulation schedule Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.58. "Service accumulation schedule" means the ageing cycle and the service accumulation period for determining the deterioration factors for the engine-after-treatment system family;
No.049 2013-06-24
accumulation schedule (Service) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Service accumulation schedule Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.75. "Service accumulation schedule" means the ageing cycle and the service accumulation period for determining the deterioration factors for the engine-after-treatment system family;
No.096 2014-03-22
Ackerman steer angle [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Ackerman steer angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ackerman steer angle" means the angle whose tangent is the wheelbase divided by the radius of the turn at a very low speed.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Ackermann steer angle [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Ackermann steer angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ackermann steer angle" means the angle whose tangent is the wheelbase divided by the radius of the turn at a very low speed.
No.013H 2015-12-22
activated door locking system (Automatically) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Automatically activated door locking system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Automatically activated door locking system" means a system that locks the doors automatically at a pre-set speed or under any other condition as defined by the manufacturer.
No.095 2015-07-10
Active driving possible mode [No.100 2009-02-14] @ Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2.21. "Active driving possible mode" means a vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) will cause the drive train to move the vehicle. No.100 2009-02-14
Active driving possible mode [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Active driving possible mode" means the vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) or release of the brake system will cause the electric power train to move the vehicle.
No.100 2011-02-14
Active driving possible mode [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Active driving possible mode Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Active driving possible mode" means the vehicle mode when application of pressure to the accelerator pedal (or activation of an equivalent control) or release of the brake system will cause the electric power train to move the vehicle.
No.100 2015-03-31
active DTC [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Confirmed and active DTC Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.10. "Confirmed and active DTC" means a DTC that is stored during the time the NCD system concludes that a malfunction exists.
No.096 2014-03-22
Actual seat back angle [No.061 2010-06-30A3] @ Actual seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Actual seat-back angle" means the angle formed by the vertical through the eHf point with the torso reference line of the human body represented by the manikin described in paragraph 3 below.
No.061 2010-06-30
Actual seat back angle [No.125 2010-07-31] @ Actual seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.6.
No.125 2010-07-31
Actual torso angle [No.014 2007-12-06A4] @ Actual torso angle Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the eHf point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below);
No.014 2007-12-06
Actual torso angle [No.016 2007-11-30A15] @ Actual torso angle Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the eHf point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design
torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2. below):
No.016 2007-11-30
Actual torso angle [No.017 2006-12-27] @ Actual torso angle Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2. below);
No.017 2006-12-27
Actual torso angle [No.025 2010-08-14A3] @ Actual torso angle head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).
No.025 2010-08-14
Actual torso angle [No.029 2010-11-20A4] @ Actual torso angle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE eHf POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).
No.029 2010-11-20
Actual torso angle [No.046 2010-07-10A8] @ Actual torso angle Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line usingthe back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torsoangle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).
No.046 2010-07-10
Actual torso angle [No.080 2010-06-30A4] @ Actual torso angle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the eHf point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the eHf point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3 DH machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below);
No.080 2010-06-30
Actuation [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Actuation Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver (or in the case of some trailers, by an assistant) to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or in appropriate cases the kinetic energy of a trailer, or a combination of these various kinds of energy;
2.4.1. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.
No.013 2010-09-30
Actuation [No.013 2016-02-18] š Actuation Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver (or in the case of some trailers, by an assistant) to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or in appropriate cases the kinetic energy of a trailer, or a combination of these various kinds of energy;
2.4.1. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.
No.013 2016-02-18
Actuation [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Actuation Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Actuation [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Actuation Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.
No.013H 2015-12-22
adaptability (self) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ self adaptability Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "self adaptability" means any engine device allowing the air/fuel ratio to be kept constant;
No.049 2008-04-12
adaptability (self) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ self adaptability Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "self adaptability" means any engine device allowing the air/fuel ratio to be kept constant;
No.049 2010-08-31
Adaptive front lighting system [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "AFS") means a lighting device type-approved according to Regulation No 123, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam);
No.048 2011-12-06
Adaptive front lighting system [No.123 2010-08-24] @ AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "system") means a lighting device, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped- beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam) with a minimum functional content as indicated in paragraph 6.1.1; such systems consist of the "system control", one or more "supply and operating device(s)", if any, and the "installation units" of the right and of the left side of the vehicle;
No.123 2010-08-24
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.28. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "AFS") means a lighting device type-approved according to Regulation No 123, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam); No.048 2008-05-23
adaptive front-lighting systems [No.123 2006-12-27] @ adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems SCOPE
This Regulation applies to adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) for motor vehicles
No.123 2006-12-27
additional anchorage [No.044 2007-11-23] @ additional anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.044 2007-11-23
additional anchorage [No.044 2011-09-09] @ additional anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in Annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg.
No.044 2011-09-09
Additional lighting unit [No.113 2014-06-14] @ Additional lighting unit headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.9. "Additional lighting unit" means the part of a headlamp system that provides the bend lighting. It is independent from the device that provides the principal passing beam, may consist of optical, mechanical and electrical components, and it may be grouped and/or reciprocally incorporated with other lighting or light- signalling devices.
No.113 2014-06-14
Additional steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] @ Additional steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.2.4. "Additional steering equipment" means a system, independent of the main steering system, by which the steering angle of one or more axle(s) of the steering system can be influenced selectively for manoeuvring purposes. No.079 2008-05-27
Adhesion on wet surface [No.117 2011-11-23] @ Adhesion on wet surfaces Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.1. "Adhesion on wet surfaces" means the relative braking performance, on a wet surface, of a test vehicle equipped with the candidate tyre in comparison to that of the same test vehicle equipped with a reference tyre (SRTT).
No.117 2011-11-23
Adhesion on wet surfaces [No.117 2008-08-29] @ Adhesion on wet surfaces Tyre noise and wet grip 2.11. "Adhesion on wet surfaces" means the relative braking performance, on a wet surface, of a test vehicle equipped with the candidate tyre in comparison to that of the same test vehicle equipped with a reference tyre (SRTT). No.117 2008-08-29
Adjacent [No.060 2014-10-15] @ Adjacent Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Adjacent", with respect to a symbol identifying a control, tell-tale or indicator, means that the symbol is in close proximity to the control, tell-tale or indicator and no other control, tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol or source of illumination appears between an identification symbol and the control, tell-tale, or indicator which that symbol identifies.
No.060 2014-10-15
Adjacent [No.121 2016-01-08] @ Adjacent Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Adjacent" means that no control, tell-tale, indicator or other potential source of distraction appears between the identifying symbol and the tell-tale, indicator or control which that symbol identifies.
No.121 2016-01-08
Adjacent [No.121 2010-07-10] @ Adjacent Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Adjacent" means that no control, tell-tale, indicator, or other potential source of distraction appearsbetween the identifying symbol and the tell-tale, indicator, or control which that symbol identifies.
No.121 2010-07-10
Adjustable limit speed Vadj [No.089 2007-06-19] @ Adjustable limit speed Vadj Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.5. "Adjustable limit speed Vadj" means the speed voluntarily set by the driver;
No.089 2007-06-19
Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF [No.089 2007-06-19] @ Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.6. "Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF" means a function which allows the driver to set a vehicle speed Vadj, and when activated limits the vehicle automatically to that speed;
No.089 2007-06-19
adjuster (flow, Gas) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Gas flow adjuster using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.33. "Gas flow adjuster" means a gas flow restricting device, installed downstream of a pressure regulator, controlling gas flow to the engine.
No.110 2015-06-30
adjuster (flow, Gas) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Gas flow adjuster using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.18. "Gas flow adjuster" means a gas flow restricting device, installed downstream of a pressure regulator, controlling gas flow to the engine.
No.110 2011-05-07
adjuster (Quick) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Quick adjuster Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement
No.129 2014-03-29
adjuster mounted directly on child restraint [No.044 2007-11-23] @ adjuster mounted directly on child restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the restraint or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer, the configuration of the vehicle, or both. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the safety belt;
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement;
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which
is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.
No.044 2007-11-23
Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System" means an adjuster for the harness belt which is directly mounted on the Child Restraint System, as opposed to being directly supported by the strap that it is designed to adjust.
No.129 2014-03-29
Adjusting device [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Adjusting device Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the belt or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the belt.
No.129 2014-03-29
adjusting device (Belt) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device
A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.
No.016 2015-11-20
adjusting device (Belt) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device : A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.
No.016 2007-11-30
adjusting device (Belt) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device
A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.
No.016 2011-09-09
Adjusting device [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Adjusting device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the restraint or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer, the configuration of the vehicle, or both. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the safety belt;
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement;
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which
is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.
No.044 2007-11-23
Adjusting device [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Adjusting device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the restraint or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer, the configuration of the vehicle, or both. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the safety belt;
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement.
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.
No.044 2011-09-09
Adjustment [No.123 2006-12-27] @ Adjustment Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.18. "Adjustment" means the use of the means provided by the system for vertical and/or horizontal aiming of the beam;
No.123 2006-12-27
Adjustment [No.123 2010-08-24] @ Adjustment Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.18. "Adjustment" means the use of the means provided by the system for vertical and/or horizontal aiming of the beam;
No.123 2010-08-24
adjustment device for height (Belt) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Belt adjustment device for height Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.
No.016 2015-11-20
adjustment device for height (Belt) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Belt adjustment device for height Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.
No.016 2011-09-09
Adjustment factor [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Adjustment factors Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.1. "Adjustment factors" mean additive (upward adjustment factor and downward adjustment factor) or multiplicative factors to be considered during the periodic (infrequent) regeneration;
No.096 2014-03-22
Adjustment system [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Adjustment system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.11.1. Longitudinal displacement;
2.11.2. Vertical displacement;
2.11.3. Angular displacement;
No.014 2015-08-19
Adjustment system [No.080 2013-08-24] @ Adjustment system strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the seated occupant;
No.080 2013-08-24
Adjustment system [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Adjustment system Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Adjustment system" means the complete device by which the vehicle seat or its parts can be adjusted to suit the physique of the seat's adult occupant; this device may, in particular, permit longitudinal displacement, and/or vertical displacement, and/or angular displacement
No.129 2014-03-29
adjustment system (inclination, Horizontal) [No.053 2013-06-18] @ HIAS (Horizontal inclination adjustment system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Horizontal inclination adjustment system (HIAS)" means a device that adjusts the horizontal inclination of the headlamp towards zero;
No.053 2013-06-18
Adjustment system [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Adjustment system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.12.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.12.2. vertical displacement;
2.12.3. angular displacement;
No.014 2007-12-06
adjustment system [No.014 2011-04-28] @ adjustment system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.11.1. longitudinal displacement,
2.11.2. vertical displacement,
2.11.3. angular displacement;
No.014 2011-04-28
Adjustment system [No.017 2006-12-27] @ Adjustment system Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.6. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant. This device may, in particular, permit:
2.6.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.6.2. vertical displacement;
2.6.3. angular displacement;
No.017 2006-12-27
Adjustment system [No.017 2010-08-31] @ Adjustment system seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant. This device may, in particular, permit:
2.6.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.6.2. vertical displacement;
2.6.3. angular displacement;
No.017 2010-08-31
Adjustment system [No.025 2005-12-16] @ Adjustment system Head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant.
This device may, in particular, permit:
2.9.1. longitudinal displacement,
2.9.2. vertical displacement,
2.9.3. angular deplacement;
No.025 2005-12-16
Adjustment system [No.025 2010-08-14] @ Adjustment system head restraints (headrests) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant.
This device may, in particular, permit:
2.9.1. longitudinal displacement,
2.9.2. vertical displacement,
2.9.3. angular displacement;
No.025 2010-08-14
Adjustment system [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Adjustment system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Adjustment system" means the complete device by which the vehicle seat or its parts can be adjusted to suit the physique of the seat's adult occupant; this device may, in particular, permit:
2.21.1. longitudinal displacement; and/or
2.21.2. vertical displacement; and/or
2.21.3. angular displacement.
No.044 2007-11-23
Adjustment system [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Adjustment system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Adjustment system" means the complete device by which the vehicle seat or its parts can be adjusted to suit the physique of the seat's adult occupant; this device may, in particular, permit:
2.21.1. longitudinal displacement; and/or
2.21.2. vertical displacement; and/or
2.21.3. angular displacement.
No.044 2011-09-09
Adjustment system [No.080 2010-06-30] @ Adjustment system Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Adjustment system" means the device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the seated occupant;
No.080 2010-06-30
Adjustment system of the seat [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Adjustment system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Adjustment system of the seat
The complete device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.21.1. Longitudinal displacement;
2.21.2. Vertical displacement;
2.21.3. Angular displacement.
No.016 2015-11-20
Adjustment system of the seat [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Adjustment system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Adjustment system of the seat
The complete device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.21.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.21.2. vertical displacement;
2.21.3. angular displacement.
No.016 2007-11-30
Adjustment system of the seat [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Adjustment system of the seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. Adjustment system of the seat
The complete device by which the seat or its parts can be adjusted to a position suited to the morphology of the seated occupant; this device may, in particular, permit of:
2.21.1. longitudinal displacement;
2.21.2. vertical displacement;
2.21.3. angular displacement.
No.016 2011-09-09
ADR [No.013 2010-09-30A05] @ European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers y—ªz
2.3. Endurance braking system y—ªz
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 y—ªz
No.013 2010-09-30
Adult safety-belt webbing guide [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.
No.044 2007-11-23
Adult safety-belt webbing guide [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.
No.044 2011-09-09
Advanced Driver Assistance Steering System [No.079 2008-05-27] @ Advanced Driver Assistance Steering System Steering equipment 2.3.4. "Advanced Driver Assistance Steering System" means a system, additional to the main steering system, that provides assistance to the driver in steering the vehicle but in which the driver remains at all times in primary control of the vehicle. It comprises one or both of the following functions: No.079 2008-05-27
Advanced Emergency Braking System [No.131 2014-07-19] @ AEBS (Advanced Emergency Braking System) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Advanced Emergency Braking System (AEBS)" means a system which can automatically detect a potential forward collision and activate the vehicle braking system to decelerate the vehicle with the purpose of avoiding or mitigating a collision.
No.131 2014-07-19
advanced emergency braking system [REG. No 661/2009] @ advanced emergency braking system safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + ƒ¿ 5. "advanced emergency braking system" means a system which can automatically detect an emergency situation and activate the vehicle braking system to decelerate the vehicle with the purpose of avoiding or mitigating a collision; REG. No 661/2009
AEBS [No.131 2014-07-19] @ AEBS (Advanced Emergency Braking System) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Advanced Emergency Braking System (AEBS)" means a system which can automatically detect a potential forward collision and activate the vehicle braking system to decelerate the vehicle with the purpose of avoiding or mitigating a collision.
No.131 2014-07-19
AEBS (type with regard to its, Vehicle) [No.131 2014-07-19] @ Vehicle type with regard to its Advanced Emergency Braking System Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its Advanced Emergency Braking System" means a category of vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as:
(a) The manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) Vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the Advanced Emergency Braking System;
(c) The type and design of the Advanced Emergency Braking System.
No.131 2014-07-19
AECS [No.049 2008-04-12] @ auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;
No.049 2008-04-12
AECS [No.049 2010-08-31] @ auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;
No.049 2010-08-31
Aerial [No.026 2010-08-14] @ Aerial external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Aerial" means any device used for transmitting and/or receiving electromagnetic signals.
No.026 2010-08-14
AES [No.049 2013-06-24] @ AES (Auxiliary Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Auxiliary Emission Strategy" (AES) means an emission strategy that becomes active and replaces or modifies a base emission strategy for a specific purpose and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions and only remains operational as long as those conditions exist;
No.049 2013-06-24
AFS [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "AFS") means a lighting device type-approved according to Regulation No 123, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam);
No.048 2011-12-06
AFS [No.123 2006-12-27] @ adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems SCOPE
This Regulation applies to adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) for motor vehicles
No.123 2006-12-27
AFS [No.123 2006-12-271] @ Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "system") means a lighting device, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam) with a minimum functional content as indicated in paragraph 6.1.1.; such systems consist of the "system control", one or more "supply and operating device(s)", if any, and the "installation units" of the right and of the left side of the vehicle;
No.123 2006-12-27
AFS [No.123 2010-08-24] @ AFS (Adaptive front lighting system) Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Adaptive front lighting system" (or "system") means a lighting device, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped- beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam) with a minimum functional content as indicated in paragraph 6.1.1; such systems consist of the "system control", one or more "supply and operating device(s)", if any, and the "installation units" of the right and of the left side of the vehicle;
No.123 2010-08-24
AFS control signal [No.048 2008-05-23] @ AFS control signal Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.28.5. "AFS control signal" (V, E, W, T) means the input to the AFS in accordance with the paragraph 6.22.7.4. of this Regulation; No.048 2008-05-23
AFS control signal [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ AFS control signal (V, E, W, T) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.5. "AFS control signal" (V, E, W, T) means the input to the AFS in accordance with the paragraph 6.22.7.4 of this Regulation;
No.048 2011-12-06
after treatment device (Particulate) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Particulate after-treatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Particulate after-treatment device" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;
No.049 2013-06-24
after treatment device (Particulate) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Particulate after-treatment device Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.59. "Particulate after-treatment device" means an exhaust after-treatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PM) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;
No.096 2014-03-22
after treatment system (Exhaust) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Exhaust after-treatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Exhaust after-treatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation, 3-way or any other), particulate filter, deNO x system, combined deNO x particulate filter, or any other emission reducing device, that is installed downstream of the engine;
No.049 2013-06-24
after treatment system (Exhaust) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Exhaust after-treatment system Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.33. "Exhaust after-treatment system" means a catalyst, particulate filter, deNO x system, combined deNO x particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) and turbochargers, which are considered an integral part of the engine;
No.096 2014-03-22
after treatment system family (Engine) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Engine after-treatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Engine after-treatment system family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family, but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;
No.049 2013-06-24
after treatment system family (Engine) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Engine after treatment system family Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.28. "Engine-after-treatment system family" means a manufacturer's grouping of engines that complies with the definition of engine family, but which are further grouped into a family of engine families utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;
No.096 2014-03-22
aftertreatment device (particulate) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ particulate aftertreatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "particulate aftertreatment device" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;
No.049 2008-04-12
aftertreatment device (particulate) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ particulate aftertreatment device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "particulate aftertreatment device" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to reduce emissions of particulate pollutants (PT) through a mechanical, aerodynamic, diffusional or inertial separation;
No.049 2010-08-31
aftertreatment system (exhaust) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ exhaust aftertreatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "exhaust aftertreatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation or 3-way), particulate filter, deNOx system, combined deNOx-particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation, which, where fitted, is considered an integral part of the engine system;
No.049 2008-04-12
aftertreatment system (exhaust) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ exhaust aftertreatment system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "exhaust aftertreatment system" means a catalyst (oxidation or 3-way), particulate filter, deNOx system, combined deNOx-particulate filter or any other emission-reducing device that is installed downstream of the engine. This definition excludes exhaust gas recirculation, which, where fitted, is considered an integral part of the engine system;
No.049 2010-08-31
aftertreatment system family (engine-) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ engine-aftertreatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "engine-aftertreatment system family" means, for testing over a service accumulation schedule to establish deterioration factors according to Annex 7 to this Regulation and for checking the conformity of in-service vehicles/engines according to Annex 8 to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;
No.049 2008-04-12
aftertreatment system family (engine-) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ engine-aftertreatment system family Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "engine-aftertreatment system family" means, for testing over a service accumulation schedule to establish deterioration factors according to Annex 7 to this Regulation and for checking the conformity of in-service vehicles/engines according to Annex 8 to this Regulation, a manufacturer's grouping of engines that comply with the definition of engine family but which are further grouped into engines utilising a similar exhaust after-treatment system;
No.049 2010-08-31
Ageing cycle [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Ageing cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Ageing cycle" means the vehicle or engine operation (speed, load, power) to be executed during the service accumulation period;
No.049 2013-06-24
Ageing cycle [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Ageing cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.2. "Ageing cycle" means the machine or engine operation (speed, load, power) to be executed during the service accumulation period;
No.096 2014-03-22
Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (European) [No.013 2010-09-30A05] @ European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers y—ªz
2.3. Endurance braking system y—ªz
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 y—ªz
No.013 2010-09-30
agricultural tractor [No.071 2004-03-31] @ agricultural tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. For the purposes of this Regulation "agricultural tractor" means any power-driven vehicle, either wheeled or tracklaying, which has at least two axles, whose function depends essentially on its tractive power, and which is specially designed to pull, push, carry or actuate certain implements, machines or trailers intended for use in agriculture or forestry. Such a tractor may be arranged to carry a load and attendants;
No.071 2004-03-31
agricultural tractor [No.071 2010-07-31] @ agricultural tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. For the purposes of this Regulation "agricultural tractor" means any power-driven vehicle, either wheeled or tracklaying, which has at least two axles, whose function depends essentially on its tractive power, and which is specially designed to pull, push, carry or actuate certain implements, machines or trailers intended for use in agriculture or forestry. Such a tractor may be arranged to carry a load and attendants.
No.071 2010-07-31
agricultural tyre (Type of) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Type of agricultural tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Type of agricultural tyre" means a category of tyres which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.1.1. the manufacturer;
2.1.2. tyre-size designation;
2.1.3. category of use:
(a) Tractor - Steering wheel:
(b) Tractor - Drive wheel - standard tread
(c) Tractor - Drive wheel - special tread
(d) Implement - traction:
(e) Implement - trailer;
(f) Implement - mixed applications;
(g) Forestry machines — standard tread;
(h) Forestry machines — special tread.
2.1.4. structure (diagonal (bias-ply), bias-belted, radial-ply);
2.1.5. speed category symbol;
2.1.6. load capacity index;
2.1.7. tyre cross-section;
No.106 2010-09-30
aid (Starting) [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Starting aid Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine start up without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine, e.g. glow plug, injection timing change, etc.;
No.083 2012-02-15
aid (Starting) [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Starting aid Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine start up without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine, e.g. glow plug, injection timing change, etc.
No.083 2015-07-03
aid (Starting) [No.101 2007-06-19] @ Starting aid CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Starting aid" means a device which assists engine starting without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture, e.g. glow plug, changed injection timing, etc.;
No.101 2007-06-19
Aiming [No.123 2006-12-27] @ Aiming Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.17. "Aiming" means the positioning of the beam or part thereof on an aiming screen according to the relevant criteria;
No.123 2006-12-27
Aiming [No.123 2010-08-24] @ Aiming Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.17. "Aiming" means the positioning of the beam or part thereof on an aiming screen according to the relevant criteria;
No.123 2010-08-24
air (Secondary) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] @ Secondary air Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Secondary air" refers to air introduced into the exhaust system by means of a pump or aspirator valve or other means that is intended to aid in the oxidation of HC and CO contained in the exhaust gas stream
No.083 2012-02-15
Air bag [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Air-bag protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Air-bag" means a flexible bag that is designed to be filled with a gas under pressure, and is:
2.7.1. Designed to protect the vehicle driver in an impact against the steering control;
2.7.2. Inflated by a device which is actuated in case of vehicle's impact;
No.012 2013-03-27
air mixer (Gas) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Gas/air mixer using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.31. "Gas/air mixer" means a device for mixing the gaseous fuel and intake air for the engine.
No.110 2015-06-30
Airbag [No.012 2008-06-26] @ Air-bag Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.7. "Air-bag" means a flexible bag that is designed to be filled with a gas under pressure, and is:
2.7.1. designed to protect the vehicle driver in an impact against the steering control;
2.7.2. inflated by a device which is actuated in case of vehicle's impact;
No.012 2008-06-26
Airbag [No.021 2008-07-16] @ Airbag Interior fittings 2.17. "Airbag" means a device installed to supplement safety belts and restraint systems in power driven vehicles, i.e. systems which in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploy a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the severity of the contacts of one or more parts of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment. No.021 2008-07-16
Airbag [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Airbag Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Airbag" means a device installed to supplement safety belts and restraint systems in power- driven vehicles, i.e. systems which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle, automatically deploy a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.
No.094 2012-09-20
airbag (Passenger) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Passenger airbag Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision.
No.016 2015-11-20
airbag (Passenger) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Passenger airbag Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driverfs in the event of a frontal collision.
No.094 2012-09-20
airbag (Passenger) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Passenger airbag Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision.
No.016 2007-11-30
airbag (Passenger) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Passenger airbag Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driverfs in the event of a frontal collision.
No.016 2011-09-09
airbag (Passenger) [No.094 2010-05-28] @ Passenger airbag Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Passenger airbag" means an airbag assembly intended to protect occupant(s) in seats other than the driver's in the event of a frontal collision.
No.094 2010-05-28
Airbag [No.094 2010-05-28] @ Airbag Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Airbag" means a device installed to supplement safety belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. systems which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle, automatically deploy a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.
No.094 2010-05-28
Airbag assembly [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Airbag assembly Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Airbag assembly" means a device installed to supplement safety-belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. system which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploys a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.
No.016 2015-11-20
Airbag assembly [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Airbag assembly Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Airbag assembly" means a device installed to supplement safety-belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. system which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploys a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.
No.016 2007-11-30
Airbag assembly [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Airbag assembly Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Airbag assembly" means a device installed to supplement safety-belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. system which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploys a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.
No.016 2011-09-09
Alarm (Panic) [No.097 2012-05-08a] @ Panic Alarm alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Panic Alarm" means a device which enables a person to use an alarm, installed on the vehicle, to summon assistance in an emergency.
No.097 2012-05-08
alarm (Panic) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] @ Panic alarm Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.12. "Panic alarm" means a device which enables a person to use an alarm, installed on the vehicle, to summon assistance in an emergency.
No.116 2012-02-16
alarm (Panic) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] @ Panic alarm Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.12. "Panic alarm" means a device that enables a person to use an alarm, installed on the vehicle, to summon assistance in an emergency.
No.116 2010-06-30
Alarm system [No.097 2012-05-082] @ AS (Alarm system(s)) alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.
No.097 2012-05-08
Alarm system [No.116 2012-02-16P3] @ AS (Alarm system) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.
No.116 2012-02-16
alarm system (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.097 2012-05-082] @ Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer"s trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the AS;
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.
No.097 2012-05-08
alarm system (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.116 2012-02-16P3] @ Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark,
(b) vehicle features which significantly influence the performances of the AS,
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.
No.116 2012-02-16
alarm system (Vehicle type with regard to its) [No.116 2010-06-30P3] @ Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.2. "Vehicle type with regard to its alarm system" means vehicles that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) vehicle features that significantly influence the performances of the AS;
(c) the type and design of the AS or VAS.
No.116 2010-06-30
alarm system (Vehicle) [No.097 2012-05-08a] @ VAS (Vehicle alarm system) alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle;
No.097 2012-05-08
alarm system (Vehicle) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] @ VAS (Vehicle alarm system) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.2. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.
No.116 2012-02-16
alarm system (Vehicle) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] @ Vehicle alarm system (VAS) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.2. "Vehicle alarm system" (VAS) means a system intended for installation on (a) type(s) of vehicle(s), designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.
No.116 2010-06-30
alarm system (vehicle, Approval of a) [No.097 2012-05-08a] @ Approval of a vehicle alarm system alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 5, 6 and 7 below;
No.097 2012-05-08
alarm system (vehicle, Approval of a) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] @ Approval of a vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.10. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 below.
No.116 2012-02-16
alarm system (vehicle, Approval of a) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] @ Approval of a vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.10. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 below.
No.116 2010-06-30
alarm system (vehicle, Type of) [No.097 2012-05-08a] @ Type of vehicle alarm system alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of sensor;
(c) the kind of warning device;
(d) the kind of control equipment;
No.097 2012-05-08
alarm system (vehicle, Type of) [No.116 2012-02-16P2] @ Type of vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.9. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems which do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturerfs trade name or mark,
(b) the kind of sensor,
(c) the kind of warning device,
(d) the kind of control equipment.
No.116 2012-02-16
alarm system (vehicle, Type of) [No.116 2010-06-30P2] @ Type of vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.9. "Type of vehicle alarm system" means systems that do not differ significantly in such essential aspects as:
(a) the manufacturer's trade name or mark;
(b) the kind of sensor;
(c) the kind of warning device;
(d) the kind of control equipment.
No.116 2010-06-30
Alarm system(s) [No.116 2010-06-30P3] @ Alarm system(s) (AS) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.
No.116 2010-06-30
alert signal (collision, Rear end) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ RECAS (Rear-end collision alert signal) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Rear-end collision alert signal (RECAS)" means an automatic signal given by the leading vehicle to the following vehicle. It warns that the following vehicle needs to take emergency action to avoid a collision
No.048 2011-12-06
All composite container [No.067 2008-03-14] @ All-composite container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" means any vessel used for the storage of liquefied petroleum gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
(i) a standard cylindrical container with a cylindrical shell, two dished ends either torispherical or elliptical and the required openings;
(ii) a special container: other containers than standard cylindrical containers. The dimensional characteristics are given in Annex 10, Appendix 5;
2.3.2. "All-composite container" means a container made only of composite materials with a non metallic liner.
2.3.3. "Batch of containers" means a maximum of 200 containers of the same type produced consecutively on the same production line.
No.067 2008-03-14
All wheel steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] @ All-wheel steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.3.3.1. "All-wheel steering equipment" in which all the wheels are steered; No.079 2008-05-27
Alternative fuel vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Alternative fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Alternative fuel vehicle" means a vehicle designed to be capable of running on at least one type of fuel that is either gaseous at atmospheric temperature and pressure, or substantially non- mineral oil derived;
No.083 2012-02-15
Alternative fuel vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Alternative fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Alternative fuel vehicle" means a vehicle designed to be capable of running on at least one type of fuel that is either gaseous at atmospheric temperature and pressure, or substantially non-mineral oil derived.
No.083 2015-07-03
alternative fuel vehicle [REG. No 595/2009] @ alternative fuel vehicle emissions 14. "alternative fuel vehicle" means a vehicle designed to be capable of running on at least one type of fuel that is either gaseous at atmospheric temperature and pressure, or substantially non-mineral oil derived;u REG. No 595/2009
Amber [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Amber Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. Colour of the light emitted from a device
2.29.3. "Amber" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] A12,A23, ,
No.048 2011-12-06
Amber (Night-time Colour) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Amber (Night-time Colour) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected from a device excluding retro-reflective tires according to Regulation No 88
2.30.3. "Amber" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries [•\] A12,A23, ,
No.048 2011-12-06
Ambinocular vision [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Ambinocular vision devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.2."Ambinocular vision" means the total field of vision obtained by the superimposition of the mon ocular fields of the right eye and the left eye (see Figure 3 below).
Figure 3
No.046 2014-08-08
Ambinocular vision [No.046 2010-07-10II] @ Ambinocular vision Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.2. "Ambinocular vision" means the total field of vision obtained by the superimposition of themonocular fields of the right eye and the left eye (see Figure 3 below). [}]
No.046 2010-07-10
an even number of lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] @ "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Two lamps" or "an even number of lamps" includes a single illuminating surface in the shape of a band, if placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor and extending on both sides to within not less than 400 mm of the extreme outer edge of the tractor, and being not less than 800 mm long. The illumination of such a surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends. The illuminating surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual illuminating surfaces in the same transverse plane occupy not less than 60 % of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of those individual illuminating surfaces.
No.086 2010-09-30
Anchorage [No.080 2013-08-24] @ Anchorage strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Anchorage" means a part of the floor or of the body of a vehicle to which a seat may be fixed;
No.080 2013-08-24
anchorage (additional) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ additional anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.044 2007-11-23
anchorage (Belt) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Belt anchorages safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;
No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage (Belt) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages
Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.
No.016 2015-11-20
anchorage (belt) [No.014 2011-04-28] @ belt anchorages safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;
No.014 2011-04-28
anchorage (Belt) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages
Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.
No.016 2007-11-30
anchorage (belt, Effective) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Effective belt anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4, the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage;
2.4.1. For example, in the case
2.4.1.1. Where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer's side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and,
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;
No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage (belt, Effective) [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Effective belt anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4., the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage.
2.4.1. For example,
2.4.1.1. where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer's side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and,
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;
No.014 2007-12-06
anchorage (low, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ ISOFIX low anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments;
No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage (low, ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ ISOFIX low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments.
No.016 2015-11-20
anchorage (low, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Isofix low anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.
No.014 2007-12-06
anchorage (low, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] @ Isofix low anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.
No.014 2011-04-28
anchorage (low, Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Isofix low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments.
No.016 2007-11-30
anchorage (low, ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ ISOFIX low anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments.
No.016 2011-09-09
anchorage (low, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Isofix low anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.044 2007-11-23
anchorage (Restraint) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Restraint anchorages Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in Annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg.
2.14.2. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX attachments;
2.14.3. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device;
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for ISOFIX, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.044 2011-09-09
anchorage (Seat) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Seat anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Seat anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;
No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage (Seat) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Seat anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. Seat anchorage
The system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure.
No.016 2015-11-20
anchorage (Seat) [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Seat anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Seat anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;
No.014 2007-12-06
anchorage (seat) [No.014 2011-04-28] @ seat anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "seat anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;
No.014 2011-04-28
anchorage (Seat) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Seat anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. Seat anchorage : The system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure.
No.016 2007-11-30
anchorage (Seat) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Seat anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. Seat anchorage
The system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure.
No.016 2011-09-09
anchorage (seat, Vehicle) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Vehicle seat anchorage Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.47. "Vehicle seat anchorage" means the system, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure, by which the adult seat as a whole is secured to the vehicle structure.
No.129 2014-03-29
anchorage (seat, Vehicle) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Vehicle seat anchorage Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Vehicle seat anchorage" means the system, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure, by which the adult seat as a whole is secured to the vehicle structure.
No.044 2007-11-23
anchorage (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ ISOFIX top tether anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure;
No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ ISOFIX top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.016 2015-11-20
anchorage (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ ISOFIX top tether anchorage Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.
2.13.1. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
2.13.2. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.
2.13.3. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No. 14.
2.13.4. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX Child Restraint System.
No.129 2014-03-29
anchorage (tether, top, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Isofix top tether anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.014 2007-12-06
anchorage (tether, top, Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Isofix top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.016 2007-11-30
anchorage (tether, top. ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ ISOFIX top tether anchorage Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.016 2011-09-09
anchorage (top-tether, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] @ Isofix top-tether anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Isofix top-tether anchorage" means a feature, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top-tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.014 2011-04-28
Anchorage [No.017 2006-12-27] @ Anchorage Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.5. "Anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;
No.017 2006-12-27
Anchorage [No.017 2010-08-31] @ Anchorage seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Anchorage" means the system by which the seat assembly is secured to the vehicle structure, including the affected parts of the vehicle structure;
No.017 2010-08-31
Anchorage [No.080 2010-06-30] @ Anchorage Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Anchorage" means a part of the floor or of the body of a vehicle to which a seat may be fixed;
No.080 2010-06-30
anchorage system (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ ISOFIX anchorages system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device;
No.014 2015-08-19
anchorage system (ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ ISOFIX anchorages system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
No.016 2015-11-20
anchorage system (ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ ISOFIX anchorage system Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "ISOFIX anchorage system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14 which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX Child Restraint System in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.11.1. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX Child Restraint System with ISOFIX attachments.
2.11.2. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirement of paragraph 6.3.3. of this Regulation, extending from the ISOFIX Child Restraint System structure, and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage.
No.129 2014-03-29
anchorages (Belt) [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Belt anchorages Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;
No.014 2007-12-06
anchorages (Belt) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages : Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.
No.016 2007-11-30
anchorages (Belt) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages
Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.
No.016 2011-09-09
anchorages (Restraint) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Restraint anchorages Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.044 2007-11-23
anchorages system (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Isofix anchorages system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
No.014 2007-12-06
anchorages system (Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] @ Isofix anchorages system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
No.014 2011-04-28
anchorages system (Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Isofix anchorages system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
No.016 2007-11-30
anchorages system (ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ ISOFIX anchorages system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX anchorages system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, and which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
No.016 2011-09-09
anchorages system (Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Isofix anchorages system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.044 2007-11-23
angle (Bank) [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Bank angle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Bank angle" means: the angle made with the vertical by the vertical longitudinal median plane of the motorcycle, when the motorcycle is rotated about its longitudinal axis (see drawing in Annex 6);
No.053 2013-06-18
angle (Entrance) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Entrance angle (symbol ƒÀ) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.7. "Entrance angle (symbol ƒÀ)" means the angle from the illumination axis to the reference axis. The entrance angle is usually not larger than 90‹ but, for completeness, its full range is defined as 0‹ ƒ ƒÀ ƒ 180‹. In order to specify the orientation in full, this angle is characterised by two components, ƒÀ 1 and ƒÀ 2 ;
No.104 2014-03-14
angle (entrance, component of the, First) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ First component of the entrance angle (symbol ƒÀ1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.10. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol ƒÀ 1 )" means the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis; range: – 180‹ ƒ ƒÀ1 ƒ 180‹;
No.104 2014-03-14
angle (entrance, component of the, Second) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Second component of the entrance angle (symbol ƒÀ2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.11. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol ƒÀ 2 )" means the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis; range – 90‹ ƒ ƒÀ2 ƒ 90‹;
No.104 2014-03-14
angle (Illumination) [No.003 2011-12-06] @ Illumination angle Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Illumination angle" means the angle between the axis of reference and the straight line connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the source of illumination.
No.003 2011-12-06
angle (Observation ) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Observation angle (symbol ƒ¿) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.4. "Observation angle (symbol ƒ¿)" means the angle between the illumination axis and the observation axis. The observation angle is always positive and, in the case of retro-reflection, is restricted to small angles;
No.104 2014-03-14
angle (pitch, CRF) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ CRF pitch angle Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "CRF pitch angle" is the angle between the bottom surface of the fixture ISO/F2 (B) as defined in Regulation No. 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2, Figure 2) and the horizontal Z plane of the vehicle as defined in Regulation No. 14 (Annex 4, Appendix 2), with the fixture installed in the vehicle as defined in Regulation No. 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2).
No.129 2014-03-29
angle (Rotation) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Rotation angle (symbol ƒÃ) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.8. "Rotation angle (symbol ƒÃ)" means the angle indicating the orientation of the retro-reflecting material by an appropriate symbol with respect to rotation about the reference axis;
No.104 2014-03-14
angle (Seat back) [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Seat back angle Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Seat back angle" means the design torso angle as defined in annex 19 of this Regulation.
No.043 2010-08-31
angle (seat back, Design) [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Design seat-back angle safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle between the vertical line through the R point and the torso line defined by the vehicle manufacturer.
No.043 2014-02-12
angle (Seat-back) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] @ Seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Seat-back angle" means the inclination of the seat back in relation to the vertical.
No.061 2010-06-30
angle (seat-back, Actual) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] @ Actual seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Actual seat-back angle" means the angle formed by the vertical through the eHf point with the torso reference line of the human body represented by the manikin described in paragraph 3 below.
No.061 2010-06-30
angle (seat-back, Design) [No.061 2010-06-30A3] @ Design seat-back angle external projections forward of the cab's rear panel [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual seat-back angle and for verifying their relationship to the "R" point and the design seat-back angle
1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle prescribed by the manufacturer which:
1.5.1. determines the seat-back angle for the lowest and most rearward normal driving position or position of use given to each seat by the vehicle manufacturer;
1.5.2. is formed at the eRf point by the vertical and the torso reference line;
1.5.3. corresponds theoretically to the actual seat-back angle.
No.061 2010-06-30
angle (Side-slip) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Side-slip or side-slip angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Side-slip or side-slip angle" means the arctangent of the ratio of the lateral velocity to the longitudinal velocity of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.
No.013H 2010-08-31
angle (slip, Side) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Side-slip or side-slip angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Side-slip or side-slip angle" means the arctangent of the ratio of the lateral velocity to the longitudinal velocity of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.
No.013H 2015-12-22
angle (steer, Ackerman) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Ackerman steer angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ackerman steer angle" means the angle whose tangent is the wheelbase divided by the radius of the turn at a very low speed.
No.013H 2010-08-31
angle (steer, Ackermann) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Ackermann steer angle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Ackermann steer angle" means the angle whose tangent is the wheelbase divided by the radius of the turn at a very low speed.
No.013H 2015-12-22
angle (test, HIAS) [No.053 2013-06-18] @ HIAS test angle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "HIAS test angle" means the angle ƒÂ created by the headlamp cut-off line and HH line (in case of an asymmetrical beam headlamp, the horizontal part of the cut-off shall be used), (see drawing in Annex 6).
No.053 2013-06-18
angle (torso, Actual) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] @ Actual torso angle Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the eHf point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below);
No.014 2007-12-06
angle (torso, Actual) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] @ Actual torso angle head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).
No.025 2010-08-14
angle (torso, Actual) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] @ Actual torso angle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE eHf POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the "H" point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3-D H machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below).
No.029 2010-11-20
angle (torso, Actual) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] @ Actual torso angle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the eHf point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the eHf point and the torso line using the back angle quadrant on the 3 DH machine. The actual torso angle corresponds theoretically to the design torso angle (for tolerances see paragraph 3.2.2 below);
No.080 2010-06-30
angle (torso, Design) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] @ Design torso angle Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the eRf point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;
No.014 2007-12-06
angle (torso, Design) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] @ Design torso angle head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the eRf point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer.
No.025 2010-08-14
angle (torso, Design) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] @ Design torso angle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE eHf POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measured between a vertical line through the eRf point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer.
No.029 2010-11-20
angle (torso, Design) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] @ Design torso angle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the eHf point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design torso angle" means the angle measures between a vertical line through the eRf point and the torso line in a position which corresponds to the design position of the seat-back established by the vehicle manufacturer;
No.080 2010-06-30
angle of a windscreen (Inclination) [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Inclination angle of a windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Inclination angle of a windscreen" means the angle included between on the one hand a vertical line and on the other hand a straight line passing through the top and bottom edges of the windscreen, both lines being contained in a vertical plane containing the longitudinal axis of the vehicle;
2.15.1. Measurement of the inclination angle shall be performed on a vehicle standing on level ground, and in the case of a passenger-transport vehicle the vehicle shall be in running order, shall be fully charged with fuel, coolant and lubricant, and shall be equipped with tools and the spare wheel or wheels (if they are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer); allowance shall be made for the mass of the driver, and also, in the case of a passenger- transport vehicle, for that of one front-seat passenger, the mass of the driver and that of the passenger each being deemed to be 75 } 1 kg;
2.15.2. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or with a device for automatic adjustment of ground clearance according to load shall be tested in the normal running conditions specified by the manufacturer.
No.043 2014-02-12
angle of a windscreen (Inclination) [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Inclination angle of a windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inclination angle of a windscreen" means the angle included between on the one hand a vertical line and on the other hand a straight line passing through the top and bottom edges of the windscreen, both lines being contained in a vertical plane containing the longitudinal axis of the vehicle;
2.12.1. Measurement of the inclination angle shall be performed on a vehicle standing on level ground, and in the case of a passenger-transport vehicle the vehicle shall be in running order, shall be fully charged with fuel, coolant and lubricant, and shall be equipped with tools and the spare wheel or wheels (if they are provided as standard equipment by the vehicle manufacturer); allowance shall be made for the mass of the driver, and also, in the case of a passenger- transport vehicle, for that of one front-seat passenger, the mass of the driver and that of the passenger each being deemed to be 75 } 1 kg;
2.12.2. Vehicles equipped with hydropneumatic, hydraulic or pneumatic suspension or with a device for automatic adjustment of ground clearance according to load shall be tested in the normal running conditions specified by the manufacturer;
No.043 2010-08-31
Angle of divergence [No.003 2009-01-31] @ Angle of divergence Retro-reflecting devices 2.5. "Angle of divergence" means the angle between the straight lines connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the receiver and to the centre of the source of illumination. No.003 2009-01-31
Angle of divergence [No.003 2011-12-06] @ Angle of divergence Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Angle of divergence" means the angle between the straight lines connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the receiver and to the centre of the source of illumination.
No.003 2011-12-06
Angle of geometric visibility [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ƒÀ, correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles ƒ¿ to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 of this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5‹ (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5‹ below the horizontal;
No.053 2013-06-18
Angle of geometric visibility [No.074 2013-06-18] @ Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ƒÀ, correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles ƒ¿ to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 of this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5‹ (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5‹ below the horizontal.
No.074 2013-06-18
Angle of geometric visibility [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp is visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ß correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles ƒ¿ to the latitude.
If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation shall be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 to this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5‹ (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5‹ below the horizontal;
No.048 2011-12-06
Angle of rotation [No.003 2009-01-31] @ Angle of rotation Retro-reflecting devices 2.7. "Angle of rotation" means the angle through which the retro-reflecting device is rotated about its axis of reference starting from one given position. No.003 2009-01-31
Angle of rotation (ƒÃ) [No.069 2010-07-31] @ Angle of rotation (ƒÃ) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Geometric definitions (see Annex 1, figure 1).
2.3.12. Angle of rotation ƒÃ
Angle through which the sample is turned about its vertical axis from any arbitrarily established position counterclockwise (+ ƒÃ) or clockwise (– ƒÃ) viewed in the direction of illumination. If retro- reflective materials or devices have a marking (e.g. TOP), this marking governs the starting position. The angle of rotation ƒÃ lies in the range – 180‹ < ƒÃ ≤ 180‹.
No.069 2010-07-31
Angle of rotation [No.003 2011-12-06] @ Angle of rotation Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Angle of rotation" means the angle through which the retro-reflecting device is rotated about its axis of reference starting from one given position.
No.003 2011-12-06
Angles of geometric visibility [Directive 2009/061/EC] @ Angles of geometric visibility installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.9. Angles of geometric visibility
"Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of a sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ƒÀ correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles ƒ¿ to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp.
This shall not apply to any obstacles existing at the time when the lamp is approved if approval is required.
Directive 2009/061/EC
angles of geometric visibility [Directive 2009/067/EC] @ angles of geometric visibility installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
10. angles of geometric visibility
means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ƒÀ correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles ƒ¿ to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity.
If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, there must be a parallel shift in the direction of observation to achieve the same accuracy. No account is taken of obstacles on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility, if they were already present when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof must be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Appendix 1);
Directive 2009/067/EC
Angles of geometric visibility [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.13. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ƒÀ correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles ƒ¿ to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity.
If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 of this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5‹ (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5‹ below the horizontal.
No.048 2008-05-23
Angles of geometric visibility [No.086 2010-09-30] @ Angles of geometric visibility Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Angles of geometric visibility" means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp must be visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ß correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles ƒ¿ to the latitude. There must be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation must be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.
On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.
If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see explanatory figure below).[}]
No.086 2010-09-30
Angular diameter of the receiver [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol ƒÅ2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.3. "Angular diameter of the receiver (symbol ƒÅ2)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the receiver as seen from the reference centre (ƒÀ1 = ƒÀ2 = 0‹);
No.104 2014-03-14
Angular diameter of the retro reflector sample [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol ƒÅ1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflector sample (symbol ƒÅ1)" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver (ß1 = ß2 = 0‹);
No.104 2014-03-14
Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device [No.003 2009-01-31] @ Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2.8. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the visible area of the illuminating surface, either at the centre of the source of illumination
or at the centre of the receiver.
No.003 2009-01-31
Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device [No.003 2011-12-06] @ Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device" means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the visible area of the illuminating surface, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver.
No.003 2011-12-06
Angular diameter of the retro-reflective sample [No.069 2010-07-31] @ Angular diameter of the retro-reflective sample (ƒÅ) Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definition of photometric terms
2.4.2. "Angular diameter of the retro-reflective sample (symbol ā)", the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the retro-reflective sample, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver.
No.069 2010-07-31
anti lock device [No.078 2004-03-31A4] @ anti-lock device Braking (category L) [ANNEX 4] REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VEHICLES OF CATEGORIES L1 AND L3 EQUIPPED WITH ANTI-LOCK DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. An "anti-lock device" is a component of a service braking system which automatically controls the degree of slip, in the direction of rotation of the wheel(s) on one or more wheels of the vehicle during braking;
No.078 2004-03-31
Anti rotation device [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Anti-rotation device safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) An anti-rotation device for an i-Size child restraint system consists of either a top tether or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(d) For ISOFIX, i-Size, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
No.014 2015-08-19
Anti rotation device [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Anti-rotation device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether,
(b) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact,
(c) An anti-rotation device for an i-Size child restraint system consists of either a top tether or a support leg, which is intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact,
(d) For ISOFIX, i-Size, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.
No.016 2015-11-20
Anti rotation device [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Anti-rotation device Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Anti-rotation device" means a device intended to limit the rotation of the Child Restraint System during a vehicle impact and consisting of:
(a) A top-tether strap; or
(b) A support-leg.
Meeting the requirements of this Regulation and fitted to an ISOFIX anchorage system and ISOFIX top tether anchorages or vehicle floor contact surface meeting the requirements of Regulation No. 14.
An "Anti-rotation device" for a "Specific vehicle ISOFIX" Child Restraint System may comprise a top tether, a support-leg or any other means capable of limiting the rotation.
No.129 2014-03-29
Anti rotation device [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Anti-rotation device Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) For Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.
No.014 2007-12-06
anti rotation device [No.014 2011-04-28] @ anti-rotation device safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "anti-rotation device"
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top-tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.
No.014 2011-04-28
Anti rotation device [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Anti-rotation device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) For Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.
No.016 2007-11-30
Anti rotation device [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Anti-rotation device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether.
(b) An anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact.
(c) For ISOFIX, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device.
No.016 2011-09-09
Anti rotation device [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Anti-rotation device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Restraint anchorages" means these parts of the vehicle structure or seat structure to which the child-restraint attachments are secured;
2.14.1. "additional anchorage" means a part of the vehicle structure or of the vehicle seat structure, or any other part of the vehicle, to which a child restraint is intended to be secured and which is additional to the anchorages approved under Regulation No 14. This includes the trolley floor pan as described in annex 6 or other structural features of a the specific vehicle(s) when loaded by a support leg;
2.14.2. "Isofix low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an Isofix child restraint system with Isofix attachments;
2.14.3. "Isofix anchorages system" means a system made up of two Isofix low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14 which is designed for attaching an Isofix child restraint system in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device":
(a) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix universal child restraint system consists of the Isofix top tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an Isofix semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for Isofix, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "Isofix top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an Isofix top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.044 2007-11-23
Anti rotation device [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Anti-rotation device Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14.4. "Anti-rotation device"
(a) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX universal child restraint system consists of the ISOFIX top-tether;
(b) an anti-rotation device for an ISOFIX semi-universal child restraint system consists of either a top tether, the vehicle dashboard or a support leg intended to limit the rotation of the restraint during a frontal impact;
(c) for ISOFIX, universal and semi-universal, child restraint systems the vehicle seat itself does not constitute an anti-rotation device;
2.14.5. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether strap connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
No.044 2011-09-09
Anticlockwise [No.060 2014-10-15] @ Anticlockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Anticlockwise" has the inverse meaning of eClockwisef.
No.060 2014-10-15
Anticlockwise [No.060 2004-03-31] @ Anticlockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Clockwise" means the direction of rotation around the axis of the part considered, following the motion of the hands of a clock when viewed from the upper or the outer side of the part considered;
2.11.1. "Anticlockwise" has the inverse meaning;
No.060 2004-03-31
Antilock brake system [No.078 2015-01-30] @ ABS (Antilock brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Antilock brake system (ABS)" means a system which senses wheel slip and automatically modulates the pressure producing the braking forces at the wheel(s) to limit the degree of wheel slip.
No.078 2015-01-30
Apparent light emitting area [No.128 2014-05-29] @ Apparent light emitting area Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.10. Apparent light emitting area: area that contains the (apparent) element of visible radiation when observed under a certain viewing axis. The apparent light emitting area is defined in a plane that contains the light centre and that is perpendicular to the corresponding viewing axis.
No.128 2014-05-29
apparent surface [Directive 2009/067/EC] @ apparent surface installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
7. apparent surface
for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of either:
- the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens (a-b), or.
- the light-emitting surface (c-d),
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens (see drawings at Appendix 1);
Directive 2009/067/EC
apparent surface [No.048 2008-05-23] @ apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.10. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens (a-b);
or the light-emitting surface (c-d);
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens (see Annex 3 to this Regulation).
Only in the case of a light-signalling device producing variable luminous intensities, its apparent surface that may be variable as specified in paragraph 2.7.1.3. shall be considered under all conditions permitted by the variable intensity control, if applicable.
No.048 2008-05-23
apparent surface [No.053 2013-06-18] @ apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens (a-b),
or the light-emitting surface (c-d),
in a plane perpendicular to the of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens (see Annex 3 to this Regulation);
No.053 2013-06-18
apparent surface [No.074 2013-06-18] @ apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens (a-b),
or the light-emitting surface (c-d),
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens (see Annex 3 to this Regulation);
No.074 2013-06-18
apparent surface [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. The "apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:
either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens;
or the light-emitting surface;
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens. Different examples of the application of apparent surface can be found in Annex 3 to this Regulation.
Only in the case of a light-signalling device producing variable luminous intensities, its apparent surface that may be variable as specified in paragraph 2.7.1.3 shall be considered under all conditions permitted by the variable intensity control, if applicable;
No.048 2011-12-06
Apparent surface [No.086 2010-09-30] @ Apparent surface Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Apparent surface" for a defined direction of observation, means the orthogonal projection of the light-emitting surface in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation (see Annex 3).
No.086 2010-09-30
Applicable emission limit [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Applicable emission limit Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.3. "Applicable emission limit" means an emission limit to which an engine is subject;
No.096 2014-03-22
applications tyre (Mixed) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Mixed applications tyre Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Mixed applications tyre" means a tyre designed to be fitted to either driven and non-driven axles of implements, agricultural machinery or trailers;
No.106 2010-09-30
approval (Extension of) [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Extension of approval Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Extension of approval" means the official process in which a modified vehicle type is approved on the basis of an earlier approved vehicle type, by comparison of structure, potential energy and residual space criteria.
No.066 2007-12-06
approval (Extension of) [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Extension of approval Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Extension of approval" means the official process in which a modified vehicle type is approved on the basis of an earlier approved vehicle type, by comparison of structure, potential energy and residual space criteria.
No.066 2011-03-30
approval (type) [No.023 2014-08-08] @ type approval reversing and manoeuvring lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. The definitions given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.
No.023 2014-08-08
approval (Type) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Type approval Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.91. "Type approval" means the approval of an engine type with regard to its emissions measured in accordance with the procedures specified in this Regulation;
No.096 2014-03-22
approval (Vehicle) [No.061 2010-06-30] @ Vehicle approval external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Vehicle approval" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its external projections;
No.061 2010-06-30
Approval of a device [No.102 2008-12-30] @ Approval of a device Close coupling devices 2.1.2. "Approval of a device" means the approval of a type of close-coupling device conforming to the requirements set out in Section I below; No.102 2008-12-30
Approval of a drive train [No.085 2014-11-07] @ Approval of a drive train Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a drive train" means the approval of a drive train type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;
No.085 2014-11-07
Approval of a drive train [No.085 2006-11-24] @ Approval of a drive train Power — internal combustion and electric (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a drive train" means the approval of a drive train type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;
No.085 2006-11-24
Approval of a motor cycle [No.041 2012-11-14] @ Approval of a motor cycle noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.1. "Approval of a motor cycle" means the approval of a motor cycle type with regard to noise;
No.041 2012-11-14
Approval of a replacement catalytic converter [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Approval of a replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a replacement catalytic converter" means the approval of a converter intended to be fitted as a replacement part on one or more specific types of vehicles with regard to the limitation of pollutant emissions, noise level and effect on vehicle performance and, where applicable, on the on-board diagnostic (OBD).
No.103 2007-06-19
Approval of a replacement silencing system or components of said system [No.059 2006-11-24] @ Approval of a replacement silencing system or components of said system Replacement silencing systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Approval of a replacement silencing system or components of said system" means the approval of the whole or part of a silencing system adaptable to one or several specified types of motor vehicles, as regards the limitation of their noise level;
No.059 2006-11-24
Approval of a seat [No.080 2013-08-24] @ Approval of a seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a seat" means an approval of a seat type as a component in relation to the protection of the occupants of forward-facing seats with regard to their strength and the design of the seat backs;
No.080 2013-08-24
Approval of a seat [No.080 2010-06-30] @ Approval of a seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a seat" means an approval of a seat type as a component in relation to the protection of the occupants of forward-facing seats with regard to their strength and the design of the seat backs;
No.080 2010-06-30
approval of a steering control [No.012 2008-06-26] @ approval of a steering control Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.3. "approval of a steering control" means the approval of a steering control type with regard to the protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact; No.012 2008-06-26
Approval of a steering control [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Approval of a steering control protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a steering control" means the approval of a steering control type with regard to the protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact;
No.012 2013-03-27
Approval of a tank [No.034 2011-04-2810] @ Approval of a tank Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.4. "Approval of a tank" means the approval of a type of liquid fuel tank;
No.034 2011-04-28
Approval of a tractor [No.071 2004-03-31] @ Approval of a tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a tractor" means the approval of a tractor type with regard to the field of vision defined in paragraph 2.4;
No.071 2004-03-31
Approval of a tractor [No.071 2010-07-31] @ Approval of a tractor Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a tractor" means the approval of a tractor type with regard to the field of vision defined in paragraph 2.4.
No.071 2010-07-31
Approval of a type of battery electric road vehicle [No.100 2009-02-14] @ Approval of a type of battery electric road vehicle Electric vehicle safety 2.3. "Approval of a type of battery electric road vehicle" means the approval of a type of electric vehicle regarding construction and functional safety requirements specific to the use of electric energy. No.100 2009-02-14
Approval of a vehic [No.018 2008-10-15] @ Approval of a vehic Anti-theft 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;
No.018 2008-10-15
approval of a vehicle [No.012 2008-06-26] @ approval of a vehicle Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact; No.012 2008-06-26
Approval of a vehicle [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Approval of a vehicle protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact;
No.012 2013-03-27
Approval of a vehicle [No.013 2016-02-18] š Approval of a vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking;
No.013 2016-02-18
Approval of a vehicle [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Approval of a vehicle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking.
No.013H 2015-12-22
Approval of a vehicle [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Approval of a vehicle safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type equipped with anchorages for given types of safety-belts;
No.014 2015-08-19
approval of a vehicle [No.021 2008-07-16] @ approval of a vehicle Interior fittings 2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its interior fittings; No.021 2008-07-16
approval of a vehicle [No.034 2008-07-23] @ approval of a vehicle Fire risks 7.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the prevention of fire risks; No.034 2008-07-23
Approval of a vehicle [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices; No.048 2008-05-23
Approval of a vehicle [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Approval of a vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of vehicle type with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and smoke by its engine as well as the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system and the engine installation on the vehicle;
No.049 2013-06-24
Approval of a vehicle [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices;
No.053 2013-06-18
Approval of a vehicle [No.060 2014-10-15] @ Approval of a vehicle Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to driver operated controls, where such controls are fitted and to their identification.
No.060 2014-10-15
Approval of a vehicle [No.062 2013-03-27] @ Approval of a vehicle Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;
No.062 2013-03-27
Approval of a vehicle [No.073 2012-05-081] @ Approval of a vehicle LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions specific to Part I
2.2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a complete, incomplete or completed vehicle type with regard to its lateral protection;
No.073 2012-05-08
Approval of a vehicle [No.073 2012-05-083] @ Approval of a vehicle LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definitions specific to Part III
2.4.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of LPD of a type approved according to Part II of this Regulation, including, if necessary, the completion of a vehicle partially approved according to Part I;
No.073 2012-05-08
Approval of a vehicle [No.074 2013-06-18] @ Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices;
No.074 2013-06-18
Approval of a vehicle [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Approval of a vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking.
No.078 2015-01-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.079 2008-05-27] @ Approval of a vehicle Steering equipment 2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its steering equipment. No.079 2008-05-27
Approval of a vehicle [No.080 2013-08-24] @ Approval of a vehicle strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a vehicle" means an approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the parts of the vehicle structure to which seats are to be secured, and with regard to the installation of seats;
No.080 2013-08-24
Approval of a vehicle [No.083 2008-05-06] @ Approval of a vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.19. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the limitation of the following conditions (1):
2.19.1. Limitation of exhaust emissions by the vehicle, evaporative emissions, crankcase emissions, durability
of pollution control devices, cold start pollutant emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with unleaded petrol, or which can be fuelled with either unleaded petrol and LPG or NG (Approval B);
2.19.2. Limitation of emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, durability of pollution control devices and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with diesel fuel (Approval C);
2.19.3. Limitation of emissions of gaseous pollutants by the engine, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with LPG or NG (Approval D);
No.083 2008-05-06
Approval of a vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Approval of a vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the limitation of the following conditions ( 1 ):
2.19.1. Limitation of exhaust emissions by the vehicle, evaporative emissions, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start pollutant emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with unleaded petrol, or which can be fuelled with either unleaded petrol and LPG or NG/biomethane or biofuels (Approval B);
2.19.2. Limitation of emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, durability of pollution control devices and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with diesel fuel (Approval C) or which can be fuelled with either diesel fuel and biosuel or biofuel;
2.19.3. Limitation of emissions of gaseous pollutants by the engine, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with LPG or NG/biomethane (Approval D);
No.083 2012-02-15
Approval of a vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Approval of a vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the limitation of the following conditions:
2.19.1. Limitation of exhaust emissions by the vehicle, evaporative emissions, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start pollutant emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with unleaded petrol, or which can be fuelled with either unleaded petrol and LPG or NG/biomethane or biofuels (Approval B);
2.19.2. Limitation of emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants, durability of pollution control devices and on- board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with diesel fuel (Approval C) or which can be fuelled with either diesel fuel and biofuel or biofuel;
2.19.3. Limitation of emissions of gaseous pollutants by the engine, crankcase emissions, durability of pollution control devices, cold start emissions and on-board diagnostics of vehicles fuelled with LPG or NG/ biomethane (Approval D).
No.083 2015-07-03
Approval of a vehicle [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Approval of a vehicle Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the behaviour of the structure of the passenger compartment in a lateral collision;
No.095 2015-07-10
Approval of a vehicle [No.097 2012-05-082] @ Approval of a vehicle alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 17, 18 and 19 below.
No.097 2012-05-08
Approval of a vehicle [No.101 2012-05-26] @ Approval of a vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the measurement of energy consumption (fuel or electric energy);
No.101 2012-05-26
Approval of a vehicle [No.102 2008-12-30] @ Approval of a vehicle Close coupling devices 2.1.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle with regard to the fitting of an approved close-coupling device; No.102 2008-12-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Approval of a vehicle using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.8. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type of categories M and N with regard to its CNG and/or LNG system as original equipment for the use in its propulsion system.
No.110 2015-06-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.116 2012-02-16P3] @ Approval of a vehicle Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 below.
No.116 2012-02-16
Approval of a vehicle [No.121 2016-01-08] @ Approval of a vehicle Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the mode of installation, graphical design, legibility and colour, and brightness of controls, tell-tales and indicators.
No.121 2016-01-08
Approval of a vehicle [No.011 2010-05-13] @ Approval of a vehicle door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to door latches and door retention components.
No.011 2010-05-13
Approval of a vehicle [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Approval of a vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking;
No.013 2010-09-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Approval of a vehicle Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Approval of a vehicle Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type equipped with anchorages for given types of safety-belts;
No.014 2007-12-06
approval of a vehicle [No.014 2011-04-28] @ approval of a vehicle safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type equipped with anchorages for given types of safety-belts;
No.014 2011-04-28
Approval of a vehicle [No.017 2006-12-27] @ Approval of a vehicle Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the seats and their anchorages, the design of the rear parts of the seat-backs and the characteristics of their head restraints;
No.017 2006-12-27
Approval of a vehicle [No.017 2010-08-31] @ Approval of a vehicle seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the seats and their anchorages, the design of the rear parts of the seat-backs and the characteristics of their head restraints;
No.017 2010-08-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.018 2010-05-13] @ Approval of a vehicle protection against unauthorized use 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;
No.018 2010-05-13
Approval of a vehicle [No.024 2006-11-2412] @ Approval of a vehicle Diesel smoke and power PART II . THE INSTALLATION ON ROAD VEHICLES OF TYPE-APPROVED C.I. ENGINES
12. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part II of this Regulation:
12.1 "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of type approved engines for the limitation of visible pollutants from the engine,
No.024 2006-11-24
Approval of a vehicle [No.024 2006-11-2421] @ Approval of a vehicle Diesel smoke and power PART III . EMISSION OF VISIBLE EXHAUST POLLUTANTS FROM A MOTOR VEHICLE WHOSE ENGINE HAS NOT BEEN SEPARATELY APPROVED
21. DEFINITIONS For the purposes of Part III of this Regulation:
21.1 "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to limitation of the emission of visible pollutants from the engine;
No.024 2006-11-24
Approval of a vehicle [No.026 2005-12-16] @ Approval of a vehicle External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its external projections.
No.026 2005-12-16
Approval of a vehicle [No.026 2010-08-14] @ Approval of a vehicle external projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its external projections.
No.026 2010-08-14
approval of a vehicle [No.029 2010-11-20] @ approval of a vehicle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type pursuant to the requirements of this Regulation, with regard to the protection of the occupants of the cab of a vehicle in the event of head-on impact or of overturning.
No.029 2010-11-20
approval of a vehicle [No.034 2011-04-28] @ approval of a vehicle Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the liquid fuel tanks;
No.034 2011-04-28
Approval of a vehicle [No.034 2011-04-2812] @ Approval of a vehicle Fire risks PART IV — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE INSTALLATION OF APPROVED FUEL TANK(S)
12. DEFINITIONS
12.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of liquid fuel tank(s) approved pursuant to Part III of this Regulation;
No.034 2011-04-28
approval of a vehicle [No.034 2011-04-287] @ approval of a vehicle Fire risks PART II — APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THE PREVENTION OF FIRE RISKS IN THE EVENT OF COLLISION
7. DEFINITIONS
7.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the prevention of fire risks;
No.034 2011-04-28
Approval of a vehicle [No.039 2004-03-31] @ Approval of a vehicle Speedometer 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation.
No.039 2004-03-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.039 2010-05-13] @ Approval of a vehicle speedometer equipment 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the speedometer equipment including its installation.
No.039 2010-05-13
Approval of a vehicle [No.048 2011-12-06] @ Approval of a vehicle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices;
No.048 2011-12-06
approval of a vehicle [No.049 2008-04-12] @ approval of a vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of vehicle type with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and smoke by its engine as well as the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system and the engine installation on the vehicle;
No.049 2008-04-12
approval of a vehicle [No.049 2010-08-31] @ approval of a vehicle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of vehicle type with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and smoke by its engine as well as the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system and the engine installation on the vehicle;
No.049 2010-08-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.051 2007-05-30] @ Approval of a vehicle Sound levels (M and N) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to noise;
No.051 2007-05-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.060 2004-03-31] @ Approval of a vehicle Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to driver-operated controls, where such controls are fitted and to their identification;
No.060 2004-03-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.062 2004-03-31] @ Approval of a vehicle Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its protection against unauthorized use;
No.062 2004-03-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.064 2010-11-26] @ Approval of a vehicle Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its temporary use spare wheel and tyre unit;
No.064 2010-11-26
Approval of a vehicle [No.067 2008-03-14p2] @ Approval of a vehicle LPG equipment [PART II] 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of its specific equipment for the use of liquefied petroleum gases in its propulsion system;
No.067 2008-03-14
Approval of a vehicle [No.073 2004-03-31] @ Approval of a vehicle Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a complete vehicle type with regard to its lateral protection;
No.073 2004-03-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.073 2010-05-13] @ Approval of a vehicle lateral protection 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a complete vehicle type with regard to its lateral protection;
No.073 2010-05-13
Approval of a vehicle [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Approval of a vehicle Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to braking;
No.078 2004-03-31
Approval of a vehicle [No.080 2010-06-30] @ Approval of a vehicle Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of a vehicle" means an approval of a vehicle type with regard to the strength of the parts of the vehicle structure to which seats are to be secured, and with regard to the installation of seats;
No.080 2010-06-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.089 2007-06-1922] @ Approval of a vehicle Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. For the purpose of Part I of this Regulation:
2.2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to speed limitation.
No.089 2007-06-19
Approval of a vehicle [No.089 2007-06-1923] @ Approval of a vehicle Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. For the purpose of Part II of this Regulation:
2.3.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of an SLD of a type approved in accordance with Part III of this Regulation.
No.089 2007-06-19
approval of a vehicle [No.093 2002-02-01] @ approval of a vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.7. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type:
- for Part II of this Regulation — with regard to the installation of an FUPD of an approved type according to Part I of this Regulation; or
- for Part III of this Regulation — with regard to its FUP;
No.093 2002-02-01
Approval of a vehicle [No.093 2010-07-17] @ Approval of a vehicle Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.7. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type:
for Part II of this Regulation — with regard to the installation of an FUPD of an approved type according to Part I of this Regulation, or
for Part III of this Regulation - with regard to its FUP;
No.093 2010-07-17
Approval of a vehicle [No.095 2007-11-30] @ Approval of a vehicle Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the behaviour of the structure of the passenger compartment in a lateral collision;
No.095 2007-11-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.101 2007-06-19] @ Approval of a vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the measurement of energy consumption (fuel or electric energy);
No.101 2007-06-19
Approval of a vehicle [No.110 2008-03-14P2] @ Approval of a vehicle Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) PART II
14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type of categories M and N with regard to its CNG system as an original equipment for the use in its propulsion system;
No.110 2008-03-14
Approval of a vehicle [No.110 2011-05-07p2] @ Approval of a vehicle using compressed natural gas (CNG) PART II 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.1. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type of categories M and N with regard to its CNG system as an original equipment for the use in its propulsion system;
No.110 2011-05-07
approval of a vehicle [No.111 2002-02-01] @ approval of a vehicle Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "approval of a vehicle" means approval of a vehicle type with regard to rollover stability;
No.111 2002-02-01
Approval of a vehicle [No.116 2010-06-30P3] @ Approval of a vehicle Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.3. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 below.
No.116 2010-06-30
Approval of a vehicle [No.121 2010-07-10] @ Approval of a vehicle Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the mode of installation,graphical design, legibility, colour, and brightness of controls, tell-tales, and indicators.
No.121 2010-07-10
Approval of a vehicle alarm system [No.097 2008-12-30] @ Approval of a vehicle alarm system Alarm systems 2.9. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 5, 6 and 7 below; No.097 2008-12-30
Approval of a vehicle alarm system [No.097 2012-05-08a] @ Approval of a vehicle alarm system alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 5, 6 and 7 below;
No.097 2012-05-08
Approval of a vehicle alarm system [No.116 2012-02-16P2] @ Approval of a vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.10. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 below.
No.116 2012-02-16
Approval of a vehicle alarm system [No.116 2010-06-30P2] @ Approval of a vehicle alarm system Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.10. "Approval of a vehicle alarm system" means the approval of a type of VAS with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraphs 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 below.
No.116 2010-06-30
Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2 above with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation.
No.107 2015-06-18
Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2. with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation;
No.107 2006-12-27
Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Approval of a vehicle or a separate technical unit" means the approval of a vehicle type, or of a bodywork type as defined in paragraph 2.2 with regard to the constructional features specified in this Regulation;
No.107 2010-09-29
approval of a vehicle Part II [No.058 2008-08-30] @ approval of a vehicle RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 13.1.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of an RUPD of an approved type according to Part I of this Regulation;ÿ No.058 2008-08-30
approval of a vehicle Part III [No.058 2008-08-30] @ approval of a vehicle RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 22.1.1. "approval of a vehicle" means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to its RUP; No.058 2008-08-30
Approval of a vehicle type [No.130 2014-06-18] @ Approval of a vehicle type Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the full procedure whereby a Contracting Party to the Agreement certifies that a vehicle type meets the technical requirements of this Regulation;
No.130 2014-06-18
Approval of a vehicle type [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Approval of a vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the whole official process in which the vehicle type is checked and tested to prove that it meets all the requirements specified in this Regulation.
No.066 2007-12-06
Approval of a vehicle type [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Approval of a vehicle type Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the whole official process in which the vehicle type is checked and tested to prove that it meets all the requirements specified in this Regulation.
No.066 2011-03-30
Approval of a vehicle type [No.125 2010-07-31] @ Approval of a vehicle type Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of a vehicle type" means the full procedure whereby a Contracting Party to the Agreement certifies that a vehicle type meets the technical requirements of this Regulation;
No.125 2010-07-31
Approval of an engine [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Approval of an engine (engine family) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine (engine family)" means the approval of an engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants, smoke and the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;
No.049 2013-06-24
Approval of an engine [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Approval of an engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.4. "Approval of an engine" means the approval of an engine type or family with regard to the level of emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by the engine;
No.096 2014-03-22
Approval of an engine [No.120 2015-06-30] @ Approval of an engine Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an engine" means the approval of an engine type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annex 4 to this Regulation;
No.120 2015-06-30
approval of an engine [No.049 2008-04-12] @ approval of an engine (engine family) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "approval of an engine (engine family)" means the approval of an engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants, smoke and the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;
No.049 2008-04-12
approval of an engine [No.049 2010-08-31] @ approval of an engine (engine family) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "approval of an engine (engine family)" means the approval of an engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants, smoke and the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;
No.049 2010-08-31
Approval of an engine [No.120 2010-09-30] @ Approval of an engine Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an engine" means the approval of an engine type with regard to its net power measured in accordance with the procedure specified in Annex 4 to this Regulation;
No.120 2010-09-30
Approval of an engine family [No.120 2015-06-30] @ Approval of an engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine family" means the approval of the members of an engine family with regard to their net power in accordance with the procedure specified in Annex 5 or 6 to this Regulation;
No.120 2015-06-30
Approval of an engine family [No.120 2010-09-30] @ Approval of an engine family Power — internal combustion (agricultural tractors and mobile machinery) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Approval of an engine family" means the approval of the members of an engine family with regard to their net power in accordance with the procedure specified in Annexes 5 or 6 to this Regulation;
No.120 2010-09-30
approval of an FUPD [No.093 2002-02-01] @ approval of an FUPD Front underrun protective devices (FUP) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "approval of an FUPD" means the approval of such a type of FUPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 7;
No.093 2002-02-01
Approval of an FUPD [No.093 2010-07-17] @ Approval of an FUPD Front underrun protective devices (FUPDs) 3. DEFINITIONS
3.1.4. "Approval of an FUPD" means the approval of such a type of FUPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 7 below;
No.093 2010-07-17
Approval of an LPD [No.073 2012-05-082] @ Approval of an LPD LPD (lateral protection devices) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions specific to Part II
2.3.1. "Approval of an LPD" means the approval of a type of LPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 14;
No.073 2012-05-08
Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system [No.115 2014-11-07] @ Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.1. Specific LPG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.2. Specific CNG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 110, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.
2.1.4. "A vehicle is considered bi-fuel", when after the retrofit operation, it is equipped with a gas storage and a separate petrol storage with a capacity exceeding 15 litres, and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount or duration.
2.1.5. "Master-slave system" means a retrofit system in which the LPG Electronic Control Unit (ECU) or CNG ECU is able to translate the petrol ECU control strategy in LPG or CNG operation.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.
No.115 2014-11-07
approval of an RUPD [No.058 2008-08-30] @ approval of an RUPD RUPDs (Rear underrun protective device) 4.1.1. "approval of an RUPD" means the approval of such a type of RUPD with respect to the requirements laid down in paragraph 7 below; No.058 2008-08-30
Approval of the motor vehicle [No.028 2010-07-17] @ Approval of the motor vehicle audible warning devices II. AUDIBLE SIGNALS OF MOTOR VEHICLES
11. DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this Regulation,
11.1. "Approval of the motor vehicle" shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal;
11.2. "Vehicle type" shall be understood to mean vehicles not essentially different from another with respect to such matters as:
11.2.1. the number and type(s) of warning devices fitted on the vehicle;
11.2.2. the mountings used to fit the warning devices to the vehicle;
11.2.3. the position of the warning devices on the vehicle;
11.2.4. the rigidity of the parts of the structure on which the warning device(s) is (are) mounted;
11.2.5. the shape and materials of the bodywork at the front of the vehicle which might affect the level of the sound emitted by the warning device(s) and have a masking effect.
No.028 2010-07-17
Approval of the motor vehicle [No.028 2011-12-0611] @ Approval of the motor vehicle audible warning devices 11. DEFINITIONS
11.1. "Approval of the motor vehicle" shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal;
No.028 2011-12-06
approval test (Type) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Type approval test Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.52. "Type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a Child Restraint System type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.
No.129 2014-03-29
approval test (Type) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Type approval test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a child restraint system type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.
No.044 2007-11-23
approval test (type) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ type approval test Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "type approval test", means a test to determine the extent to which a child restraint system type submitted for approval is capable of satisfying the requirements.
No.044 2011-09-09
approved (engine representative of the type to be) [No.024 2006-11-243] @ engine representative of the type to be approved Diesel smoke and power PART I — EMISSION OF VISIBLE EXHAUST POLLUTANTS FROM C.I. ENGINES
3. DEFINITIONS For the purpose of Part I of this Regulation:
3.3 "An engine representative of the type to be approved" means the engine which develops the highest net power within the engine type,
No.024 2006-11-24
approved (Vehicle) [No.122 2010-06-30A9] @ Vehicles approved Heating systems [ANNEX 9] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
2. Definitions
Vehicles approved as being in compliance with the requirements applicable to EX/III vehicles under this Annex shall be deemed to comply with the requirements applicable to MEMU vehicles.
No.122 2010-06-30
approved type (retrofit system of an, LPG or CNG, Specific) [No.115 2014-11-07] @ Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type" means systems, which do not differ in such respect as:
2.2.1. Retrofit system manufacturer (responsible for retrofit approval application);
2.2.2. Pressure regulator/vaporiser type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.3. Gas fuelling system type by the same manufacturer (i.e. induction mixer, injector device, vapour or liquid, single or multi-point injection system);
2.2.4. Sensors and actuators set types;
2.2.5. The fuel container type (i.e. LPG liquid take off/vapour pressure, LPG vapour take off, LPG liquid take off/pressurised by pump, pressurised CNG take off), the safety devices and fuel container accessories, as required by Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, or Regulation No 110, where applicable (i.e. relief valve);
2.2.6. Fuel container fitting devices;
Note: With respect to paragraphs 2.2.4, 2.2.5 and 2.2.6 above, the manufacturer of the retrofit can insert in his installation manual other components, included in the approval, as interchangeable items (see para. 7).
2.2.7. ECU type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.8. Basic software principles and control strategy;
2.2.9. Installation manual (see para. 7);
2.2.10. End-user manual (see para. 7).
No.115 2014-11-07
Aqueous condensation [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Aqueous condensation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.5. "Aqueous condensation" means the precipitation of water-containing constituents from a gas phase to a liquid phase. Aqueous condensation is a function of humidity, pressure, temperature, and concentrations of other constituents such as sulphuric acid. These parameters vary as a function of engine intake-air humidity, dilution-air humidity, engine air-to-fuel ratio, and fuel composition - including the amount of hydrogen and sulphur in the fuel;
No.096 2014-03-22
area (control) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ control area Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "control area" means the area between the engine speeds A and C and between 25 to 100 per cent
load;
No.049 2008-04-12
area (control) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ control area Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "control area" means the area between the engine speeds A and C and between 25 to 100 per cent load;
No.049 2010-08-31
area (Transparent) [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Transparent area Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Transparent area" means the whole glazing area, excluding any opaque obscuration and any shade band.
No.043 2010-08-31
area (Transparent) [No.125 2010-07-31] @ Transparent area Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Transparent area" means that area of a vehicle windscreen or other glazed surface whose light transmittance measured at right angles to the surface is not less than 70 per cent. In the case of armoured vehicles the light transmittance factor is not less than 60 per cent.
No.125 2010-07-31
area of the windscreen (Transparent) [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Transparent area of the windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Transparent area of the windscreen" means the glazing area contained within the design glass outline, excluding any allowed opaque obscuration (see Annex 18), but including any shade band.
No.043 2014-02-12
area of the windscreen wipers (Operating) [No.071 2004-03-31] @ Operating area of the windscreen wipers Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Operating area of the windscreen wipers" means the external surface of the windscreen which is swept by the windscreen wipers.
No.071 2004-03-31
area of the windscreen wipers (Operating) [No.071 2010-07-31] @ Operating area of the windscreen wipers Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Operating area of the windscreen wipers" means the external surface of the windscreen which is swept by the windscreen wipers.
No.071 2010-07-31
Area of vision [No.071 2004-03-31] @ Area of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Area of vision" means that part of the field of vision which is delimited:
2.8.1. in an upward direction by a horizontal plane passing through the reference point,
2.8.2. on the plane of the road by the area, situated outside the semi-circle of vision, which extends the area of the semi-circle of vision, whose chord, 9,5 m in length, is perpendicular to and bisected by the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the middle of the driver's seat;
No.071 2004-03-31
Area of vision [No.071 2010-07-31] @ Area of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Area of vision" means that part of the field of vision which is delimited:
2.8.1. in an upward direction by a horizontal plane passing through the reference point;
2.8.2. on the plane of the road by the area, situated outside the semi-circle of vision, which extends the area of the semi-circle of vision, whose chord, 9,5 m in length, is perpendicular to and bisected by the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the tractor passing through the middle of the driverfs seat.
No.071 2010-07-31
area of windscreen (Developed) [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Developed area of windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Developed area of windscreen" means the minimum rectangular area of glass from which a windscreen can be manufactured.
No.043 2014-02-12
area of windscreen (Developed) [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Developed area of windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Developed area of windscreen" means the minimum rectangular area of glass from which a windscreen can be manufactured;
No.043 2010-08-31
arm (Rocker) [No.060 2014-10-15] @ Rocker arm Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs.
No.060 2014-10-15
arm (Rocker) [No.060 2004-03-31] @ Rocker arm Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Lever" means any device consisting of an arm turning on a fulcrum, by means of which some functional mechanism of the vehicle is operated;
2.8.1. "Hand lever" means a lever operated by the hand of the driver;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a hand lever is operated by compression (that is, movement of the apex of the lever towards the supporting structure), e.g. to engage a brake mechanism or to disen age the clutch mechanism.
2.8.2. "Foot lever" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a spur projecting from the arm of the lever;
2.8.3. "Pedal" means a lever operated by contact between the foot of the driver and a pad on the lever, so placed as to allow pressure to be applied to the arm of the lever;
Note: Unless otherwise stated, a pedal is operated by depression, for example to engage a brake mechanism.
2.8.4. "Riding pedals" means those devices which are linked to some form of transmission and may be used to propel a moped;
2.8.5. "Rocker arm" means a lever, pivoted at or near its centre and having a pad or spur at each end, operated by contact between the foot of the driver and the said pads or spurs (see annex 3, figure 3);
No.060 2004-03-31
Armoured vehicle [No.125 2010-07-31] @ Armoured vehicle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Armoured vehicle" means a vehicle intended for the protection of conveyed passengers and/or goods and complying with armour plating anti-bullet requirements.
No.125 2010-07-31
Articulated steering [No.079 2008-05-27] @ Articulated steering Steering equipment 2.5.2.2. "Articulated steering" means equipment in which the steering forces are produced by a change in direction of the towing vehicle and in which the movement of the steered trailer wheels is firmly linked to the relative angle between the longitudinal axis of the towing vehicle and that of the trailer; No.079 2008-05-27
Articulated vehicle [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.
No.107 2015-06-18
articulated vehicle (decker, Double) [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Double-decker articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.
No.107 2015-06-18
articulated vehicle (Double-decker) [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Double-decker articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.
No.107 2006-12-27
Articulated vehicle [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Articulated vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate to one another, the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.
No.066 2007-12-06
Articulated vehicle [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Articulated vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate to one another, the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.
No.066 2011-03-30
Articulated vehicle [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop;
No.107 2006-12-27
Articulated vehicle [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Articulated vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. "Articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop;
2.1.3.1. "Double-decker articulated vehicle" means a vehicle which consists of two or more rigid sections which articulate relative to one another; the passenger compartments of each section intercommunicate on at least one deck so that passengers can move freely between them; the rigid sections are permanently connected so that they can only be separated by an operation involving facilities which are normally only found in a workshop.
No.107 2010-09-29
Artificial body section [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Artificial body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Artificial body section" means a body section built up from two or more bays but not in the same position, nor at the same distance from each other as in the actual vehicle. The connecting elements between these bays need not be identical with the real body work structure but shall be structurally equivalent.
No.066 2007-12-06
Artificial body section [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Artificial body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Artificial body section" means a body section built up from two or more bays but not in the same position, nor at the same distance from each other as in the actual vehicle. The connecting elements between these bays need not be identical with the real body work structure but shall be structurally equivalent.
No.066 2011-03-30
AS [No.097 2012-05-082] @ AS (Alarm system(s)) alarm systems PART II — APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
14. DEFINITIONS
14.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.
No.097 2012-05-08
AS [No.116 2012-02-16P3] @ AS (Alarm system) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.
No.116 2012-02-16
AS [No.116 2010-06-30P3] @ Alarm system(s) (AS) Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 7. PART III: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS ALARM SYSTEM
7.1. DEFINITIONS
7.1.1. "Alarm system(s)" (AS) means an arrangement of components fitted as original equipment in a vehicle type, designed to indicate intrusion into or interference with the vehicle; these systems may provide additional protection against unauthorised use of the vehicle.
No.116 2010-06-30
ASLF (speed limitation function, Adjustable) [No.089 2007-06-19] @ Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF Speed limitation devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.6. "Adjustable speed limitation function ASLF" means a function which allows the driver to set a vehicle speed Vadj, and when activated limits the vehicle automatically to that speed;
No.089 2007-06-19
aspect ratio (Nominal) [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Ra (Nominal aspect ratio) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means the centuple of the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the section height (H) by the number expressing the nominal section width (S 1 ), both dimensions expressed in the same units.
No.075 2011-03-30
aspect ratio (Nominal) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Nominal aspect ratio (Ra) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Nominal aspect ratio (Ra)" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height in millimetres by the number expressing the nominal section width in millimetres;
No.106 2010-09-30
aspect ratio (Nominal) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Nominal aspect ratio @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Nominal aspect ratio" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height by the number expressing the nominal section width, both dimensions being in the same units.
No.108 2006-07-04
aspect ratio (Nominal) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Nominal aspect ratio Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Nominal aspect ratio" means one hundred times the number obtained by dividing the number expressing the nominal section height by the number expressing the nominal section width, both dimensions being in the same units.
No.109 2006-07-04
Aspherical mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Aspherical mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.10."Aspherical mirror" means a mirror composed of a spherical and an aspherical part, in which the transition of the reflecting surface from the spherical to the aspherical part has to be marked. The curvature of the main axis of the mirror is defined in the x/y coordinate system defined by the radius of the spherical primary calotte with:
y=R−[Ž®]
R: nominal radius in the spherical part
k: constant for the change of curvature
a: constant for the spherical size of the spherical primary calotte
No.046 2014-08-08
Aspherical mirror [No.046 2010-07-10] @ Aspherical mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.10. "Aspherical mirror" means a mirror composed of a spherical and an aspherical part, in which thetransition of the reflecting surface from the spherical to the aspherical part has to be marked.The curvature of the main axis of the mirror is defined in the x/y coordinate system defined bythe radius of the spherical primary calotte with:
[Ž®] y=
No.046 2010-07-10
Aspherical surface [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Aspherical surface devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.9."Aspherical surface" means a surface, which has only in one plane a constant radius.
No.046 2014-08-08
Aspherical surface [No.046 2010-07-10] @ Aspherical surface Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.9. "Aspherical surface" means a surface, which has only in one plane a constant radius.
No.046 2010-07-10
assembly (Airbag) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Airbag assembly Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Airbag assembly" means a device installed to supplement safety-belts and restraint systems in power-driven vehicles, i.e. system which, in the event of a severe impact affecting the vehicle automatically deploys a flexible structure intended to limit, by compression of the gas contained within it, the gravity of the contacts of one or more parts of the body of an occupant of the vehicle with the interior of the passenger compartment.
No.016 2015-11-20
assembly (sub, Electrical/electronic) [No.010 2012-09-20] @ ESA (Electrical/electronic sub-assembly) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".
No.010 2012-09-20
assembly (sub-, Electrical/electronic) [No.010 2010-05-08] @ Electrical/electronic sub-assembly (ESA) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical/electronic sub-assembly" (ESA) means an electrical and/or electronic device or set(s) of devices intended to be part of a vehicle, together with any associated electrical connections and wiring, which performs one or more specialised functions. An ESA may be approved at the request of a manufacturer or his authorised representative as either a "component" or a "separate technical unit (STU)".
No.010 2010-05-08
assessment (safety, electric, Passenger compartment for) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Passenger compartment
2.16.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.16.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.
No.012 2013-03-27
assessment (safety, electric, Passenger compartment for) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Passenger compartment
2.7.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
2.7.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.
No.094 2012-09-20
assessment (safety, electric, Passenger compartment for) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.3.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with high voltage live parts.
No.095 2015-07-10
assessment volume (dimension, Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Support-leg dimension assessment volume Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.
No.129 2014-03-29
assessment volume (foot, leg, Support) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Support leg foot assessment volume safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Support leg foot assessment volume" means the volume, as shown in Figures 1 and 2 of Annex 10 to this Regulation, in which the support leg foot of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129 will rest and therefore the vehicle floor has to intersect;
No.014 2015-08-19
assessment volume (foot, Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Support-leg foot assessment volume Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.
No.129 2014-03-29
assessment volume (installation, leg, support, i Size) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ i-Size support leg installation assessment volume Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "i-Size support leg installation assessment volume" means a volume, which ensures the dimensional and geometrical compatibility between the support leg of an i-Size child restraint system and an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.
No.016 2015-11-20
Assist System (Brake) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ BAS (Brake Assist System) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driverfs brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) Assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate; or
(b) Is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;
No.013H 2015-12-22
Assist System (Brake) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Brake Assist System (BAS) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driverfs brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate, or
(b) is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;
2.34.3. "Category C Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on multiple criteria, one of which must be the rate at which the brake pedal is applied.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Assisted steering equipment [Directive 2009/066/EC] @ Assisted steering equipment Tractor (agricultural or forestry) [ANNEX I] 1.2. "Different types of steering equipment"
1.2.1.2. Assisted steering equipment, in which the steering power is provided both by the muscular power of the driver
and by the special equipment defined in point 1.1.4;
Steering equipment where the steering power is normally provided solely by the special equipment defined in
point 1.1.4, but which in the event of failure of the special equipment enables the muscular power of the
driver to be used for steering, shall be considered as eassisted steering equipmentf.
Directive 2009/066/EC
Asymmetrical multiple-glazed unit [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Asymmetrical multiple-glazed unit safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Multiple-glazed unit" means an assembly of at least two parallel panes permanently assembled in manufacture and separated by one or more gap(s).
2.8.1. "Symmetrical multiple-glazed unit" means a multiple-glazed unit where all component panes are identical (e.g. all uniform toughened glass).
2.8.2. "Asymmetrical multiple-glazed unit" means a multiple-glazed unit other than a symmetrical multiple-glazed unit).
No.043 2014-02-12
Atmospheric pressure [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Atmospheric pressure Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.6. "Atmospheric pressure" means the wet, absolute, atmospheric static pressure. Note that if the atmospheric pressure is measured in a duct, negligible pressure losses shall be ensured between the atmosphere and the measurement location, and changes in the duct's static pressure resulting from the flow shall be accounted for;
No.096 2014-03-22
atmospheric pressure meter (Shared) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Shared atmospheric pressure meter Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.76. "Shared atmospheric pressure meter" means an atmospheric pressure meter whose output is used as the atmospheric pressure for an entire test facility that has more than one dynamometer test cell;
No.096 2014-03-22
Attachment [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Attachments Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Attachments
Parts of the belt assembly including the necessary securing components, which enable it to be attached to the belt anchorages.
No.016 2015-11-20
attachment (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ ISOFIX attachment safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, extending from the ISOFIX child restraint system structure and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage;
No.014 2015-08-19
attachment (ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ ISOFIX attachment Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "ISOFIX anchorage system" means a system made up of two ISOFIX low anchorages fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14 which is designed for attaching an ISOFIX Child Restraint System in conjunction with an anti-rotation device.
2.11.1. "ISOFIX low anchorage" means one 6 mm diameter rigid round horizontal bar, extending from vehicle or seat structure to accept and restrain an ISOFIX Child Restraint System with ISOFIX attachments.
2.11.2. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirement of paragraph 6.3.3. of this Regulation, extending from the ISOFIX Child Restraint System structure, and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage.
No.129 2014-03-29
attachment (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Isofix attachment Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Isofix attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, extending from the Isofix child restraint system structure, and compatible with an Isofix low anchorage.
No.014 2007-12-06
attachment (ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ ISOFIX attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "ISOFIX attachment" means one of the two connections, fulfilling the requirement of paragraph 6.3.2 of this Regulation, extending from the ISOFIX child restraint system structure, and compatible with an ISOFIX low anchorage.
No.044 2011-09-09
attachment (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ ISOFIX top tether attachment Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.
2.13.1. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
2.13.2. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.
2.13.3. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No. 14.
2.13.4. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX Child Restraint System.
No.129 2014-03-29
attachment (tether, top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Isofix top tether attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Isofix top tether attachment" is a device to secure the Isofix top tether strap to the Isofix child restraint system.
No.044 2007-11-23
attachment (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ ISOFIX top tether attachment Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX child restraint system.
No.044 2011-09-09
Attachment fitting [No.080 2013-08-24] @ Attachment fittings strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Attachment fittings" means bolts or other components used to attach the seat to the vehicle;
No.080 2013-08-24
Attachment fittings [No.080 2010-06-30] @ Attachment fittings Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Attachment fittings" means bolts or other components used to attach the seat to the vehicle;
No.080 2010-06-30
attachment strap (child-restraint) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ child-restraint attachment strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
No.044 2011-09-09
Attachments [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Attachments Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Attachments : Parts of the belt assembly including the necessary securing components, which enable it to be attached to the belt anchorages.
No.016 2007-11-30
Attachments [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Attachments Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Attachments
Parts of the belt assembly including the necessary securing components, which enable it to be attached to the belt anchorages.
No.016 2011-09-09
Attachments [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Attachments Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Attachments" means parts of the child restraint, including securing components, which
enable the child restraint to be firmly secured to the vehicle structure either directly or
through the vehicle seat;
2.11.1. "support leg" means a permanent attachment to a child restraint creating a compressive load path between the child restraint and a vehicle structure in order to by-pass seat cushion effects during deceleration; a support leg may be adjustable.
No.044 2007-11-23
Attachments [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Attachments Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Attachments" means parts of the child restraint, including securing components, which enable the child restraint to be firmly secured to the vehicle structure either directly or through the vehicle seat;
2.11.1. "Support leg" means a permanent attachment to a child restraint creating a compressive load path between the child restraint and a vehicle structure in order to by-pass seat cushion effects during deceleration; a support leg may be adjustable.
No.044 2011-09-09
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.014 2007-12-06A4] @ Vehicle measuring attitude Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.
No.014 2007-12-06
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.016 2007-11-30A15] @ Vehicle measuring attitude Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.
No.016 2007-11-30
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.017 2006-12-27] @ Vehicle measuring attitude Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.
No.017 2006-12-27
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] @ Vehicle measuring attitude protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE eHf POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the coordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.
No.029 2010-11-20
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.046 2010-07-10A8] @ Vehicle measuring attitude Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks inthe three-dimensional reference system.
No.046 2010-07-10
attitude (measuring, Vehicle) [No.080 2010-06-30A4] @ Vehicle measuring attitude Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the eHf point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the co-ordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.
No.080 2010-06-30
attitude (Vehicle measuring) [No.025 2010-08-14A3] @ Vehicle measuring attitude head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Vehicle measuring attitude" means the position of the vehicle as defined by the coordinates of fiducial marks in the three-dimensional reference system.
No.025 2010-08-14
audible signal [No.028 2010-07-17] @ audible signal (Approval of the motor vehicle) audible warning devices II. AUDIBLE SIGNALS OF MOTOR VEHICLES
11. DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this Regulation,
11.1. "Approval of the motor vehicle" shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal;
11.2. "Vehicle type" shall be understood to mean vehicles not essentially different from another with respect to such matters as:
11.2.1. the number and type(s) of warning devices fitted on the vehicle;
11.2.2. the mountings used to fit the warning devices to the vehicle;
11.2.3. the position of the warning devices on the vehicle;
11.2.4. the rigidity of the parts of the structure on which the warning device(s) is (are) mounted;
11.2.5. the shape and materials of the bodywork at the front of the vehicle which might affect the level of the sound emitted by the warning device(s) and have a masking effect.
No.028 2010-07-17
Audible warning [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Audible warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Audible warning" means a warning by sound signal.
No.016 2015-11-20
Audible warning [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Audible warning Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Audible warning" means a warning by sound signal.
No.016 2011-09-09
audible warning devices [No.028 2005-12-16] @ audible warning devices (AWD) Audible warning devices 2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood
to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3. type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than ar equal to 7 kW (class I).
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).
No.028 2005-12-16
audible warning devices [No.028 2010-07-17] @ audible warning devices (AWD) audible warning devices I. AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3. type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW (class I).
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).
No.028 2010-07-17
authorised use (un-, Device to prevent) [No.116 2012-02-16P1] @ Device to prevent unauthorised use Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.2. Device to prevent unauthorised use means a system designed to prevent unauthorised normal activation of the engine or other source of main engine power of the vehicle in combination with at least one system which:
(a) locks the steering; or
(b) locks the transmission; or
(c) locks the gearshift control; or
(d) locks brakes
In the case of a system which locks brakes, deactivation of the device shall not automatically release the brakes contrary to the driver's intention.
No.116 2012-02-16
Auto frettage [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Auto-frettage using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.47. "Auto-frettage" means a pressure application procedure used in manufacturing composite cylinders with metal liners, which strains the liner past its limit of elasticity, sufficiently to cause permanent plastic deformation which results in the liner having compressive stresses and the fibres having tensile stresses at zero internal pressure.
No.110 2015-06-30
auto frettage [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ auto-frettage Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.2. auto-frettage: A pressure application procedure used in manufacturing composite cylinders with metal liners, which strains the liner past its limit of elasticity, sufficiently to cause permanent plastic deformation which results in the liner having compressive stresses and the fibres having tensile stresses at zero internal pressure.
No.110 2008-03-14
Auto frettage pressure [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Auto-frettage pressure using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.48. "Auto-frettage pressure" means the pressure within the over-wrapped cylinder at which the required distribution of stresses between the liner and the over-wrap is established.
No.110 2015-06-30
auto frettage pressure [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ auto-frettage pressure Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.3. auto-frettage pressure: The pressure within the over-wrapped cylinder at which the required distribution of stresses between the liner and the over-wrap is established.
No.110 2008-03-14
Automated connector [No.013 2016-02-18] š Automated connector Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Automated connector" means a system through which the electric and pneumatic connection, between the towing vehicle and towed vehicle is made automatically without direct intervention of a human operator.
No.013 2016-02-18
Automatic braking [No.013 2016-02-18] š Automatic braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Automatic braking" means braking of the trailer or trailers occurring automatically in the event of separation of components of the combination of coupled vehicles, including such separation through the breakage of a coupling, the effectiveness of the braking of the remainder of the combination not being thereby destroyed;
No.013 2016-02-18
Automatic braking [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Automatic braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Automatic braking" means braking of the trailer or trailers occurring automatically in the event of separation of components of the combination of coupled vehicles, including such separation through the breakage of a coupling, the effectiveness of the braking of the remainder of the combination not being thereby destroyed;
No.013 2010-09-30
Automatic coupling procedure [No.102 2008-12-30] @ Automatic coupling procedure Close coupling devices 2.1.6. "Automatic coupling procedure": A coupling procedure is automatic if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely and properly and to secure it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the safety devices without any external intervention. No.102 2008-12-30
automatic coupling requirement [No.055 2006-12-27] @ automatic coupling requirement Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.
In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook.
No.055 2006-12-27
automatic coupling requirement [No.055 2010-08-28] @ automatic coupling requirement mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.
In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook.
No.055 2010-08-28
Automatic cylinder valve [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Automatic cylinder valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.19. "Automatic cylinder valve" means an automatic valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder that controls the flow of gas to the fuel system. The automatic cylinder valve is also called remote-controlled service valve.
No.110 2015-06-30
Automatic cylinder valve [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Automatic cylinder valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.8. "Automatic cylinder valve" means an automatic valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder which controls the flow of gas to the fuel system. The automatic cylinder valve is also called remote-controlled service valve.
No.110 2011-05-07
Automatic disconnect [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Automatic disconnect protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train;
No.012 2013-03-27
Automatic disconnect [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Automatic disconnect Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train,
No.094 2012-09-20
Automatic disconnect [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Automatic disconnect Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train.
No.095 2015-07-10
Automatic valve [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Automatic valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.18. "Automatic valve" means a valve that is not operated manually.
No.110 2015-06-30
Automatic valve [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Automatic valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.7. "Automatic valve" mans a valve which is not operated manually.
No.110 2011-05-07
Automatically activated door locking system [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Automatically activated door locking system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Automatically activated door locking system" means a system that locks the doors automatically at a pre-set speed or under any other condition as defined by the manufacturer.
No.095 2015-07-10
Automatically commanded braking [No.013 2016-02-18] š Automatically commanded braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013 2016-02-18
Automatically commanded braking [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013H 2015-12-22
Automatically commanded braking [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Automatically commanded braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013 2010-09-30
Automatically commanded braking [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Automatically commanded steering function [No.079 2008-05-27] @ Automatically commanded steering function Steering equipment 2.3.4.1. "Automatically commanded steering function" means the function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the steering system can result from automatic evaluation of signals initiated on-board the vehicle, possibly in conjunction with passive infrastructure features, to generate continuous control action in order to assist the driver in following a particular path, in low speed manoeuvring or parking operations. No.079 2008-05-27
Automatically locking retractor [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Automatically-locking retractor Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a Child Restraint System. The term covers the following devices:
2.41.1. "Automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented.
2.41.2. "Emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the strap wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.41.2.1. Deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic means (single sensitivity);
2.41.2.2. A combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).
No.129 2014-03-29
Automatically locking retractor (type 3) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Automatically locking retractor (type 3) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.3. Automatically locking retractor (type 3)
A retractor allowing extraction of the strap to the desired length and which, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer. Further extraction of the strap is prevented without voluntary intervention by the wearer.
No.016 2015-11-20
Automatically locking retractor [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Automatically locking retractor Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.3. Automatically locking retractor (type 3)
A retractor allowing extraction of the strap to the desired length and which, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer. Further extraction of the strap is prevented without voluntary intervention by the wearer.
No.016 2011-09-09
automatically locking retractor [No.044 2007-11-23] @ an automatically-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Retractor" means a device designed to accommodate a part or the whole of the strap of a child restraint. The term covers the following devices:
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearer's physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;
2.13.2. "an emergency-locking retractor", a retractor which does not restrict the belt wearer's freedom of movement in normal driving conditions. Such a device has length-adjusting devices which automatically adjust the strap to the wearer's physique, and a locking mechanism actuated in an emergency by:
2.13.2.1. deceleration of the vehicle, extraction of the strap from the retractor, or any other automatic
means (single sensitivity); or
2.13.2.2. a combination of any of these means (multiple sensitivity).
No.044 2007-11-23
automatically locking retractor [No.044 2011-09-09] @ automatically-locking retractor Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13.1. "an automatically-locking retractor", a retractor which allows extraction of the desired length of a strap and, when the buckle is fastened, automatically adjusts the strap to the wearerfs physique, further extraction of the strap without voluntary intervention by the wearer being prevented;
No.044 2011-09-09
Automatically operated service door [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Automatically-operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically-operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.
No.107 2015-06-18
Automatically operated service door [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Automatically-operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically-operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.
No.107 2006-12-27
Automatically operated service-door [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Automatically operated service-door Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Automatically operated service-door" means a power-operated service door which can be opened (other than by means of emergency controls) only after a control is operated by a passenger and after activation of the controls by the driver, and which closes again automatically.
No.107 2010-09-29
Autonomous Steering System [No.079 2008-05-27] @ Autonomous Steering System Steering equipment 2.3.3. "Autonomous Steering System" means a system that incorporates a function within a complex electronic control system that causes the vehicle to follow a defined path or to alter its path in response to signals initiated and transmitted from off-board the vehicle. The driver will not necessarily be in primary control of the vehicle. No.079 2008-05-27
Auxiliary battery [No.100 2009-02-14] @ Auxiliary battery Electric vehicle safety 2.7. "Auxiliary battery" means the battery unit whose reserve of energy is used only for the auxiliary network supply No.100 2009-02-14
Auxiliary door latch [No.011 2010-05-13] @ Auxiliary door latch door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Auxiliary door latch" is a latch equipped with a fully latched position with or without a secondary latch position, and fitted to a door or door system equipped with a primary door latch system.
No.011 2010-05-13
Auxiliary door latch system [No.011 2010-05-13] @ Auxiliary door latch system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Auxiliary door latch system" consists, at a minimum, of an auxiliary door latch and a striker.
No.011 2010-05-13
auxiliary emission control strategy [No.049 2008-04-12] @ auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;
No.049 2008-04-12
auxiliary emission control strategy [No.049 2010-08-31] @ auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;
No.049 2010-08-31
Auxiliary Emission Strategy [No.049 2013-06-24] @ AES (Auxiliary Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Auxiliary Emission Strategy" (AES) means an emission strategy that becomes active and replaces or modifies a base emission strategy for a specific purpose and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions and only remains operational as long as those conditions exist;
No.049 2013-06-24
Auxiliary network [No.100 2009-02-14] @ Auxiliary network Electric vehicle safety 2.8. "Auxiliary network" means the assembly of auxiliary electric equipment with similar functions to the one used on vehicles equipped with an internal combustion engine. No.100 2009-02-14
Auxiliary seat [No.080 2013-08-24] @ Auxiliary seat strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Auxiliary seat" means a seat for the manikin mounted on the trolley to the rear of the seat to be tested. This seat shall be representative of the seat to be used in the vehicle behind the seat to be tested;
No.080 2013-08-24
Auxiliary seat [No.080 2010-06-30] @ Auxiliary seat Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Auxiliary seat" means a seat for the manikin mounted on the trolley to the rear of the seat to be tested. This seat shall be representative of the seat to be used in the vehicle behind the seat to be tested.
No.080 2010-06-30
Auxiliary steering equipment (ASE) [No.079 2008-05-27] @ Auxiliary steering equipment (ASE) Steering equipment 2.5.1.3. "Auxiliary steering equipment (ASE)" means a system in which the wheels on axle(s) of vehicles of categories M and N are steered in addition to the wheels of the main steering equipment in the same or opposite direction to those of the main steering equipment and/or the steering angle of the front and/or the rear wheels may be adjusted relative to vehicle behaviour. No.079 2008-05-27
Av (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ Symbols and Av : definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force
No.055 2006-12-27
average specific emissions of CO2 [REG. No 443/2009] @ average specific emissions of CO2 reduce CO2 emissions from light-duty vehicles (a) "average specific emissions of CO2" means, in relation to a manufacturer, the average of the specific emissions of CO2 of all new passenger cars of which it is the manufacturer; REG. No 443/2009
AWD [No.028 2005-12-16] @ audible warning devices (AWD) Audible warning devices 2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood
to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3. type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than ar equal to 7 kW (class I).
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).
No.028 2005-12-16
AWD [No.028 2010-07-17] @ audible warning devices (AWD) audible warning devices I. AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3. type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW (class I).
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).
No.028 2010-07-17
AWD [No.028 2011-12-06] @ AWD (warning devices) audible warning devices 2. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different "types" shall be understood to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:
2.1. trade name or mark;
2.2. principles of operation;
2.3 type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);
2.4. outer shape of case;
2.5. shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);
2.6. shape or kind of sound outlet(s);
2.7. rated sound frequency or frequencies;
2.8. rated supply voltage;
2.9. for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.
2.10. The AWD is principally intended for:
2.10.1. motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW (class I);
2.10.2. vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).
No.028 2011-12-06
axis (First) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ First axis (symbol 1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.9. "First axis (symbol 1)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to the observation half-plane;
No.104 2014-03-14
axis (Illumination) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Illumination axis (symbol I) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.2. "Illumination axis (symbol I)" means a line segment from the reference centre to the light source.
No.104 2014-03-14
axis (Observation) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Observation axis (symbol O) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.3. "Observation axis (symbol O)" means a line segment from the reference centre to the photometer head;
No.104 2014-03-14
axis (Reference) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Reference axis (symbol R) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.6. "Reference axis (symbol R)" means a designated line segment originating on the reference centre which is used to describe the angular position of the retro-reflective device;
No.104 2014-03-14
axis (Reference) [No.128 2014-05-29] @ Reference axis Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.5. Reference axis: an axis defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the LED light sources are referred;
No.128 2014-05-29
axis (Reference) [No.037 2010-11-13] @ Reference axis Filament lamps 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. "Reference axis": an axis defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the filament lamp are referred.
No.037 2010-11-13
axis (Reference) [No.099 2010-06-30] @ Reference axis Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. "Reference axis": An axis defined with reference to the cap and to which certain dimensions of the gas-discharge light source are referred.
No.099 2010-06-30
axis (reference, System) [No.123 2006-12-27] @ System reference axis Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.13. "System reference axis" means the intersection line of the vehicle's longitudinal median plane with the horizontal plane through the centre of reference of one lighting unit specified in the drawings according to paragraph 2.2.1. below;
No.123 2006-12-27
axis (reference, System) [No.123 2010-08-24] @ System reference axis Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.13. "System reference axis" means the intersection line of the vehicle's longitudinal median plane with the horizontal plane through the centre of reference of one lighting unit specified in the drawings according to paragraph 2.2.1 below;
No.123 2010-08-24
axis (Second) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Second axis (symbol 2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.12. "Second axis (symbol 2)" means an axis through the reference centre and perpendicular to both the first axis and the reference axis. The positive direction of the second axis lies in the observation half-plane when – 90‹ ƒ ƒÀ1 ƒ 90‹ as shown in Annex 1, figure 1.
No.104 2014-03-14
Axis of reference [Directive 2009/061/EC] @ Axis of reference installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.7. Axis of reference
"Axis of reference" means the characteristic axis of the light signal determined by the manufacturer of the lamp for use as the direction of reference (H = 0‹, V = 0‹) for photometric measurements and when fitting the lamp on the tractor.
Directive 2009/061/EC
axis of reference [Directive 2009/067/EC] @ axis of reference installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
8. axis of reference
means the characteristic axis of the lamp, determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0‹, V = 0‹) for angles of field for photometric measurements and when fitting the lamp on the vehicle;
Directive 2009/067/EC
Axis of reference [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Axis of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.11. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0‹, V = 0‹) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle; No.048 2008-05-23
Axis of reference [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Axis of reference or reference axis Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0‹, V = 0‹) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle;
No.053 2013-06-18
Axis of reference [No.074 2013-06-18] @ Axis of reference (or reference axis) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0‹, V = 0‹) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle;
No.074 2013-06-18
Axis of reference [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ "Axis of reference" or "reference axis" Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Axis of reference" (or "reference axis") means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0‹, V = 0‹) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle;
No.048 2011-12-06
Axis of reference [No.086 2010-09-30] @ Axis of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Axis of reference" means the characteristic axis of the light signal determined by the manufacturer of the lamp for use as the direction of reference (H = 0‹, V = 0‹) for photometric measurements and when fitting the lamp on the tractor.
No.086 2010-09-30
axis on to the LED light source (Viewing) [No.128 2014-05-29] @ Viewing axis on to the LED light source Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.9. Viewing axis on to the LED light source: an axis through the light centre at defined polar and azimuthal angle used to characterise photometrical properties of the LED light source.
No.128 2014-05-29
axle (mass among the, distribution of) [No.013 2016-02-18] š The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles;
No.013 2016-02-18
axle (mass among the, distribution of) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles.
No.013H 2015-12-22
Axle group [No.013 2016-02-18] š Axle group Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Axle group" means multiple axles where the axle spread between one axle and its adjacent axle is equal to or less than 2,0 m. Where the axle spread between one axle and its adjacent axle is greater than 2,0 m, each individual axle shall be considered as an independent axle group.
No.013 2016-02-18
axle load [No.013 2016-02-18] š Wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle;
No.013 2016-02-18
axle load [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle.
No.013H 2015-12-22
axle load (Maximum) [No.064 2010-11-26] @ Maximum axle load Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Maximum axle load" means the maximum value, as indicated by the manufacturer, of the total vertical force between the contact surfaces of the tyres or tracks of one axle and the ground and resulting from the part of the vehicle mass supported by that axle; this load may be higher than the "authorised axle load" laid down by the national administration. The sum of the axle loads may be greater than the value corresponding to the total mass of the vehicle;
No.064 2010-11-26
axle load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;
No.013 2016-02-18
axle load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.
No.013H 2015-12-22
axle load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle;
No.013 2010-09-30
axle load (stationary, Maximum) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Maximum stationary wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Maximum stationary wheel/axle load" means the stationary wheel/axle load achieved under the condition of the laden vehicle.
No.013H 2010-08-31
axle load [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Wheel/axle load Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle;
No.013 2010-09-30
axle load [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Wheel/axle load Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Wheel/axle load" means the vertical static reaction (force) of the road surface in the contact area on the wheel/wheels of the axle.
No.013H 2010-08-31
axle trailer (Centre) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ Centre axle trailer Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Centre axle trailer" means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser.
The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass.
No.055 2006-12-27
axle trailer (Centre) [No.055 2010-08-28] @ Centre axle trailer mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Centre axle trailer" means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser.
The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
No.055 2010-08-28
axles (distribution of mass among the) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ The distribution of mass among the axles Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles.
No.013H 2010-08-31
axles (mass among the, distribution of) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ distribution of mass among the axles Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "The distribution of mass among the axles" means the distribution of the effect of the gravity on the mass of the vehicle and/or its contents among the axles;
No.013 2010-09-30
axles (mass among the, distribution of) [No.111 2002-02-01] @ the distribution of mass among the axles Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "the distribution of mass among the axles" means the proportion of the maximum permissible mass borne by each axle, as declared by the vehicle manufacturer;
No.111 2002-02-01
Top@Sort MK —pŒê ‘Ώەª–ì ’è‹` Source
B (category, Electric regenerative braking system of ) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Electric regenerative braking system of category A, B Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
No.013H 2015-12-22
B (class, Front fog lamp) [No.019 2014-08-22] @ classes "B" or "F3" (Front fog lamp) Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.2. Different "classes" ("B" or "F3") identified by particular photometric provisions:1.4.3. The characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LED module, DLS etc.),
No.019 2014-08-22
B Class Headlamp [No.112 2014-08-22] @ Classes (A or B) Headlamps headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.
No.112 2014-08-22
back (Camel-) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Camel-back @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.
No.108 2006-07-04
back (Seat-) [No.080 2010-06-30] @ Seat-back Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Seat-back" means the part of the seat that is almost vertical, designed to support the passengerfs back, shoulders and, possibly, his head;
No.080 2010-06-30
back angle (Seat) [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Seat back angle Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Seat back angle" means the design torso angle as defined in annex 19 of this Regulation.
No.043 2010-08-31
back angle (Seat-) [No.125 2010-07-31] @ Seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.6 or 2.7.
No.125 2010-07-31
back angle (seat-, Actual) [No.125 2010-07-31] @ Actual seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Actual seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.6.
No.125 2010-07-31
back angle (seat-, Design) [No.125 2010-07-31] @ Design seat-back angle Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Design seat-back angle" means the angle defined in Annex 3, paragraph 2.7.
No.125 2010-07-31
Back door [No.011 2010-05-13] @ Back door door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Back door" is a door or door system on the back end of a motor vehicle through which passengers can enter or depart the vehicle or cargo can be loaded or unloaded. It does not include:
(a) a trunk lid; or
(b) a door or window composed entirely of glazing material and whose latches and/or hinge systems are attached directly to the glazing material.
No.011 2010-05-13
Backplate [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Backplate Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force;
2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake;
2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining;
No.090 2010-05-28
Backplate [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Backplate Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.
No.090 2012-07-13
bag (Air) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Air-bag protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Air-bag" means a flexible bag that is designed to be filled with a gas under pressure, and is:
2.7.1. Designed to protect the vehicle driver in an impact against the steering control;
2.7.2. Inflated by a device which is actuated in case of vehicle's impact;
No.012 2013-03-27
Ballast [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Ballast Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.1.2.1. "Ballast" means an electronic light source control gear between supply and light source to stabilise the electrical current of a gas-discharge light source; No.048 2008-05-23
Ballast [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Ballast Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.1. Light source
2.7.1.2.1. "Ballast" means an electronic light source control gear between supply and light source to stabilise the electrical current of a gas-discharge light source;
No.048 2011-12-06
Ballast [No.098 2001-06-25] @ Ballast Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Ballast" means the electrical supply of the gas-discharge light source. This ballast may be partly or completely inside or outside the headlamp;
No.098 2001-06-25
Ballast [No.098 2010-06-30] @ Ballast gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Ballast" means the electrical supply of the gas-discharge light source. This ballast may be partly or completely inside or outside the headlamp;
No.098 2010-06-30
Ballast [No.099 2010-06-30] @ Ballast Gas-discharge light sources 3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. Definitions
3.1.2. "Ballast": Specific electrical supply for the gas-discharge light source.
No.099 2010-06-30
band (Shade) [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Shade band safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Shade band" means any area of the glazing with a reduced light transmittance, excluding any opaque obscuration.
No.043 2014-02-12
band (Shade) [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Shade band Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Shade band" means any area of the glazing with a reduced regular transmittance.
No.043 2010-08-31
Bank angle [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Bank angle Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Bank angle" means: the angle made with the vertical by the vertical longitudinal median plane of the motorcycle, when the motorcycle is rotated about its longitudinal axis (see drawing in Annex 6);
No.053 2013-06-18
Barrier [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Barrier Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Barrier" means the part providing protection against direct contact to the live parts from any direction of access.
No.100 2011-02-14
Barrier [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Barrier Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Barrier" means the part providing protection against direct contact to the live parts from any direction of access.
No.100 2015-03-31
barrier (deformable, Mobile) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Mobile deformable barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Mobile deformable barrier" means the apparatus with which the test vehicle is impacted. It consists of a trolley and an impactor.
No.095 2015-07-10
barrier (deformable, Mobile) [No.095 2007-11-30] @ Mobile deformable barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Mobile deformable barrier" means the apparatus with which the test vehicle is impacted. It consists of a trolley and an impactor;
No.095 2007-11-30
barrier (protection, Electrical) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Electrical protection barrier protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electrical protection barrier" the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts;
No.012 2013-03-27
Barrier (Protection, Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Electrical Protection Barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electrical Protection Barrier" means the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts,
No.094 2012-09-20
barrier (protection, Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Electrical protection barrier Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electrical protection barrier" means the part providing protection against any direct contact to the high voltage live parts.
No.095 2015-07-10
barrier face (Deformable) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Deformable barrier face Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Deformable barrier face" means a crushable section mounted on the front of a rigid block;
No.094 2012-09-20
barrier face (Deformable) [No.094 2010-05-28] @ Deformable barrier face Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Deformable barrier face" means a crushable section mounted on the front of a rigid block;
No.094 2010-05-28
bars (Handle) [No.060 2004-03-31] @ Handlebars Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Handlebars" means any part of the bar or bars connected to the head of the forks (steering head) by means of which the vehicle is steered;
2.5.1. "Handlebars: right side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the right side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle;
2.5.2. "Handlebars: left side" means any part of the handlebars which, when facing the direction of forward movement, lies on the left side of the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle;
2.5.3. "Handlebars: forward" means any part of the handlebars lying on the side farthest from the driver when seated in a driving position;
No.060 2004-03-31
BAS [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ BAS (Brake Assist System) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driverfs brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) Assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate; or
(b) Is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;
No.013H 2015-12-22
BAS [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Brake Assist System (BAS) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driverfs brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate, or
(b) is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;
2.34.3. "Category C Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on multiple criteria, one of which must be the rate at which the brake pedal is applied.
No.013H 2010-08-31
base emission control strategy [No.049 2008-04-12] @ base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active
throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;
No.049 2008-04-12
base emission control strategy [No.049 2010-08-31] @ base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;
No.049 2010-08-31
Base Emission Strategy [No.049 2013-06-24] @ BES (Base Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Base Emission Strategy" (BES) means an emission strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AES is activated;
No.049 2013-06-24
Base vehicle [No.105 2005-12-16] @ Base vehicle Carriage of dangerous goods — construction of vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Base vehicle" (hereinafter referred to as "vehicle") means a chassis-cab vehicle, a tractor for semitrailer, a trailer-chassis or a trailer with a self-supporting body intended for the transport of dangerous goods;
No.105 2005-12-16
Base vehicle [No.105 2010-08-31] @ Base vehicle carriage of dangerous goods - constructional features 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Base vehicle" (hereinafter referred to as "vehicle") means a chassis-cab vehicle, a tractor for semi- trailer, a trailer-chassis or a trailer with a self-supporting body intended for the transport of dangerous goods;
No.105 2010-08-31
Baseline test [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Baseline test Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Baseline test" means a stop or a series of stops carried out in order to confirm the performance of the brake prior to subjecting it to a further test such as the heating procedure or wet brake stop.
No.078 2015-01-30
Basic tyre function [No.064 2010-11-26] @ Basic tyre function Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Basic tyre function" means the normal capability of an inflated tyre in supporting a given load up to a given speed and transmitting the driving, the steering and the braking forces to the ground on which it runs.
No.064 2010-11-26
Basic tyre functions [No.030 2008-07-30] @ Basic tyre functions Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.33. "Basic tyre functions" means the normal capability of an inflated tyre in supporting a given load up to a given speed and transmitting the driving, the steering and the braking forces to the ground on which it runs. No.030 2008-07-30
Batch composite cylinder [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Batch - composite cylinders using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.49. "Batch — composite cylinders" means a "batch" i.e. a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.
No.110 2015-06-30
batch composite cylinders [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ batch - composite cylinders Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.4. batch - composite cylinders: A "batch" shall be a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having
the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.
No.110 2008-03-14
Batch limit [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Batch limits using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.52. "Batch limits" means in no case a "batch" shall be permitted to exceed 200 finished cylinders or liners (not including destructive test cylinders or liners), or one shift of successive production, whichever is greater.
No.110 2015-06-30
batch limits [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ batch limits Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.7. batch limits: In no case shall a ebatchf be permitted to exceed 200 finished cylinders or liners (not including destructive test cylinders or liners), or one shift of successive production, whichever is greater
No.110 2008-03-14
Batch metal cylinder and liner [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Batch - metal cylinders and liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.50. "Batch — metal cylinders and liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.
No.110 2015-06-30
batch metal cylinders and liners [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ batch - metal cylinders and liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.5. batch - metal cylinders and liners: A ebatchf shall be a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.
No.110 2008-03-14
Batch non metallic liner [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Batch non-metallic liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.51. "Batch non-metallic liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of non-metallic liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design specified material of construction and process of manufacture.
No.110 2015-06-30
batch non metallic liners [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ batch non-metallic liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.6. batch non-metallic liners: A ebatchf shall be a group of non-metallic liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design specified material of construction and process of manufacture.
No.110 2008-03-14
Batch of containers [No.067 2008-03-14] @ Batch of containers LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" means any vessel used for the storage of liquefied petroleum gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
(i) a standard cylindrical container with a cylindrical shell, two dished ends either torispherical or elliptical and the required openings;
(ii) a special container: other containers than standard cylindrical containers. The dimensional characteristics are given in Annex 10, Appendix 5;
2.3.2. "All-composite container" means a container made only of composite materials with a non metallic liner.
2.3.3. "Batch of containers" means a maximum of 200 containers of the same type produced consecutively on the same production line.
No.067 2008-03-14
battery (Traction) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Traction battery Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013 2016-02-18
battery (Traction) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Traction battery Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013H 2015-12-22
battery (Traction) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Traction battery Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013 2010-09-30
battery (traction, Open type) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Open type traction battery protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.
No.012 2013-03-27
battery (traction, Open type) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Open type traction battery Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.
No.094 2012-09-20
battery (traction, Open type) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Open type traction battery Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Open type traction battery" means a type of battery requiring liquid and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.
No.095 2015-07-10
battery (traction, Open type) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Open type traction battery Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Open type traction battery" means a liquid type battery requiring refilling with water and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.
No.100 2011-02-14
battery (traction, Open type) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Open type traction battery Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Open type traction battery" means a liquid type battery requiring refilling with water and generating hydrogen gas released to the atmosphere.
No.100 2015-03-31
Battery electric road vehicle [No.100 2009-02-14] @ Battery electric road vehicle Electric vehicle safety 2.1. "Battery electric road vehicle" means a vehicle with bodywork intended for road use, powered exclusively by an electric motor whose traction energy is supplied exclusively by a traction battery installed in the vehicle. No.100 2009-02-14
Battery module [No.100 2009-02-14] @ Battery module Electric vehicle safety 2.5. "Battery module" means the smallest single energy storage consisting of one cell or an assembly of cells, electrically connected in serial or in parallel, placed in one container and mechanically associated. No.100 2009-02-14
Battery pack [No.100 2009-02-14] @ Battery pack Electric vehicle safety 2.6. "Battery pack" means a single mechanical assembly comprising battery modules and retaining frames or trays. A vehicle may have one or several, or no battery pack. No.100 2009-02-14
Bay [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Bay Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Bay" means a structural section of the superstructure forming a closed loop between two planes which are perpendicular to the vertical longitudinal central plane of the vehicle. A bay contains one window (or door) pillar on each side of the vehicle as well as side wall elements, a section of the roof structure and a section of the floor and underfloor structure.
No.066 2007-12-06
Bay [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Bay Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Bay" means a structural section of the superstructure forming a closed loop between two planes which are perpendicular to the vertical longitudinal central plane of the vehicle. A bay contains one window (or door) pillar on each side of the vehicle as well as side wall elements, a section of the roof structure and a section of the floor and underfloor structure.
No.066 2011-03-30
Bead [No.030 2008-07-30] @ Bead Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.4. "Bead" means the part of a pneumatic tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Bead [No.054 2008-07-11] @ Bead Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.4. "Bead" means the part of a pneumatic tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and to hold the tyre on it; No.054 2008-07-11
Bead [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Bead Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Bead" means the part of a pneumatic tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it.
No.075 2011-03-30
Bead [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Bead Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Bead" means the part of a tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it;
No.106 2010-09-30
Bead [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Bead @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Bead" means the part of a pneumatic-tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it.
No.108 2006-07-04
Bead [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Bead Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Bead" means the part of a pneumatic-tyre which is of such shape and structure as to fit the rim and hold the tyre on it.
No.109 2006-07-04
Bead to bead [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Bead to bead Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Retreading" means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface and replacement of the crown plies or the protective breaker. It covers the following process methods:
2.37.1. "Top capping" — replacement of the tread;
2.37.2. "Re-capping" — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall;
2.37.3. "Bead to bead" — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.
No.109 2006-07-04
beam (Driving, main, headlamp) [No.074 2013-06-18] @ Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;
No.074 2013-06-18
beam (passing, Class of a) [No.123 2010-08-24] @ Class of a passing beam Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Class" of a passing beam (C, V, E or W) means the designation of a passing beam, identified by particular provisions according to this Regulation and Regulation No 48 ( 1 );
No.123 2010-08-24
beam (Passing, dipped, headlamp) [No.074 2013-06-18] @ Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
No.074 2013-06-18
beam (Principal passing / dipped) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitter and/or additional light sources for bend lighting;
No.048 2011-12-06
beam headlamp (Driving / main) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.9. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;
No.048 2011-12-06
beam headlamp (Driving, main) [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.6. "Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;
No.053 2013-06-18
beam headlamp (Passing / dipped) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.10. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road- users;
No.048 2011-12-06
beam headlamp (Passing, dipped) [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.7. "Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp" means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without dazzling of causing undue discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road users;
2.5.7.1. "Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)" means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitters and/or additional light sources for bend lighting.
No.053 2013-06-18
beam headlamp unit (Sealed) [No.005 2014-05-29] @ SB (Sealed beam) headlamp unit Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;
No.005 2014-05-29
beam headlamp unit (Sealed) [No.005 2001-05-14] @ Sealed beam headlamp unit (SB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Sealed beam" headlamp unit (hereinafter termed "SB unit"), means a headlamp unit whose components, comprising a reflector system, a lens system and one or more electrical light sources are all parts of an integral whole which has been sealed in the course of manufacture and which cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable;
No.005 2001-05-14
beam headlamp unit (sealed-, Halogen) [No.031 2001-06-25] @ Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit (HSB unit) Asymmetric headlamps (halogen sealed beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Halogen sealed-beam headlamp unit" (hereinafter termed "HSB unit") means a headlamp whose components, including a reflector of glass, metal or other material, an optical system and one or more halogen light sources, form an integral whole which is indivisibly joined and cannot be dismantled without rendering the unit completely unusable. Such units are:
2.1.1. of "category 1",
when they emit only a driving beam;
2.1.2. of "category 21",
when they emit only a passing beam;
2.1.3. of "category 22",
when they emit, at the user's choice, either a driving beam or a passing beam;
No.031 2001-06-25
beam unit (Sealed) [No.005 2014-05-29] @ SB (Sealed beam) units Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. SB units are considered to be of different types if they differ in one or more of the following essentials of form or characteristics:
2.4.1. Trade name or mark;
2.4.2. Characteristics of the optical system;
2.4.3. Inclusion of additional components capable of altering the optical effects by reflection, refraction, absorption and/or deformation during operation;
2.4.4. The rated voltage (the same approval number may be granted if the only change is of rated voltage);
2.4.5. The rated wattage;
2.4.6. The shape of the filament(s);
2.4.7. The kind of beam produced (passing beam, driving beam or both);
2.4.8. Suitability for right-hand or left-hand traffic or for both traffic systems;
2.4.9. The colour of the light emitted;
2.4.10. The materials constituting the lens and coating, if any.
No.005 2014-05-29
BECS [No.049 2008-04-12] @ base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active
throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;
No.049 2008-04-12
BECS [No.049 2010-08-31] @ base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;
No.049 2010-08-31
Belt [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt" means a child restraint comprising a combination of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments.
No.044 2007-11-23
Belt [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt" means a child restraint comprising a combination of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments.
No.044 2011-09-09
Belt [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Belt @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Belt" applies to a radial ply or bias belted tyre and means a layer or layers of material or materials underneath the tread, laid substantially in the direction of the centre line of the tread to restrict the carcass in a circumferential direction.
No.108 2006-07-04
Belt [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Belt Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Belt" applies to a radial ply or bias belted tyre and means a layer or layers of material or materials underneath the tread, laid substantially in the direction of the centre line of the tread to restrict the carcass in a circumferential direction.
No.109 2006-07-04
Belt [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Belt Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Belt" means a child restraint comprising a combination of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments.
No.129 2014-03-29
belt (3 point) [No.080 2013-08-24] @ 3-point belt strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "3-point belt" for the purposes of this Regulation also includes belts with more than three anchorage points;
No.080 2013-08-24
belt (3-point) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Three-point belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.3. Three-point belt : A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.
No.016 2007-11-30
belt (3-point) [No.080 2010-06-30] @ 3-point belt Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "3-point belt" for the purposes of this Regulation also includes belts with more than three anchorage points.
No.080 2010-06-30
belt (Diagonal) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Diagonal belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.2. Diagonal belt : A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.
No.016 2007-11-30
belt (Harness) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Harness belt Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and a crotch strap.
No.129 2014-03-29
belt (Harness) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Harness belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.5. Harness belt : A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.
No.016 2007-11-30
belt (harness) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ harness belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.
No.044 2007-11-23
belt (harness) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ harness belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
No.044 2011-09-09
belt (Lap) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Lap belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.1. Lap belt : A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer's pelvic region.
No.016 2007-11-30
belt (Safety-) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a "belt assembly", which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
2.1.3. Three-point belt
2.1.4. S-type belt
2.1.5. Harness belt
No.016 2007-11-30
belt (Safety-) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearerfs body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a ebelt assemblyf, which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearerfs pelvic region.
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.
2.1.3. Three-point belt
A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.
2.1.4. S-type belt
A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.
2.1.5. Harness belt
A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.
No.016 2011-09-09
belt (Safety, seat) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
An arrangement of straps with a securing buckle, adjusting devices and attachments which is capable of being anchored to the interior of a power-driven vehicle and is designed to diminish the risk of injury to its wearer, in the event of collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body. Such an arrangement is generally referred to as a ebelt assemblyf, which term also embraces any device for absorbing energy or for retracting the belt.
The arrangement can be tested and approved as a safety-belt arrangement or as a restraint system.
2.1.1. Lap belt
A two-point belt which passes across the front of the wearer's pelvic region.
2.1.2. Diagonal belt
A belt which passes diagonally across the front of the chest from the hip to the opposite shoulder.
2.1.3. Three-point belt
A belt which is essentially a combination of a lap strap and a diagonal strap.
2.1.4. S-type belt
A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.
2.1.5. Harness belt
A S-type belt arrangement comprising a lap belt and shoulder straps; a harness belt may be provided with an additional crotch strap assembly.
No.016 2015-11-20
belt (S-type) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ S-type belt Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Safety-belt (seat-belt, belt)
2.1.4. S-type belt : A belt arrangement other than a three-point belt or a lap belt.
No.016 2007-11-30
belt (Y shaped) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Y-shaped belt Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.
No.129 2014-03-29
belt (Y-shaped) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Y-shaped belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.
No.044 2007-11-23
belt (Y-shaped) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Y-shaped belt Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the childfs legs and a strap for each shoulder;
No.044 2011-09-09
Belt adjusting device [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device
A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.
No.016 2015-11-20
Belt adjusting device [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device : A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.
No.016 2007-11-30
Belt adjusting device [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Belt adjusting device Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Belt adjusting device
A device enabling the belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and to the position of the seat. The adjusting device may be part of the buckle, or a retractor, or any other part of the safety-belt.
No.016 2011-09-09
Belt adjustment device for height [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Belt adjustment device for height Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.
No.016 2015-11-20
Belt adjustment device for height [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Belt adjustment device for height Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. Retractor
Device to accommodate part or the whole of the strap of a safety-belt.
2.14.6. Belt adjustment device for height
A device enabling the position in height of the upper pillar loop of a belt to be adjusted according to the requirements of the individual wearer and the position of the seat. Such a device may be considered as a part of the belt or a part of the anchorage of the belt.
No.016 2011-09-09
Belt anchorage [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Belt anchorages safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;
No.014 2015-08-19
Belt anchorage [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages
Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.
No.016 2015-11-20
belt anchorage (Effective) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Effective belt anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4, the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage;
2.4.1. For example, in the case
2.4.1.1. Where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer's side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and,
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;
No.014 2015-08-19
belt anchorage (Effective) [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Effective belt anchorage Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4., the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage.
2.4.1. For example,
2.4.1.1. where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearer's side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and,
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;
No.014 2007-12-06
belt anchorage (effective) [No.014 2011-04-28] @ effective belt anchorage safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "effective belt anchorage" means the point used to determine conventionally, as specified in paragraph 5.4, the angle of each part of the safety-belt in relation to the wearer, that is, the point to which a strap would need to be attached to provide the same lie as the intended lie of the belt when worn, and which may or may not be the actual belt anchorage depending on the configuration of the safety-belt hardware at its attachment to the belt anchorage.
2.4.1. For example, in the case
2.4.1.1. where a strap guide is used on the vehicle structure or on the seat structure, the middle point of the guide at the place where the strap leaves the guide on the belt wearerfs side, shall be considered as the effective belt anchorage; and
2.4.1.2. where the belt runs directly from the wearer to a retractor attached to the vehicle structure or the seat structure without an intervening strap guide, the effective belt anchorage shall be considered as being the intersection of the axis of the reel for storing the strap with the plane passing through the centre line of the strap on the reel;
No.014 2011-04-28
Belt anchorages [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Belt anchorages Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;
No.014 2007-12-06
belt anchorages [No.014 2011-04-28] @ belt anchorages safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "belt anchorages" means the parts of the vehicle structure or the seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured;
No.014 2011-04-28
Belt anchorages [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages : Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.
No.016 2007-11-30
Belt anchorages [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Belt anchorages Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. Belt anchorages
Parts of the vehicles structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belt assemblies are to be secured.
No.016 2011-09-09
belt and restraint system (safety, Vehicle type as regards) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Vehicle type as regards safety-belts and restraint systems
Category of power-driven vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the dimensions, lines and materials of components of the vehicle structure or seat structure or any other part of the vehicle to which the safety-belts and the restraint systems are attached.
No.016 2015-11-20
belt is not fastened (Safety) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Safety-belt is not fastened Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.46. "Safety-belt is not fastened" means, at the option of the manufacturer, either the driver safety-belt buckle is not engaged or the webbing length pulled out of the retractor is 100 mm or less.
No.016 2015-11-20
belt line [No.021 2008-07-16] @ belt line Interior fittings 2.6. "belt line" means the line constituted by the transparent lower contour of the side windows of the vehicle; No.021 2008-07-16
belt reminder (Safety) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Safety-belt reminder Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Safety-belt reminder", means a system dedicated to alert the driver when he/she does not use the safety-belt. The system is constituted by a detection of an unfastened safety-belt and by two levels of driver's alert: a first level warning and a second level warning.
No.016 2015-11-20
belt reminder (Safety-) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Safety-belt reminder Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Safety-belt reminder", means a system dedicated to alert the driver when he/she does not use the safety-belt. The system is constituted by a detection of an unfastened safety-belt and by two levels of driverfs alert: a first level warning and a second level warning.
No.016 2011-09-09
Belt type [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Belt type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Belt type
Belts of different "types" are belts differing substantially from one another; the differences may relate in particular to:
2.2.1. Rigid parts (buckle, attachments, retractor, etc.);
2.2.2. The material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps; or
2.2.3. The geometry of the belt assembly.
No.016 2015-11-20
Belt type [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Belt type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Belt type
Belts of different "types" are belts differing substantially from one another; the differences may relate in particular to:
2.2.1. rigid parts (buckle, attachments, retractor, etc.);
2.2.2. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps; or
2.2.3. the geometry of the belt assembly.
No.016 2007-11-30
Belt type [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Belt type Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Belt type
Belts of different "types" are belts differing substantially from one another; the differences may relate in particular to:
2.2.1. rigid parts (buckle, attachments, retractor, etc.);
2.2.2. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps; or
2.2.3. the geometry of the belt assembly.
No.016 2011-09-09
belt webbing guide (safety-, Adult) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.
No.044 2007-11-23
belt webbing guide (safety-, Adult) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Adult safety-belt webbing guide Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Adult safety-belt webbing guide" means a device through which the adult belt passes for its correct routing, that allows free webbing movement.
No.044 2011-09-09
belted (Bias) [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Bias belted Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyrefs carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90‹ to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90‹ to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.
No.075 2011-03-30
belted (Bias-) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Bias-belted Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Structure" of a tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.3.2. "Bias-belted" describes a tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass;
No.106 2010-09-30
belted (Bias) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Bias belted @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.
No.108 2006-07-04
belted (Bias) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Bias belted Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a
belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.
No.109 2006-07-04
bench (Tilting) [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Tilting bench Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Tilting bench" means a technical device, an arrangement of tilting platform, ditch and concrete ground surface, used in the rollover testing of a complete vehicle or body sections
No.066 2007-12-06
bench (Tilting) [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Tilting bench Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tilting bench" means a technical device, an arrangement of tilting platform, ditch and concrete ground surface, used in the rollover testing of a complete vehicle or body sections.
No.066 2011-03-30
Bench Cycle (Diesel, Standard) [No.083 2012-02-15A9] @ SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. Introduction
For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant.
The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SDBC) described in this Appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system.
During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.
No.083 2012-02-15
Bench Cycle (Diesel, Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] @ SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. INTRODUCTION For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant. The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the SDBC described in this appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system. During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.
No.083 2015-07-03
bench cycle (standard) [No.083 2012-02-15A9] @ SBC (standard bench cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST
[Appendix 1] Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)
1. INTRODUCTION
The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the standard bench cycle (SBC) described in this Appendix. The SBC requires the use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.
No.083 2012-02-15
Bench Cycle (Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] @ SBC (Standard Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 1] Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)
1. INTRODUCTION The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the Standard Bench Cycle (SBC) described in this appendix. The SBC requires the use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.
2. CATALYST TEMPERATURE CONTROL
No.083 2015-07-03
Bench seat [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Bench seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;
No.014 2015-08-19
Bench seat [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Bench seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. Bench seat
A structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.
No.016 2015-11-20
Bench seat [No.108 2015-04-21] @ Bench seat burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.8. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.
No.108 2015-04-21
bench seat (Vehicle) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Vehicle bench seat Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Vehicle seat" means a structure, which may or may not be integral with the vehicle structure, complete with trim and intended to seat one adult person. In this respect:
"Group of vehicle seats" means either a bench seat or a plurality of seats which are separate but side by side (i.e. so fixed that the front anchorages of one seat are in line with the front or rear anchorages of another seat or on a line passing between those anchorages), each seat accommodating one or more seated adult persons.
"Vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person.
"Vehicle front seats" means the group of seats situated foremost in the passenger compartment, i.e. having no other seat directly in front of them.
"Vehicle rear seats" are fixed, forward-facing seats situated behind another group of vehicle seats.
No.129 2014-03-29
bench seat (vehicle) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ vehicle bench seat Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20.2. "vehicle bench seat" means a structure complete with trim and intended to seat more than one adult person;
No.044 2011-09-09
Bench seat [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Bench seat Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;
No.014 2007-12-06
bench seat [No.014 2011-04-28] @ bench seat safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;
No.014 2011-04-28
Bench seat [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Bench seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. Bench seat : A structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.
No.016 2007-11-30
Bench seat [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Bench seat Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. Bench seat
A structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.
No.016 2011-09-09
Bench seat [No.017 2006-12-27] @ Bench seat Seat strength [2. DEFINITIONS]
2.4. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;
No.017 2006-12-27
Bench seat [No.017 2010-08-31] @ Bench seat seats, their anchorages and any head restraints 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person;
No.017 2010-08-31
Bench seat [No.118 2010-07-10] @ Bench seat Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.6. "Bench seat" means a structure complete with trim, intended to seat more than one adult person.
No.118 2010-07-10
Bend lighting [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Bend lighting Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.26. "Bend lighting" means a lighting function to provide enhanced illumination in bends. No.048 2008-05-23
Bend lighting [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Bend lighting Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Bend lighting" means a lighting function to provide enhanced illumination in bends
No.053 2013-06-18
Bend lighting [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Bend lighting Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Bend lighting" means a lighting function to provide enhanced illumination in bends;
No.048 2011-12-06
Bending mode [No.123 2006-12-27] @ Bending mode Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
No.123 2006-12-27
Bending mode [No.123 2010-08-24] @ Bending mode Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Mode" of a front-lighting function provided by a system means a beam within the provisions (see paragraphs 6.2 and 6.3 of this Regulation) either for one of the passing beam classes or for the main beam, designed and specified by the manufacturer for adaptation to dedicated vehicle and ambient conditions;
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
No.123 2010-08-24
BES [No.049 2013-06-24] @ BES (Base Emission Strategy) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Base Emission Strategy" (BES) means an emission strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AES is activated;
No.049 2013-06-24
BF [No.013 2016-02-18] š BF (brake factor) Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. The "brake factor (BF)" is the input to output amplification ratio of the brake.
No.013 2016-02-18
BF [No.013 2010-11-13] @ brake factor (BF) Braking (categories M, N and O) Add new paragraphs 2.34 to 2.36, to read:
2.36. The "brake factor (BF )" is the input to output amplification ratio of the brake.f
No.013 2010-11-13
bi fuel (vehicle is considered) [No.115 2014-11-07] @ A vehicle is considered bi-fuel LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.
No.115 2014-11-07
Bi fuel gas vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Bi-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23.1. "Bi-fuel gas vehicle" means a bi-fuel vehicle that can run on petrol and also on either LPG, NG/biomethane or hydrogen;
No.083 2012-02-15
Bi fuel gas vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Bi-fuel gas vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23.1. "Bi-fuel gas vehicle" means a bi-fuel vehicle that can run on petrol (petrol mode) and also on either LPG, NG/ biomethane, or hydrogen (gas mode).
No.083 2015-07-03
bi fuel gas vehicle [REG. No 692/2008] @ bi fuel gas vehicle emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles
12. "bi fuel gas vehicle" means a bi fuel vehicle that can run on petrol and also on either LPG, NG/biomethane or hydrogen; REG. No 692/2008
Bi fuel vehicle [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Bi-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Bi-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that can run part-time on two different fuels and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time;
No.083 2012-02-15
Bi fuel vehicle [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Bi-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Bi-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount and duration.
No.083 2015-07-03
bi fuel vehicle [REG. No 692/2008] @ bi fuel vehicle emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles
11. "bi fuel vehicle" means a vehicle with two separate fuel storage systems that can run part-time on two different fuels and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time; REG. No 692/2008
Bias belted [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Bias belted Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyrefs carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90‹ to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90‹ to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.
No.075 2011-03-30
Bias belted [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Bias belted @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.
No.108 2006-07-04
Bias belted [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Bias belted Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a
belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.
No.109 2006-07-04
bias ply [No.075 2011-03-30] @ "Diagonal" or "bias ply" Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure of a pneumatic tyre" means the technical characteristics of the tyrefs carcass. The following structures of a pneumatic tyre are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90‹ to the centre line of the tread ( 1 ).
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90‹ to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt ( 1 ).
2.2.4. "Reinforced" describes a pneumatic tyre structure in which the carcass is more resistant than that of the corresponding normal tyre.
No.075 2011-03-30
bias ply [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ bias ply @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.
No.108 2006-07-04
bias ply [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ "Diagonal" or "bias ply" Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Structure" of a pneumatic-tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre's carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.2.1. "Diagonal" or "bias ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90o to the centreline of the tread.
2.2.2. "Bias belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is stabilised by a
belt, comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass.
2.2.3. "Radial" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid substantially at 90o to the centreline of the tread, the carcass being stabilised by an essentially inextensible circumferential belt.
No.109 2006-07-04
Bias-belted [No.030 2008-07-30] @ Bias-belted Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.2. "Bias-belted" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass; No.030 2008-07-30
Bias-belted [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Bias-belted Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Structure" of a tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.3.2. "Bias-belted" describes a tyre structure of diagonal (bias-ply) type in which the carcass is restricted by a belt comprising two or more layers of substantially inextensible cord material laid at alternate angles close to those of the carcass;
No.106 2010-09-30
bias-ply [No.030 2008-07-30] @ bias-ply Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles of substantially less than 90 ‹ to the centre line of the tread; No.030 2008-07-30
Bias-ply [No.054 2008-07-11] @ Bias-ply Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a pneumatic-tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the beads and are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 ‹ to the centreline of the tread; No.054 2008-07-11
bias-ply [No.106 2010-09-30] @ "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Structure" of a tyre means the technical characteristics of the tyre carcass. The following structures are distinguished in particular:
2.3.1. "Diagonal" or "bias-ply" describes a tyre structure in which the ply cords extend to the bead and are laid at alternate angles of substantially less than 90‹ to the centreline of the tread;
No.106 2010-09-30
Bi-fuel vehicle [No.083 2008-05-06] @ Bi-fuel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.23. "Bi-fuel vehicle" means a vehicle that can run part-time on petrol and also part-time on either LPG or NG. No.083 2008-05-06
bight (Seat) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Seat bight Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.50. "Seat bight" means the area close to the intersection of the surfaces of the vehicle seat cushion and the seat-back.
No.129 2014-03-29
bight (Seat) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Seat bight Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Seat bight" means the area close to the intersection of the surfaces of the vehicle seat cushion and the seat back.
No.044 2007-11-23
bight (Seat) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Seat bight Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Seat bight" means the area close to the intersection of the surfaces of the vehicle seat cushion and the seat back.
No.044 2011-09-09
binocular vision (Am) [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Ambinocular vision devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.2."Ambinocular vision" means the total field of vision obtained by the superimposition of the mon ocular fields of the right eye and the left eye (see Figure 3 below).
Figure 3
No.046 2014-08-08
biodiesel vehicle (fuel, Flex) [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel;
No.083 2012-02-15
biodiesel vehicle (fuel, Flex) [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25.2. "Flex fuel biodiesel vehicle" means a flex fuel vehicle that can run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and biodiesel.
No.083 2015-07-03
Biofuel [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Biofuel Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18.1. "Biofuel" means liquid or gaseous fuel for transport, produced from biomass;
No.083 2012-02-15
Biofuel [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Biofuel Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Biofuel" means liquid or gaseous fuel for transport, produced from biomass.
No.083 2015-07-03
Boarding device [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Boarding device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Boarding device" means a device to facilitate wheelchair access to vehicles, such as lifts, ramps, etc.
No.107 2015-06-18
Boarding device [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Boarding device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Boarding device" means a device to facilitate wheelchair access to vehicles, such as lifts, ramps, etc.
No.107 2006-12-27
Boarding device [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Boarding device Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Boarding device" means a device to facilitate wheelchair access to vehicles, such as lifts, ramps, etc.
No.107 2010-09-29
Body member [No.011 2010-05-13] @ Body member door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Body member" is that portion of the hinge normally affixed to the body structure.
No.011 2010-05-13
body section (Artificial) [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Artificial body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Artificial body section" means a body section built up from two or more bays but not in the same position, nor at the same distance from each other as in the actual vehicle. The connecting elements between these bays need not be identical with the real body work structure but shall be structurally equivalent.
No.066 2007-12-06
body section (Artificial) [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Artificial body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Artificial body section" means a body section built up from two or more bays but not in the same position, nor at the same distance from each other as in the actual vehicle. The connecting elements between these bays need not be identical with the real body work structure but shall be structurally equivalent.
No.066 2011-03-30
body section (Original) [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Original body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Original body section" means a body section composed of two or more bays of exactly the same form and relative position, as they appear in the actual vehicle. All connecting elements between the bays are also arranged exactly as they appear in the actual vehicle.
No.066 2007-12-06
body section (Original) [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Original body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Original body section" means a body section composed of two or more bays of exactly the same form and relative position, as they appear in the actual vehicle. All connecting elements between the bays are also arranged exactly as they appear in the actual vehicle.
No.066 2011-03-30
Body section [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Body section" means a structural unit, which represents one part of the superstructure for the purposes of an approval test. A body section contains at least two bays connected by representative connecting elements (side, roof, and underfloor, structures).
No.066 2007-12-06
Body section [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Body section Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Body section" means a structural unit, which represents one part of the superstructure for the purposes of an approval test. A body section contains at least two bays connected by representative connecting elements (side, roof, and underfloor, structures).
No.066 2011-03-30
Body work [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Body work Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Body work" means the complete structure of the vehicle in running order, including all the structural elements which form the passenger compartment, driverfs compartment, baggage compartment and spaces for the mechanical units and components.
No.066 2007-12-06
Body work [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Body work Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Body work" means the complete structure of the vehicle in running order, including all the structural elements which form the passenger compartment(s), driverfs compartment, baggage compartment and spaces for the mechanical units and components.
No.066 2011-03-30
Bodywork [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Bodywork Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.5. "Bodywork" means a separate technical unit comprising all the special internal and external equipment of the vehicle.
No.107 2015-06-18
bodywork (L category vehicle with, Mirror intended for) [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(f) Class VII: Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork, giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.7 of this Regulation.
No.046 2014-08-08
Bodywork [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Bodywork Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.5. "Bodywork" means a separate technical unit comprising all the special internal and external equipment of the vehicle.
No.107 2006-12-27
Bodywork [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Bodywork Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.5. "Bodywork" means a separate technical unit comprising all the special internal and external equipment of the vehicle.
No.107 2010-09-29
Bodywork type [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Bodywork type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical unit means a category of bodywork which does not essentially differ in the following aspects:
(a) Bodywork manufacturer;
(b) Vehicle concept („ 22 passengers or … 22 passengers);
(c) Bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor);
(d) Mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent;
(e) Specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.
No.107 2015-06-18
Bodywork type [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Bodywork type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles, which do not differ in the following essential aspects:
a) bodywork manufacturer,
b) chassis manufacturer;
c) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or < 22 passengers);
d) bodywork concept (single / double deck, articulated, low-floor).
e) bodywork type if the bodywork has been approved as a separate technical unit;
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical
unit means a category of bodywork which do not essentially differ in the following aspects:
a) bodywork manufacturer,
b) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or < 22 passengers);
c) bodywork concept (single/ double deck, articulated, low-floor).
d) mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent.
e) specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.
No.107 2006-12-27
Bodywork type [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Bodywork type Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Definition of type(s)"
2.2.1. "Vehicle type" means vehicles, which do not differ in the following essential aspects:
(a) bodywork manufacturer,
(b) chassis manufacturer;
(c) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or ≤ 22 passengers);
(d) bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor).
(e) bodywork type if the bodywork has been approved as a separate technical unit;
2.2.2. "Bodywork type" for the purposes of type-approval as a separate technical unit means a category of bodywork which does not essentially differ in the following aspects:
(a) bodywork manufacturer,
(b) vehicle concept (> 22 passengers or ≤ 22 passengers);
(c) bodywork concept (single/double-deck, articulated, low-floor).
(d) mass of the completely equipped vehicle bodywork, differing by 10 per cent.
(e) specified types of vehicle on which the type of the bodywork can be installed.
No.107 2010-09-29
bogie [No.111 2002-02-01A4] @ bogie Roll-over stability of tank vehicles (N and O) [ANNEX 4] Lateral stability calculation
2. DEFINITIONS
"bogie" means an axle group with compensatory load distribution, in which zero load is attained on all wheels on a given side simultaneously.
No.111 2002-02-01
Boil off [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Boil-off using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.44. "Boil-off" means gas created by evaporation of LNG due to ambient heat input.
No.110 2015-06-30
bolt (Fork-) [No.011 2010-05-13] @ Fork-bolt door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Fork-bolt" is the part of the latch that engages and retains the striker when in a latched position.
No.011 2010-05-13
bolt opening direction (Fork-) [No.011 2010-05-13] @ Fork-bolt opening direction door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Fork-bolt opening direction" is the direction opposite to that in which the striker enters the latch to engage the fork-bolt.
No.011 2010-05-13
booster cushion (child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ booster cushion (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.
No.044 2007-11-23
Boss [No.012 2008-06-26] @ Boss Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.10. "Boss" means that part of the steering control, usually at the centre, that:
2.10.1. joins the steering control to the steering shaft,
2.10.2. transmits the torque from the steering control to the steering shaft;€
No.012 2008-06-26
Boss [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Boss protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Boss" means that part of the steering control, usually at the centre, that:
2.10.1. Joins the steering control to the steering shaft,
2.10.2. Transmits the torque from the steering control to the steering shaft;
No.012 2013-03-27
boss (steering control, Centre of the) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Centre of the steering control boss protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Centre of the steering control boss" means that point on the surface of the boss which is in line with the axis of the steering shaft;
No.012 2013-03-27
Brake [No.013 2016-02-18] š Brake Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Brake" means the part in which the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle develop. It may be a friction brake (when the forces are generated by friction between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); an electrical brake (when the forces are generated by electro-magnetic action between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to but not in contact with one another); a fluid brake (when the forces are generated by the action of a fluid situated between two parts of the vehicle moving in relation to one another); or an engine brake (when the forces are derived from an artificial increase in the braking action, transmitted to the wheels, of the engine);
No.013 2016-02-18
Brake [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Brake Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Brake" means the part in which the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle develop. It may be a friction brake (when the forces are generated by friction between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); an electrical brake (when the forces are generated by electro-magnetic action between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to but not in contact with one another); a fluid brake (when the forces are generated by the action of a fluid situated between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); or an engine brake (when the forces are derived from an artificial increase in the braking action, transmitted to the wheels, of the engine).
No.013H 2015-12-22
Brake [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Brake Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Brake" means those parts of the brake system where the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle are developed.
No.078 2015-01-30
brake (Combined) [No.060 2014-10-15] @ Combined brake Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Combined brake" means a system of operation (by hydraulic action or mechanical linkage, or both) whereby both the front and the rear brakes of the vehicle are brought into operation at least partially by the use of only one control.
No.060 2014-10-15
brake (Friction) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Friction brake Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.2. "Friction brake" means the part of a braking system in which the forces opposing the movement of a vehicle are developed by friction between a brake lining and a wheel disc or drum moving relatively to each other.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake (Friction) [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Friction brake Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Friction brake" means the part of a braking system in which the forces opposing the movement of a vehicle are developed by friction between a brake lining and a wheel disc or drum moving relatively to each other;
No.090 2010-05-28
brake (service, Combined) [No.060 2004-03-31] @ Combined service brake Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Combined service brake" means a system of operation (by hydraulic action or mechanical linkage, or both) whereby both the front and the rear brakes of the vehicle are brought into operation at least partially by the use of only one control;
No.060 2004-03-31
brake (Wet) [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Wet brake Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Wet brake" means a brake or brakes which has or have been treated in accordance with paragraph 1.6 of annex 3 of this Regulation.
No.078 2004-03-31
Brake [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Brake Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Brake" means the part in which the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle develop. It may be a friction brake (when the forces are generated by friction between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); an electrical brake (when the forces are generated by electro-magnetic action between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to but not in contact with one another); a fluid brake (when the forces are generated by the action of a fluid situated between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); or an engine brake (when the forces are derived from an artificial increase in the braking action, transmitted to the wheels, of the engine);
No.013 2010-09-30
brake [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ brake Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Brake" means the part in which the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle develop. It may be a friction brake (when the forces are generated by friction between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); an electrical brake (when the forces are generated by electro-magnetic action between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to but not in contact with one another); a fluid brake (when the forces are generated by the action of a fluid situated between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another); or an engine brake (when the forces are derived from an artificial increase in the braking action, transmitted to the wheels, of the engine).
No.013H 2010-08-31
Brake [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Brake Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Brake" means the parts of the braking device in which the forces opposing the movement of the vehicle are developed; it may be a friction brake (when the forces are generated by friction between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another), an electrical brake (when the forces are generated by electro-magnetic action between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to but not in contact with one another), a fluid brake (when the forces are generated by the action of a fluid situated between two parts of the vehicle moving relatively to one another), or an engine brake (when the forces are derived from an artificial increase in the braking action, transmitted to the wheels of the engine);
No.078 2004-03-31
Brake Assist System [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ BAS (Brake Assist System) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driverfs brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) Assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate; or
(b) Is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based primarily ( 3 ) on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;
No.013H 2015-12-22
brake assist system [REG. No 078/2009] @ brake assist system protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,
2. "brake assist system" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driver's brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate; or
(b) is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System;
REG. No 078/2009
Brake Assist System [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Brake Assist System (BAS) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Brake Assist System (BAS)" means a function of the braking system that deduces an emergency braking event from a characteristic of the driverfs brake demand and, under such conditions:
(a) assists the driver to deliver the maximum achievable braking rate, or
(b) is sufficient to cause full cycling of the Anti-lock Braking System.
2.34.1. "Category A Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal force applied by the driver;
2.34.2. "Category B Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on the brake pedal speed applied by the driver;
2.34.3. "Category C Brake Assist System" means a system which detects an emergency braking condition based on multiple criteria, one of which must be the rate at which the brake pedal is applied.
No.013H 2010-08-31
brake disc (Equivalent) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Equivalent brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc (Identical) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Identical brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc (Interchangeable) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Interchangeable brake disc Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc and drum (replacement, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Original replacement brake discs and brake drums Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc/drum (Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Original brake disc/brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.1. "Original brake disc/brake drum"
2.3.1.1. In the case of motor vehicles, is a brake disc/drum covered by the vehicle braking system type- approval according to Regulation No 13 or 13-H.
2.3.1.2. In the case of trailers:
(a) is a brake disc/drum covered by the vehicle braking system type-approval according to Regulation No 13;
(b) is a brake disc/drum which is part of a brake for which the axle manufacturer owns a test report according to Annex 11 of Regulation No 13.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc/drum (Special) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Special brake disc/drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.4. "Special brake disc/drum" means a replacement brake disc/drum not covered by paragraphs 2.3.1 to 2.3.3.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake disc/drum (Type of) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Type of brake disc/drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.6. "Type of brake disc/drum": brake discs or drums having the same basic design and material group in accordance with the classification criteria pursuant to paragraph 5.3.5.1 or 5.3.5.2 as appropriate.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake drum (Equivalent) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Equivalent brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake drum (Identical) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Identical brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake drum (Interchangeable) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Interchangeable brake drum Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.3. Replacement parts
2.3.3.1. "Original replacement brake discs and brake drums": original brake discs/brake drums intended for servicing the vehicle and carrying an identification code as defined in paragraph 2.3.2 affixed in such a way as to be indelible and clearly legible.
2.3.3.2. "Identical brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake disc.
2.3.3.3. "Identical brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is chemically and physically identical in every respect with the exception of the vehicle manufacturer mark, which is absent, to the original brake drum.
2.3.3.4. "Equivalent brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which is identical to the original brake disc in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake disc as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.
2.3.3.5. "Equivalent brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which is identical to the original brake drum in respect to all dimensions, geometric features and basic design and is also from the same material sub-group as the original brake drum as defined in paragraph 5.3.3.2.EN 13.7.2012 Official Journal of the European Union L 185/27
2.3.3.6. "Interchangeable brake disc" is a replacement brake disc which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake disc but may differ from the original brake disc in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
2.3.3.7. "Interchangeable brake drum" is a replacement brake drum which has the same interface dimensions as the original brake drum but may differ from the original brake drum in terms of its design, material composition and mechanical properties.
No.090 2012-07-13
Brake electric electronic interface [No.013 2016-02-18] š Brake electric/electronic interface Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Brake electric/electronic interface" means the part of a separable electrical/electronic connection between the towing vehicle and the towed vehicle which is dedicated to the braking system.
No.013 2016-02-18
brake factor [No.013 2016-02-18] š BF (brake factor) Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. The "brake factor (BF)" is the input to output amplification ratio of the brake.
No.013 2016-02-18
brake factor [No.013 2010-11-13] @ brake factor (BF) Braking (categories M, N and O) Add new paragraphs 2.34 to 2.36, to read:
2.36. The "brake factor (BF )" is the input to output amplification ratio of the brake.f
No.013 2010-11-13
brake force coefficient (Peak) [No.117 2011-11-23] @ "pbfc" (Peak brake force coefficient) Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.5. "Peak brake force coefficient ("pbfc")" means the maximum value of the ratio of braking force to vertical load on the tyre prior to wheel lock-up.
No.117 2011-11-23
Brake lining [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining (Drum) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining (drum, Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Original drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.10. "Original drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type-approval documentation.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining (drum, Original) [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Original drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Original drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type approval documentation.
No.090 2010-05-28
brake lining (drum, Replacement) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Replacement drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.11. "Replacement drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement when fitted to a shoe for an original drum brake lining.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining (drum, Replacement) [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Replacement drum brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Replacement drum brake lining" means a drum brake lining of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement when fitted to a shoe for an original drum brake lining.
No.090 2010-05-28
brake lining (Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Original brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.7. "Original brake lining" means a brake lining type referenced in the vehicle type-approval documentation, Regulation No 13, Annex 2, paragraph 8.1.1, Regulation No 13-H, Annex 1, paragraph 7.1 or Regulation No 78, Annex 1, paragraph 5.4.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining (Original) [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Original brake lining Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Original brake lining" means a brake lining type referenced in the vehicle type approval documentation, Regulation No 13, Annex 2, paragraph 8.1 ( 2 ) or Regulation No 78, Annex 1, paragraph 5.4;
No.090 2010-05-28
Brake lining assembly [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force.
2.2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake.
2.2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake.
2.2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining.
2.2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate.
2.2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining assembly (Original) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Original brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.8. "Original brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type-approval documentation.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining assembly (Original) [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Original brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Original brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly conforming to the data attached to a vehicle type approval documentation;
No.090 2010-05-28
brake lining assembly (Parking) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Parking brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.12. "Parking brake lining assembly" means a pad assembly or shoe assembly belonging to a parking brake system separate and independent from the service brake system.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining assembly (Parking) [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Parking brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Parking brake lining assembly" means a pad assembly or shoe assembly belonging to a parking brake system separate and independent from the service brake system
No.090 2010-05-28
brake lining assembly (Replacement) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Replacement brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.9. "Replacement brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement for an original brake lining assembly.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining assembly (Replacement) [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Replacement brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Replacement brake lining assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a type approved under this Regulation as a suitable service replacement for an original brake lining assembly;
No.090 2010-05-28
Brake lining assembly [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Brake lining assembly Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Brake lining assembly" means a component of a friction brake which is pressed against a drum or disc, respectively, to produce the friction force;
2.3.1. "Shoe assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a drum brake;
2.3.1.1. "Shoe" means a component of a shoe assembly which carries the brake lining;
2.3.2. "Pad assembly" means a brake lining assembly of a disc brake;
2.3.2.1. "Backplate" means a component of a pad assembly which carries the brake lining;
2.3.3. "Brake lining" means the friction material component with the shape and final dimension to be fixed on to the shoe or backplate;
2.3.4. "Drum brake lining" means a brake lining for a drum brake.
2.3.5. "Friction material" means the product of a specified mixture of materials and processes which together determine the characteristics of a brake lining;
No.090 2010-05-28
Brake lining assembly type [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Brake lining assembly type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.5. "Brake lining assembly type" means wheel sets of brake lining assemblies which do not differ in brake lining type, dimension or functional characteristics.
No.090 2012-07-13
Brake lining assembly type [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Brake lining assembly type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Brake lining assembly type" means wheel sets of brake lining assemblies which do not differ in brake lining type, dimension or functional characteristics;
No.090 2010-05-28
Brake lining type [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.4. "Brake lining type" means a category of brake linings which do not differ in friction material characteristics.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining type (Drum) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Drum brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.6. "Drum brake lining type" means wheel sets of brake lining components which after fitment to the shoes do not differ in brake lining type, dimensions or functional characteristics.
No.090 2012-07-13
brake lining type (Drum) [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Drum brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Drum brake lining type" means wheel sets of brake lining components which after fitment to the shoes do not differ in brake lining type, dimensions or functional characteristics.
No.090 2010-05-28
Brake lining type [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Brake lining type Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Brake lining type" means a category of brake linings which do not differ in friction material characteristics;
No.090 2010-05-28
Brake system [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Brake system" means the combination of parts consisting of the control, transmission, and brake, but excluding the engine, whose function it is to progressively reduce the speed of a moving vehicle, bring it to a halt, and keep it stationary when halted.
No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Antilock) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ ABS (Antilock brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Antilock brake system (ABS)" means a system which senses wheel slip and automatically modulates the pressure producing the braking forces at the wheel(s) to limit the degree of wheel slip.
No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Combined) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ CBS (Combined brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Combined brake system (CBS)" means:
For vehicle categories L1 and L3:a service brake system where at least two brakes on different wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle categories L2 and L5:a service brake system where the brakes on all wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle category L4:a service brake system where the brakes on at least the front and rear wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control. (If the rear wheel and sidecar wheel are braked by the same brake system, this is regarded as the rear brake.)
No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Secondary) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Secondary brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Secondary brake system" means the second service brake system on a vehicle equipped with a combined brake system.
No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Service) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Service brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Service brake system" means a brake system which is used for slowing the vehicle when in motion.
No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Single) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Single brake system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Single brake system" means a brake system which acts on only one axle.
No.078 2015-01-30
brake system (Split service) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ SSBS (Split service brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Split service brake system (SSBS)" means a brake system that operates the brakes on all wheels, consisting of two or more subsystems actuated by a single control designed so that a single failure in any subsystem (such as a leakage type failure of a hydraulic subsystem) does not impair the operation of any other subsystem.
No.078 2015-01-30
brake temperature (Initial) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Initial brake temperature Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Initial brake temperature" means the temperature of the hottest brake before any brake application.
No.078 2015-01-30
braking (Automatic) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Automatic braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Automatic braking" means braking of the trailer or trailers occurring automatically in the event of separation of components of the combination of coupled vehicles, including such separation through the breakage of a coupling, the effectiveness of the braking of the remainder of the combination not being thereby destroyed;
No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Automatic) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Automatic braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Automatic braking" means braking of the trailer or trailers occurring automatically in the event of separation of components of the combination of coupled vehicles, including such separation through the breakage of a coupling, the effectiveness of the braking of the remainder of the combination not being thereby destroyed;
No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Automatically commanded) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Automatically commanded braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Automatically commanded) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Automatically commanded braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013 2010-09-30
braking (commanded, Automatically) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking (commanded, Automatically) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013H 2010-08-31
braking (Continuous) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.9.1. A single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.9.2. The energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by the same source (which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.9.3. The braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;
No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Continuous) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.9.1. a single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.9.2. the energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by the same source (which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.9.3. the braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;
No.013 2010-09-30
braking (continuous, Semi) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Semi-continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Semi-continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.10.1. A single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.10.2. The energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by two different sources (one of which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.10.3. The braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;
No.013 2016-02-18
braking (continuous, Semi-) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Semi-continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Semi-continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.10.1. a single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.10.2. the energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by two different sources (one of which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.10.3. the braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;
No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Inertia or overrun) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Inertia (or overrun) braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inertia (or overrun) braking" means braking by utilising the forces generated by the trailer's moving up on the towing vehicle;
No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Inertia or overrun) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Inertia (or overrun) braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Inertia (or overrun) braking" means braking by utilizing the forces generated by the trailer's moving up on the towing vehicle;
No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Phased) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Phased braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.
No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Phased) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Phased braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking (Phased) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Phased braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.
No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Phased) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Phased braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Phased braking" is a means which may be used where two or more sources of braking are operated from a common control, whereby one source may be given priority by phasing back the other source(s) so as to make increased control movement necessary before they begin to be brought into operation.
No.013H 2010-08-31
braking (Progressive and graduated) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Progressive and graduated braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the equipment, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.4.1 above);
2.13.1. The driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.13.2. The braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function); and
2.13.3. The braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;
No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Progressive and graduated) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Progressive and graduated braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.16 below):
2.9.1. The driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.9.2. The braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function);
2.9.3. The braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking (Progressive and graduated) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Progressive and graduated braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the equipment, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.4.1 above);
2.13.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.13.2. the braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function); and
2.13.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;
No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Progressive and graduated) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Progressive and graduated braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and during actuation of the brakes (see paragraph 2.16 below):
2.9.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control;
2.9.2. the braking force varies proportionally as the action on the control (monotonic function);
2.9.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision.
No.013H 2010-08-31
braking (Progressive and graduated) [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Progressive and graduated braking Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Progressive and graduated braking" means braking during which, within the normal operating range of the device, and whether during application or during release of the brakes,
2.10.1. the driver can at any moment increase or decrease the braking force by acting on the control,
2.10.2. the braking force varies proportionally to the action on the control (monotonic function), and,
2.10.3. the braking force can be easily regulated with sufficient precision;
No.078 2004-03-31
braking (regenerative, Electric) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Electric regenerative braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013 2016-02-18
braking (regenerative, Electric) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking (regenerative, Electric) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Electric regenerative braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013 2010-09-30
braking (regenerative, Electric) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013H 2010-08-31
braking (Selective) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Selective braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.
No.013 2016-02-18
braking (Selective) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Selective braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking (Selective) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Selective braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.
No.013 2010-09-30
braking (Selective) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Selective braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Selective braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of individual brakes is made by automatic means in which vehicle retardation is secondary to vehicle behaviour modification.
No.013H 2010-08-31
braking coefficient (Peak) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ PBC (Peak braking coefficient) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking coefficient (Peak) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ PBC (Peak braking coefficient) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)" means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.
No.078 2015-01-30
braking coefficient (Peak) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Peak braking coefficient (PBC) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.
No.013H 2010-08-31
braking device (Component(s) of the) [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Component(s) of the braking device Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component(s) of the braking device" means one or more of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking device;
No.078 2004-03-31
Braking device [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Braking device Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Braking device" means the combination of parts whose function is progressively to reduce the speed of a moving vehicle or to bring it to a halt, or to keep it stationary if it is already halted; these functions are specified in paragraph 5.1.2 below. The device consists of the control, the transmission, and the brake proper;
No.078 2004-03-31
braking devices (type of, Different) [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Different types of braking devices Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking devices" means devices which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics,
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size,
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components;
No.078 2004-03-31
Braking equipment [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Braking equipment" means the combination of parts whose function is progressively to reduce the speed of a moving vehicle or bring it to a halt, or to keep it stationary if it is already halted; these functions are specified in paragraph 5.1.2 below. The equipment consists of the control, the transmission, and the brake proper.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking equipment (Component of the) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Component of the braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of the braking equipment" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking equipment.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking equipment (Component of the) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Component of the braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of the braking equipment" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking equipment.
No.013H 2010-08-31
braking equipment (type of, Different) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Different types of braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking equipment" means equipment which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. Components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. A different assembly of the components.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking equipment (type of, different) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ different types of braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking equipment" means equipment which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Braking equipment [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Braking equipment" means the combination of parts whose function is progressively to reduce the speed of a moving vehicle or bring it to a halt, or to keep it stationary if it is already halted; these functions are specified in paragraph 5.1.2 below. The equipment consists of the control, the transmission, and the brake proper.
No.013H 2010-08-31
braking equipment with stored energy (Hydraulic) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy" means a braking equipment where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulator(s) fed from one or more pressure pump(s), each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking equipment with stored energy (Hydraulic) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Hydraulic braking equipment with stored energy" means a braking equipment where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulator(s) fed from one or more pressure pump(s), each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer.
No.013H 2010-08-31
braking force (Reference) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Reference braking forces Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Reference braking forces" means the braking forces of one axle generated at the circumference of the tyre on a roller brake tester, relative to brake actuator pressure and declared at the time of type approval.
No.013 2016-02-18
braking forces (Reference) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Reference braking forces Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Reference braking forces" means the braking forces of one axle generated at the circumference of the tyre on a roller brake tester, relative to brake actuator pressure and declared at the time of type approval.
No.013 2010-09-30
braking phase (Emergency) [No.131 2014-07-19] @ Emergency braking phase Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Emergency braking phase" means the phase starting when the AEBS emits a braking demand for at least 4 m/s2 deceleration to the service braking system of the vehicle.
No.131 2014-07-19
Braking signal [No.013 2016-02-18] š Braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph. 5.2.1.30.
No.013 2016-02-18
Braking signal [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph 5.2.22 of this Regulation.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking signal (Emergency) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Emergency braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.31.
No.013 2016-02-18
braking signal (Emergency) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Emergency braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.23 of this Regulation.
No.013H 2015-12-22
braking signal (Emergency) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Emergency braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.31.
No.013 2010-09-30
braking signal (Emergency) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Emergency braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Emergency braking signal": logic signal indicating emergency braking as specified in paragraph 5.2.23.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Braking signal [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Braking signal Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph 5.2.1.30.
No.013 2010-09-30
Braking signal [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Braking signal Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Braking signal": logic signal indicating brake activation as specified in paragraph 5.2.22.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Braking system [No.013 2016-02-18] š Braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Braking system" means the combination of parts whose function is progressively to reduce the speed of a moving vehicle or bring it to a halt, or to keep it stationary if it is already halted; these functions are specified in paragraph 5.1.2. The system consists of the control, the transmission, and the brake proper;
No.013 2016-02-18
Braking system [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Braking system Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake lining assembly type, a replacement drum brake lining type or a replacement drum brake lining.
2.2.1. "Braking system" has the meaning assigned in Regulation No 13, paragraph 2.3, or Regulation No 13-H, paragraph 2.3, or Regulation No 78, paragraph 2.5.
No.090 2012-07-13
braking system (Combined) [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Combined braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Combined braking system" means
2.9.1. in the case of vehicles of categories L1 and L3, a system whereby at least two brakes on different wheels are actuated in combination by the operation of a single control. This method of actuation requires a control which is independent of the second braking device which operates on one wheel only;
2.9.2. in the case of vehicles of categories L2 and L5, a braking device which operates on all the wheels;
2.9.3. in the case of vehicles of category L4, a braking device which operates at least on the front and rear wheel. Therefore a braking device which operates simultaneously on the rear wheel and on the sidecar wheel is regarded as a rear brake.
No.078 2004-03-31
braking system (Component of a) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Component of a braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of a braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system;
No.013 2016-02-18
braking system (Component of a) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Component of a braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of a braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system;
No.013 2010-09-30
braking system (Component of the) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Components of the braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Components of the braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system.
No.078 2015-01-30
braking system (Different type of) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Different types of braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking systems" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. a component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. a different assembly of the components;
No.013 2010-09-30
Braking System (Emergency, Advanced) [No.131 2014-07-19] @ AEBS (Advanced Emergency Braking System) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Advanced Emergency Braking System (AEBS)" means a system which can automatically detect a potential forward collision and activate the vehicle braking system to decelerate the vehicle with the purpose of avoiding or mitigating a collision.
No.131 2014-07-19
braking system (Endurance) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device.
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems;
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device;
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.
No.013 2016-02-18
braking system (Endurance) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device,
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems,
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device,
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.
No.013 2010-09-30
braking system (Power assisted) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Power-assisted braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Power-assisted braking system" means a brake system in which the energy necessary to produce the braking force is supplied by the physical effort of the rider assisted by one or more energy supplying devices, for example vacuum assisted (with vacuum booster).
No.078 2015-01-30
braking system (Spring) [No.013 2010-09-30A08] @ Spring braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 8] Provisions relating to specific conditions for spring braking systems
1. DEFINITION
1.1. "Spring braking systems" are braking systems in which the energy required for braking is supplied by one or more springs acting as an energy storage device (energy accumulator).
1.1.1. The energy necessary to compress the spring in order to release the brake is supplied and controlled by the "control" actuated by the driver (see definition in paragraph 2.4 of this Regulation).
No.013 2010-09-30
braking system (type of, Different) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Different types of braking systems Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Different types of braking systems" means systems which differ in such essential respects as:
2.7.1. Components having different characteristics;
2.7.2. A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size;
2.7.3. A different assembly of the components;
No.013 2016-02-18
braking system (type of, Different) [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Different types of braking systems Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Different types of braking systems" means devices which differ in such essential respects as: (a) Components having different characteristics; (b) A component made of materials having different characteristics, or a component differing in shape or size; (c) A different assembly of the components.
No.078 2015-01-30
Braking system [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Braking system" means the combination of parts whose function is progressively to reduce the speed of a moving vehicle or bring it to a halt, or to keep it stationary if it is already halted; these functions are specified in paragraph 5.1.2. The system consists of the control, the transmission, and the brake proper;
No.013 2010-09-30
Braking system [No.090 2010-05-28] @ Braking system Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Braking system" has the meaning assigned in Regulation No 13, paragraph 2.3;
No.090 2010-05-28
braking system with stored energy (Hydraulic) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Hydraulic braking system with stored energy Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Hydraulic braking system with stored energy" means a braking system where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulators fed from one or more pressure pumps, each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer;
No.013 2016-02-18
braking system with stored energy (Hydraulic) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Hydraulic braking system with stored energy Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Hydraulic braking system with stored energy" means a braking system where energy is supplied by a hydraulic fluid under pressure, stored in one or more accumulators fed from one or more pressure pumps, each fitted with a means of limiting the pressure to a maximum value. This value shall be specified by the manufacturer;
No.013 2010-09-30
Brand name [No.117 2008-08-29] @ Brand name Tyre noise and wet grip 2.2. "Brand name" or "Trade description" means the identification of the tyre as given by the tyre manufacturer. The Brand name may be the same as that of the manufacturer and the Trade description may coincide with the trade mark. No.117 2008-08-29
Brand name [No.117 2011-11-23] @ "Brand name" or "Trade description" Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Brand name" or "Trade description" means the identification of the tyre as given by the tyre manufacturer. The Brand name may be the same as that of the manufacturer and the Trade description may coincide with the trade mark.
No.117 2011-11-23
breaker (Protective) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Protective breaker Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Protective breaker" applies to a radial ply tyre and means an optional intermediate ply between the tread and the belt to minimise damage to the belt.
No.109 2006-07-04
Breaker [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Breaker @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Breaker" applies to a diagonal ply tyre and means an intermediate ply between the carcass and tread.
No.108 2006-07-04
Breaker [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Breaker Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Breaker" applies to a diagonal ply tyre and means an intermediate ply between the carcass and tread.
No.109 2006-07-04
breathing loss (Tank) [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Tank breathing losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.1. "Tank breathing losses" are hydrocarbon emissions caused by temperature changes in the fuel tank (assuming a ratio of C 1 H 2,33 );
No.083 2012-02-15
breathing loss (Tank) [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Tank breathing losses Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7.1. "Tank breathing losses" are hydrocarbon emissions caused by temperature changes in the fuel tank (assuming a ratio of C1H2,33).
No.083 2015-07-03
Broadband emission [Directive 2009/064/EC] @ Broadband emission suppression of radio interference produced by agricultural or forestry tractors [ANNEX I] [2.DEFINITIONS]
2.1.7. "Broadband emission" means an emission which has a bandwidth greater than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver.ce ante
Directive 2009/064/EC
Broadband emission [No.010 2012-09-20] @ Broadband emission Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Broadband emission" means an emission, which has a bandwidth greater than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver (International Special Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) 25, second edition 2002 and Corrigendum 2004).
No.010 2012-09-20
Broadband emission [No.010 2010-05-08] @ Broadband emission Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Broadband emission" means an emission, which has a bandwidth greater than that of a particular measuring apparatus or receiver (International Special Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) 25, second edition).
No.010 2010-05-08
Buckle [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Buckle Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Buckle
A quick-release device enabling the wearer to be held by the belt. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device, except in the case of a harness belt buckle.
No.016 2015-11-20
Buckle [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Buckle Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device.
No.129 2014-03-29
Buckle [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Buckle Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Buckle : A quick-release device enabling the wearer to be held by the belt. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device, except in the case of a harness belt buckle.
No.016 2007-11-30
Buckle [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Buckle Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Buckle
A quick-release device enabling the wearer to be held by the belt. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device, except in the case of a harness belt buckle.
No.016 2011-09-09
Buckle [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Buckle Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.044 2007-11-23
Buckle [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Buckle Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.044 2011-09-09
buckle release button (enclosed / none-) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ enclosed / none- buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.044 2011-09-09
buckle release button (Enclosed) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.016 2015-11-20
buckle release button (Enclosed) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.129 2014-03-29
buckle release button (enclosed, Non) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.016 2015-11-20
buckle release button (enclosed, Non) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Non-enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.129 2014-03-29
Buckle steering equipment [No.079 2008-05-27] @ Buckle steering equipment Steering equipment 2.5.3.3.2. "Buckle steering equipment" in which the movement of chassis parts relative to each other is directly produced by the steering forces. No.079 2008-05-27
buckle-release button (Enclosed) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button : A buckle-release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.016 2007-11-30
buckle-release button (Enclosed) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.016 2011-09-09
buckle-release button (Non-enclosed) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button : A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.016 2007-11-30
buckle-release button (Non-enclosed) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.016 2011-09-09
Buffing [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Buffing @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Buffing" is the process of removing old material from the casing to prepare the surface for the new material.
No.108 2006-07-04
Buffing [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Buffing Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Buffing" is the process of removing old material from the casing to prepare the surface for the new material.
No.109 2006-07-04
Bullet proof glazing [No.043 2014-02-12] @ "Bullet resistant glazing" or "Bullet-proof glazing" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Bullet resistant glazing" or "Bullet-proof glazing", means glazing constructed so as to be resistant to firearms.
No.043 2014-02-12
Bullet resistant glazing [No.043 2014-02-12] @ "Bullet resistant glazing" or "Bullet-proof glazing" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Bullet resistant glazing" or "Bullet-proof glazing", means glazing constructed so as to be resistant to firearms.
No.043 2014-02-12
bumper [REG. No 078/2009] @ bumper protection of pedestrians and other
vulnerable road users,
3. "bumper" means any front, lower, outer structures of a vehicle, including attachments thereto, which are intended to give protection to a vehicle when involved in a low speed frontal collision with another vehicle; it does not include, however, any frontal protection system; REG. No 078/2009
Burning rate [No.108 2015-04-21] @ Burning rate burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.2. "Burning rate" means the quotient of the burnt distance measured according to Annex 6 and/or Annex 8 to this Regulation and the time taken to burn this distance. It is expressed in millimetres per minute.
No.108 2015-04-21
Burning rate [No.118 2010-07-10II] @ Burning rate Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.2. "Burning rate" means the quotient of the burnt distance measured according to Annex 6 and/orAnnex 8 to this Regulation and the time taken to burn this distance. It is expressed in millimetresper minute.
No.118 2010-07-10
burst disc [No.110 2011-05-07] @ burst disc using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.27. "Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered) (this device sometimes is referred to as "burst disc")" means a one-time use device triggered by excessive pressure which prevents a pre- determined upstream pressure being exceeded.
No.110 2011-05-07
bus (High voltage) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ High voltage bus Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on high voltage.
No.100 2011-02-14
bus (High voltage) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ High voltage bus Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the REESS that operates on high voltage. Where electrical circuits, that are galvanically connected to each other, are galvanically connected to the electrical chassis and the maximum voltage between any live part and the electrical chassis or any exposed conductive part is … 30 V AC and … 60 V DC, only the components or parts of the electric circuit that operate on high voltage are classified as a high voltage bus.
No.100 2015-03-31
bus (Low floor) [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Low floor bus Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.4. "Low floor bus" is a vehicle of class I, II or A in which at least 35 per cent of the area available for standing passengers (or in its forward section in the case of articulated vehicles, or in its lower deck in the case of double-decker vehicles) forms an area without steps and includes access to at least one service door.
No.107 2006-12-27
bus (Trolley) [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Trolleybus Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.8. "Trolleybus" means a vehicle, electrically driven by energy from external, overhead contact wires. For the purposes of this Regulation, it also includes such vehicles having an additional internal means of propulsion (dual mode vehicles) or having a means of temporary external guidance (guided trolleybuses).
No.107 2015-06-18
bus (Trolley-) [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Trolleybus Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.8. "Trolleybus" means a vehicle, electrically driven by energy from external, overhead contact wires. For the purposes of this Regulation, it also includes such vehicles having an additional internal means of propulsion (dual mode vehicles) or having a means of temporary external guidance (guided trolleybuses).
No.107 2010-09-29
Bus (Voltage, High) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ High Voltage Bus protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "High Voltage Bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on a high voltage;
No.012 2013-03-27
Bus (Voltage, High) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ High Voltage Bus Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "High Voltage Bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the RESS that operates on a high voltage,
No.094 2012-09-20
bus (voltage, High) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ High voltage bus Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "High voltage bus" means the electrical circuit, including the coupling system for charging the REESS that operates on a high voltage.
No.095 2015-07-10
button (release, buckle, Enclosed) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. Enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.016 2015-11-20
button (release, buckle, Enclosed) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.129 2014-03-29
button (release, buckle, enclosed, Non) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Non-enclosed buckle-release button Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. Non-enclosed buckle-release button
A buckle-release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.016 2015-11-20
button (release, buckle, enclosed, Non) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Non-enclosed buckle release button Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it shall be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.129 2014-03-29
button (release, enclosed buckle) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ enclosed buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.044 2007-11-23
button (release, non-enclosed buckle) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ non-enclosed buckle release button Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Buckle" means a quick release device which enables the child to be held by the restraint or the restraint by the structure of the car and can be quickly opened. The buckle may incorporate the adjusting device;
2.9.1. "enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must not be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm;
2.9.2. "non-enclosed buckle release button", a buckle release button such that it must be possible to release the buckle using a sphere having a diameter of 40 mm.
No.044 2007-11-23
Top@Sort MK —pŒê ‘Ώەª–ì ’è‹` Source
C (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ C : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force
No.055 2006-12-27
C Rate of n C [No.100 2015-03-31] @ C Rate of n C Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "C Rate" of "n C" is defined as the constant current of the tested-device, which takes 1/n hours to charge or discharge the tested-device between 0 per cent of the state of charge and 100 per cent of the state of charge.
No.100 2015-03-31
C.I. [No.083 2012-02-15] @ C.I. (compression-ignition) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Exhaust emissions" means:
- For positive-ignition (P.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants,
- For compression-ignition (C.I.) engines, emissions of gaseous pollutants, particulate pollutants and particle numbers;
No.083 2012-02-15
C.I. engine [No.096 2014-03-22] @ C.I. (Compression ignition) engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.9. "Compression ignition (C.I.) engine" means an engine which works on the compression-ignition principle (e.g. diesel engine);
No.096 2014-03-22
C.I. engine [No.024 2006-11-24] @ Compression ignition (C.I.) engine Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.3 "Compression ignition (C.I.) engine" means an engine which operates on the compression-ignition principle (e.g. diesel engine);
No.024 2006-11-24
C/LO [No.014 2007-12-06A4] @ Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the eHf point on the eYf axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;
No.014 2007-12-06
C/LO [No.016 2007-11-30A15] @ Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;
No.016 2007-11-30
C/LO [No.025 2010-08-14A3] @ Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;
No.025 2010-08-14
C/LO [No.029 2010-11-20A4] @ Centre plane of occupant (C/LO) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE eHf POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.8. "Centre plane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centre plane of the seat coincides with the centre plane of the occupant. For other seats, the centre plane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer.
No.029 2010-11-20
C/LO [No.046 2010-07-10A8] @ Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the eHf point on the eYf axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupantis specified by the manufacturer;
No.046 2010-07-10
C/LO [No.080 2010-06-30A4] @ Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the eHf point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3 DH machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the eHf point on the eYf axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;
No.080 2010-06-30
Cab [No.061 2010-06-30] @ Cab external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Cab" means that part of the bodywork which constitutes the driver and passenger compartment, including the doors;
No.061 2010-06-30
Cab rear panel [No.061 2010-06-30] @ Cab rear panel external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cab rear panel" means the rearmost part of the external surface of the driver and passenger compartment. Where it is not possible to determine the position of the rear cab panel, for the purposes of this Regulation it would be deemed to be the vertical transversal plane situated 50 cm to the rear of the eRf point of the driver seat, with the seat, if adjustable, located at its rearmost driving position (see Annex 3). However, the manufacturer may, with the agreement of the technical services, request an alternative distance if 50 cm can be shown as being inappropriate for a particular vehicle ( 2 );
No.061 2010-06-30
Cab-over engine vehicle [No.029 2010-11-20] @ Cab-over engine vehicle protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cab-over engine vehicle" means a vehicle where more than half of the engine length is rearward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub is in the forward quarter of the vehicle length.
No.029 2010-11-20
Calculated load value [No.083 2012-02-15A11] @ Calculated load value Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. A "Calculated load value" refers to an indication of the current airflow divided by peak airflow, where peak airflow is corrected for altitude, if available. This definition provides a dimensionless number that is not engine specific and provides the service technician with an indication of the proportion of engine capacity that is being used (with wide open throttle as 100 per cent); CLV = [Ž®]
No.083 2012-02-15
Calibration [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Calibration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.7. "Calibration" means the process of setting a measurement system's response so that its output agrees with a range of reference signals. Contrast with "verification";
No.096 2014-03-22
calibration (Re-) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Recalibration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.54. "Recalibration" means a fine tuning of a natural gas engine in order to provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different range of natural gas;
No.049 2013-06-24
calibration (re-) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ recalibration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "recalibration" means a fine tuning of an NG engine in order to provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different range of natural gas;
No.049 2008-04-12
calibration (re-) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ recalibration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "recalibration" means a fine tuning of an NG engine in order to provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different range of natural gas;
No.049 2010-08-31
Calibration gas [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Calibration gas Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.8. "Calibration gas" means a purified gas mixture used to calibrate gas analysers. Calibration gases shall meet the specifications of paragraph 9.5.1. of Annex 4B. Note that calibration gases and span gases are qualitatively the same, but differ in terms of their primary function. Various performance verification checks for gas analysers and sample handling components might refer to either calibration gases or span gases;
No.096 2014-03-22
calliper (Wheel) [No.124 2006-12-27] @ Wheel calliper (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Wheel calliper" is the rotating profile shape, formed by the internal wheel contour (see Annex 10, figure 1).
No.124 2006-12-27
Camel-back [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Camel-back @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.
No.108 2006-07-04
Camel-back [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Camel-back Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is a material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back"— pre-cut lengths of material which has been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" — a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" — tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" — a previously formed and cured tread applied to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.
No.109 2006-07-04
Camera [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Camera devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.1."Camera" means a device that renders an image of the outside world and then converts this image into a signal (e.g. video signal).
No.046 2014-08-08
Camera [No.046 2010-07-10] @ Camera Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.1. "Camera" means a device that renders an image of the outside world and then converts this imageinto a signal (e.g. video signal).
No.046 2010-07-10
Camera monitor device for indirect vision [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Camera-monitor device for indirect vision devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2."Camera-monitor device for indirect vision" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field of vision is obtained by means of a camera-monitor combination as defined in paragraphs 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2 below.
No.046 2014-08-08
camera monitor recording device (Surveillance) [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Surveillance camera-monitor-recording device devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.13."Surveillance camera-monitor-recording device" means a camera and either a monitor or recording equipment other than the camera-monitor device defined in paragraph 2.1.2 above which can be fitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than those specified in paragraph 15.2.4 of this Regulation or to provide a security system within or around the vehicle.
No.046 2014-08-08
Camera-monitor device for indirect vision [No.046 2010-07-10] @ Camera-monitor device for indirect vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. "Camera-monitor device for indirect vision" means a device as defined in paragraph 2.1, where the field of vision is obtained by means of a camera-monitor combination as defined in paragraphs 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2.
No.046 2010-07-10
camera-monitor-recording device (surveillance) [No.046 2010-07-10] @ surveillance camera-monitor-recording device Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.13. "surveillance camera-monitor-recording device" means a camera and either a monitor or recording equipment other than the camera-monitor device defined in paragraph 2.1.2 which can befitted to the inside or outside of the vehicle in order to provide fields of vision other than thosespecified in paragraph 15.2.4 or to provide a security system within or around the vehicle.
No.046 2010-07-10
Candidate tyre [No.117 2008-08-29] @ Candidate tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2.13. "Candidate tyre" means a tyre, representative of the type, that is submitted for approval in accordance with this Regulation. No.117 2008-08-29
Candidate tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] @ Candidate tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.2. "Candidate tyre" means a tyre, representative of the type that is submitted for approval in accordance with this Regulation.
No.117 2011-11-23
Cantrail [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Cantrail Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Cantrail" means the longitudinal structural part of the bodywork above the side windows including the curved transition to the roof structures. In the rollover test the cantrail hits the ground first.
No.066 2007-12-06
Cantrail [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Cantrail Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Cantrail" means the longitudinal structural part of the bodywork above the side windows including the curved transition to the roof structures. In the rollover test the cantrail (in the case of a double deck coach, the cantrail of the upper deck) hits the ground first.
No.066 2011-03-30
Capability to repel fuel or lubricant [No.108 2015-04-21] @ Capability to repel fuel or lubricant burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.8. "Capability to repel fuel or lubricant" means the capability of materials to repel fuel or lubricant when measured according to Annex 9 to this Regulation.
No.108 2015-04-21
capacity (Engine) [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Engine capacity Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Engine capacity" means:
2.11.1. For reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine swept volume;
2.11.2. For rotary piston engines (Wankel), twice the nominal swept volume of a combustion chamber per piston;
No.083 2012-02-15
capacity (Engine) [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Engine capacity Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Engine capacity" means:
2.11.1. For reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine swept volume;
2.11.2. For rotary piston engines (Wankel), twice the nominal swept volume of a combustion chamber per piston.
No.083 2015-07-03
capacity at various speed (tyre load, Table of) [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Table of tyre load capacities at various speeds Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Table of tyre load capacities at various speeds" means the table in Annex 8 which shows, by reference to indices of load capacity and of capacity at nominal speed, load variations of a tyre if used at speeds other than that corresponding to the index of its nominal speed category.
No.075 2011-03-30
capacity index (Load) [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Load capacity index Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Load capacity index" means a figure associated with the maximum load a tyre can carry at the speed corresponding to its speed symbol according to the operating conditions specified by the tyre manufacturer. A list of those indices and of the corresponding loads is given in Annex 4 to this Regulation.
No.075 2011-03-30
capacity index (Load-) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Load-capacity index Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Load-capacity index" means one number which indicates the load the tyre can carry in single formation at the speed corresponding to the associated speed category and when operated in conformity with the requirements governing utilisation specified by the manufacturer. The list of these indices and their corresponding masses is given in annex 4;
No.106 2010-09-30
Capacity of the fuel tank [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Capacity of the fuel tank Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel-tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
No.095 2015-07-10
capacity of the fuel tank [No.034 2011-04-28] @ capacity of the fuel tank Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.5. "capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer; and
No.034 2011-04-28
Capacity of the fuel tank [No.034 2011-04-2810] @ Capacity of the fuel tank Fire risks PART III — APPROVAL OF TANKS FOR LIQUID FUEL AS SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNITS
10. DEFINITIONS
10.2. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel tank capacity as specified by the tank manufacturer;
No.034 2011-04-28
Capacity of the fuel tank [No.095 2007-11-30] @ Capacity of the fuel tank Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Capacity of the fuel tank" means the fuel-tank capacity as specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle;
No.095 2007-11-30
capacity with speed (load, Variation of) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Variation of load capacity with speed Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Table: Variation of load capacity with speed" means the tables in annex 7 showing as a function of the category of use, the type of application, the load capacity index and the nominal speed category symbol, the maximum load rating variations which a tyre can withstand when used at speeds different from that corresponding to its speed category symbol;
2.30.1. The table "Variation of load capacity with speed" is not applicable to the "supplementary service description".
2.30.2. The table "Variation of load capacity with speed" is not applicable to eImproved Flexionf or "Very High Flexion" tyres.
No.106 2010-09-30
capping [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ capping Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Retreading" means the generic term for reconditioning a used tyre by replacing the worn tread with new material. It may also include renovation of the outermost sidewall surface and replacement of the crown plies or the protective breaker. It covers the following process methods:
2.37.1. "Top capping" — replacement of the tread;
2.37.2. "Re-capping" — replacement of the tread and with the new material extending over part of the sidewall;
2.37.3. "Bead to bead" — replacement of the tread and renovation of the sidewall including all or part of the lower area of the tyre.
No.109 2006-07-04
carbon (Hydro) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ HC (Hydrocarbon) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.39. "Hydrocarbon (HC)" means THC, NMHC as applicable. Hydrocarbon generally means the hydrocarbon group on which the emission standards are based for each type of fuel and engine;
No.096 2014-03-22
carbon (hydro, methane, Non) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ NMHC (Non-methane hydrocarbons) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.51. "Non-methane hydrocarbons (NMHC)" means the sum of all hydrocarbon species except methane;
No.096 2014-03-22
carbon (hydro, Total) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ THC (Total hydrocarbon) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.88. "Total hydrocarbon (THC)" means the combined mass of organic compounds measured by the specified procedure for measuring total hydrocarbon, expressed as a hydrocarbon with a hydrogen-to-carbon mass ratio of 1,85:1;
No.096 2014-03-22
Carcass [No.030 2008-07-30] @ Carcass Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.7. "Carcass" means that part of a pneumatic tyre other than the tread and the rubber side walls which, when inflated, bears the load (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Carcass [No.054 2008-07-11] @ Carcass Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.7. "Carcass" means that part of a pneumatic tyre other than the tread and the rubber sidewalls
which, when inflated, bears the load;
No.054 2008-07-11
Carcass [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Carcass Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Carcass" means that part of a pneumatic tyre other than the tread and the rubber side walls which, when inflated, bears the load.
No.075 2011-03-30
Carcass [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Carcass Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Carcass" means that part of a tyre other than the tread and the rubber sidewalls which, when inflated, bears the load;
No.106 2010-09-30
Carcass [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Carcass @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Carcass" means that structural part of a pneumatic-tyre other than the tread and outermost "rubber" of the sidewalls which, when inflated, supports the load.
No.108 2006-07-04
Carcass [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Carcass Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Carcass" means that structural part of a pneumatic-tyre other than the tread and outermost "rubber" of the sidewalls which, when inflated, supports the load.
No.109 2006-07-04
Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (International, Agreement concerning the, European) [No.013 2010-09-30A05] @ European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers y—ªz
2.3. Endurance braking system y—ªz
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 y—ªz
No.013 2010-09-30
carrier (Infant) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Infant carrier Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearward- facing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.
No.129 2014-03-29
carrier (infant) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ infant carrier Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
2.4.1. "carry-cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearwardfacing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.
No.044 2007-11-23
carrier (infant) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ infant carrier Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearward- facing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the childfs head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.
No.044 2011-09-09
Carry cot [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Carry cot Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Carry cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision.
No.129 2014-03-29
carry cot [No.044 2011-09-09] @ carry cot Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "carry cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
No.044 2011-09-09
Carry cot restraint [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Carry-cot restraint Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle.
No.129 2014-03-29
carry-cot [No.044 2007-11-23] @ carry-cot Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
2.4.1. "carry-cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearwardfacing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.
No.044 2007-11-23
carry-cot restraint [No.044 2011-09-09] @ carry-cot restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry cot to the structure of the vehicle;
No.044 2011-09-09
case (Worst) [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Worst case Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Worst case" means the vehicle type, among a group of vehicle types, least likely to withstand the requirements of this Regulation in respect of the strength of superstructure. The three parameters which define the worst case are: structural strength, reference energy and the residual space
No.066 2007-12-06
case (Worst) [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Worst case Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Worst case" means the vehicle type, among a group of vehicle types, least likely to withstand the requirements of this Regulation in respect of the strength of superstructure. The three parameters which define the worst case are: structural strength, reference energy and the residual space.
No.066 2011-03-30
Casing [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Casing @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Casing" is the worn tyre comprising carcass and remaining tread and sidewall material.
No.108 2006-07-04
Casing [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Casing Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Casing" is the worn tyre comprising carcass and remaining tread and sidewall material.
No.109 2006-07-04
catalytic converter (Original equipment) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Original equipment catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Original equipment catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters covered by the type approval delivered for the vehicle and whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83.
No.103 2007-06-19
catalytic converter (Replacement) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters for which approval can be obtained according to this Regulation, other than those defined in paragraph 2.1 above.
No.103 2007-06-19
catalytic converter (replacement, Approval of a) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Approval of a replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a replacement catalytic converter" means the approval of a converter intended to be fitted as a replacement part on one or more specific types of vehicles with regard to the limitation of pollutant emissions, noise level and effect on vehicle performance and, where applicable, on the on-board diagnostic (OBD).
No.103 2007-06-19
catalytic converter (replacement, Deteriorated) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter" means a converter that has been aged or artificially deteriorated to such an extend that it fulfils the requirements laid out in paragraph 1 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to Regulation No 83.
No.103 2007-06-19
catalytic converter (replacement, Original) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Original replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Original replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83, but are offered in the market as separate technical units by the holder of the vehicle type-approval.
No.103 2007-06-19
catalytic converter (Type of) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Type of catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of catalytic converter" means catalytic converters which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(i) number of coated substrates, structure and material
(ii) type of catalytic activity (oxidising, three-way, c)
(iii) volume, ratio of frontal area and substrate length
(iv) catalyst material content
(v) catalyst material ratio
(vi) cell density
(vii) dimensions and shape
(viii) thermal protection
No.103 2007-06-19
category [No.037 2010-11-13] @ category Filament lamps 2. ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS
2.1. Definitions
2.1.1. Definition of "category"
The term "category" is used in this Regulation to describe different basic design of standardised filament lamps. Each
No.037 2010-11-13
category [No.037 2014-07-18] @ category Filament lamps 2.1. Definitions
2.1.1. Definition of "category"
The term "category" is used in this Regulation to describe different basic design of standardised filament lamps. Each category has a specific designation, as for example: "H4", "P21W", "T4W", "PY21W" or "RR10W".
No.037 2014-07-18
category [No.099 2010-06-30] @ category Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.1. The term "category" is used in this Regulation to describe different basic design of standardized gas- discharge light sources. Each category has a specific designation, as for example: "D2S".
No.099 2010-06-30
category [No.099 2014-09-30] @ category Gas-discharge light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.1. The term "category" is used in this Regulation to describe different basic design of standardised gas-discharge light sources. Each category has a specific designation, as for example: eD2Sf.
No.099 2014-09-30
category [No.128 2014-05-29] @ category Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 2.1. Definitions
2.1.1. Definition of "category"
The term "category" is used in this Regulation to describe different basic design of standardised LED light sources.
Each category has a specific designation as for example: "LW1", "LY2", "LR2".
No.128 2014-05-29
category (Child restraint system) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ category (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. A "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1, and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 — as being compatible with such a category of child restraint.
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either;
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.
No.044 2011-09-09
category (Speed) [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Speed category Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Speed category" means:
2.28.1. The speeds, expressed by the speed category symbol as shown in the table in paragraph 2.28.2.
2.28.2. The speed categories are as shown in the table below: (km/h)
[•\] Speed category symbol / Corresponding speed
B / 50
F / 80
- / ---
W / 270
2.28.3. Tyres suitable for maximum speeds in excess of 240 km/h are identified by means of letter codes "V" or "Z" (see paragraph 2.33.3) placed within the tyre size designation in front of the indications of the structure (see paragraph 3.1.3).
No.075 2011-03-30
category (Speed) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Speed category Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Speed category", the reference speed expressed by the speed category symbol as shown in the table below:
[•\] Speed category symbol / Reference speed (km/h)
A2 / 10
A4 / 20
A6 / 30
A8 / 40
B / 50
D / 65
No.106 2010-09-30
Category 1 / 2 (Bending mode) [No.123 2006-12-27] @ Category 1 / 2 (Bending mode) Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
No.123 2006-12-27
Category 1,2 bending mode [No.123 2010-08-24] @ Category 1,2 bending mode Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Mode" of a front-lighting function provided by a system means a beam within the provisions (see paragraphs 6.2 and 6.3 of this Regulation) either for one of the passing beam classes or for the main beam, designed and specified by the manufacturer for adaptation to dedicated vehicle and ambient conditions;
1.4.1. "Bending mode" means the designation of a mode of a front-lighting function with its illumination being laterally moved or modified (to obtain an equivalent effect), designed for bends, curves or intersections of the road, and, identified by particular photometric provisions;
1.4.2. "Category 1 bending mode" means a bending mode with horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
1.4.3. "Category 2 bending mode" means a bending mode without horizontal movement of the kink of the cut-off;
No.123 2010-08-24
category A B (Electric regenerative braking system of ) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Electric regenerative braking system of category A, B Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
No.013H 2015-12-22
category A, B (braking, regenerative, Electric) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Electric regenerative braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
2.17.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system;
2.17.3. "Electric regenerative braking system of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system;
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
2.17.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013H 2010-08-31
category A, B (Electric regenerative braking system of) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Electric regenerative braking system of category A, B Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013 2016-02-18
Category L [2012/wp29grrf/GRRF-72-09e__2_.pdf] @ Category L @ Category L (light) vehicles
L1e : light two-wheel vehicle
@L1Ae : powered cycle
@L1Be : Moped
L2e : Three-wheel moped
L3e : motorcycle
L4e : motorcycle with side car
L5e : tricycles
@L5Ae : Tricycles
@L5Be : Commercial tricycles
L6e : Light quadricycle
@L6Ae : Light quad
@L6Be : Light mini car
L7e : Heavy quadricycle
@L7Ae : On-road quad
@L7Be : All Terrain Vehicles
@L7Be : Heavy mini car
ŽQl : http://www2u.biglobe.ne.jp/~standard/ecinf.htm#2013-06-23UNECE
2012/wp29grrf/GRRF-72-09e__2_.pdf
category L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 (Vehicle of) [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Vehicles of categories L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3 devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.4."Vehicles of categories L2, L5, M1, M2, M3, N1, N2 and N3" means those defined in the Consolida ted Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.2, para. 2).
No.046 2014-08-08
Category N [No.073 2004-03-31A3] @ Category N Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) [ANNEX 3] CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES
1. Category N: Power-driven vehicles having at least four wheels or having three wheels when the maximum mass exceeds
1/metric/ton, and used for the carriage of goods
1.1. Category N2: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 3.5 but not exceeding 12 metric tons.
1.2. Category N3: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 12 metric tons.
No.073 2004-03-31
Category O [No.073 2004-03-31A3] @ Category O Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) [ANNEX 3] CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES
2. Category O: Trailers (including semi-trailers)
2.1. Category O3: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 3.5, but not exceeding 10 metric tons.
2.2. Category O4: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 10 metric btons.
No.073 2004-03-31
Category of use [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Category of use @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud
and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a normal tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre
generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a normal tyre.
2.3.3. Temporary use spare tyre is a tyre different from that intended to be fitted to any vehicle for normal driving
conditions but intended only for temporary use under restricted driving conditions.
2.3.4. "T" type temporary use spare tyre is a type of temporary use spare tyre designed for use at inflation pressures higher than those established for standard and reinforced tyres.
No.108 2006-07-04
Category of use [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Category of use Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Category of use"
2.3.1. Normal tyre is a tyre intended for normal road use only.
2.3.2. Special use tyre is a tyre intended for mixed use, both on and off road and/or at restricted speed.
2.3.3. Snow tyre is a tyre whose tread pattern, or tread pattern and structure, is primarily designed to ensure, in mud and fresh or melting snow, a performance better than that of a Normal Tyre. The tread pattern of a snow tyre generally consists of groove (rib) and solid block elements more widely spaced than on a Normal Tyre.
No.109 2006-07-04
CBS [No.078 2015-01-30] @ CBS (Combined brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Combined brake system (CBS)" means:
For vehicle categories L1 and L3:a service brake system where at least two brakes on different wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle categories L2 and L5:a service brake system where the brakes on all wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle category L4:a service brake system where the brakes on at least the front and rear wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control. (If the rear wheel and sidecar wheel are braked by the same brake system, this is regarded as the rear brake.)
No.078 2015-01-30
CCD (Close-coupling device) [No.102 2008-12-30] @ Close-coupling device (CCD) Close coupling devices 2.1.1. "Close-coupling device (CCD)" means a device which automatically provides sufficient space between the bodies of towing vehicles and trailers if additional clearance is needed during angular movement between them. Coupling devices having no adjusting effect on lengths and/or angles within the device are not covered by this Regulation; No.102 2008-12-30
Cell [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Cell Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Cell" means a single encased electrochemical unit containing one positive and one negative electrode which exhibits a voltage differential across its two terminals.
No.100 2015-03-31
Cement [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Cement @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Cement" is an adhesive solution to hold new materials in place prior to the curing process.
No.108 2006-07-04
Cement [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Cement Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.44. "Cement" is an adhesive solution to hold new materials in place prior to the curing process.
No.109 2006-07-04
Central driving position [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Central driving position safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Central driving position" is defined when Y co-ordinate of the R point is in Y0 position within + or – 60 mm.
No.043 2014-02-12
central plane (longitudinal,Vertical) [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Vertical longitudinal central plane (VLCP) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Vertical longitudinal central plane" (VLCP) means the vertical plane which passes through the midpoints of the front axle track and the rear axle track.
No.066 2007-12-06
centre (Light) [No.128 2014-05-29] @ Light centre Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.7. Light centre: a point on the reference axis at a defined distance from the reference plane that represents the nominal origin of the visible radiation emitted.
No.128 2014-05-29
centre (Reference) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Reference centre Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.1. "Reference centre" means a point on or near a retro-reflective area which is designated to be the centre of the device for the purpose of specifying its performance;
No.104 2014-03-14
Centre axle trailer [No.055 2006-12-27] @ Centre axle trailer Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Centre axle trailer" means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser.
The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass.
No.055 2006-12-27
Centre axle trailer [No.055 2010-08-28] @ Centre axle trailer mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Centre axle trailer" means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser.
The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
No.055 2010-08-28
centre length (Light) [No.128 2014-05-29] @ Light centre length Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.8. Light centre length: the distance between the reference plane and the light centre
No.128 2014-05-29
Centre of reference [Directive 2009/061/EC] @ Centre of reference installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.8. Centre of reference
"Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light-emitting surface, specified by the manufacturer of the lamp.
Directive 2009/061/EC
Centre of reference [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.12. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light-emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp; No.048 2008-05-23
Centre of reference [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light- emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp;
No.053 2013-06-18
Centre of reference [No.074 2013-06-18] @ Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light- emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp;
No.074 2013-06-18
Centre of reference [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light- emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp;
No.048 2011-12-06
Centre of reference [No.086 2010-09-30] @ Centre of reference Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Centre of reference" means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light-emitting surface, specified by the manufacturer of the lamp.
No.086 2010-09-30
centre of reference or reference centre [Directive 2009/067/EC] @ centre of reference or reference centre installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
9. centre of reference or reference centre
means the intersection of the axis of reference with the light-emitting surface, the centre of reference being specified by the lamp manufacturer;
Directive 2009/067/EC
Centre of the mirror [No.081 2012-07-13] @ Centre of the mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Centre of the mirror" means the centroid of the visible area of the reflecting surface;
No.081 2012-07-13
Centre of the reflecting surface [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Centre of the reflecting surface devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.11."Centre of the reflecting surface" means the centre of the visible area of the reflecting surface.
No.046 2014-08-08
Centre of the reflecting surface [No.046 2010-07-10] @ Centre of the reflecting surface Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.11. "Centre of the reflecting surface" means the centre of the visible area of the reflecting surface.
No.046 2010-07-10
Centre of the steering control boss [No.012 2008-06-26] @ Centre of the steering control boss Behaviour of steering device under impact 2.11. "Centre of the steering control boss" means that point on the surface of the boss which is in line with the axis of the steering shaft; No.012 2008-06-26
Centre of the steering control boss [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Centre of the steering control boss protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Centre of the steering control boss" means that point on the surface of the boss which is in line with the axis of the steering shaft;
No.012 2013-03-27
Centre plane of occupant [No.017 2006-12-27] @ Centre plane of occupant (C/LO) Seat strength [Annex 3] 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centre plane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centre plane of the seat coincides with the centre plane of the occupant. For other seats, the centre plane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;
No.017 2006-12-27
Centre plane of occupant [No.029 2010-11-20A4] @ Centre plane of occupant (C/LO) protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE eHf POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.8. "Centre plane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centre plane of the seat coincides with the centre plane of the occupant. For other seats, the centre plane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer.
No.029 2010-11-20
centre stand [Directive 2009/078/EC] @ centre stand stands for two-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I 1. DEFINITIONS]
1.3. "centre stand" means a stand which, when swung into the open position, supports the vehicle by providing one or several areas of contact between the vehicle and the supporting surface either side of the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;
Directive 2009/078/EC
Centreplane of occupant [No.014 2007-12-06A4] @ Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Seat-belt anchorages [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the eHf point on the eYf axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;
No.014 2007-12-06
Centreplane of occupant [No.016 2007-11-30A15] @ Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Seat belts [ANNEX 15] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE "H" POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;
No.016 2007-11-30
Centreplane of occupant [No.025 2010-08-14A3] @ Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) head restraints (headrests) [ANNEX 3] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the coordinate of the "H" point on the "Y" axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;
No.025 2010-08-14
Centreplane of occupant [No.046 2010-07-10A8] @ Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Rear-view mirrors {ANNEX 8] Procedure for determining the "H" point and the actual torso angle for seating positions in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3-D H machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the eHf point on the eYf axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupantis specified by the manufacturer;
No.046 2010-07-10
Centreplane of occupant [No.080 2010-06-30A4] @ Centreplane of occupant (C/LO) Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) [ANNEX 4] Procedure for determining the eHf point and the actualtorso angle for seating position in motor vehicles
2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Centreplane of occupant" (C/LO) means the median plane of the 3 DH machine positioned in each designated seating position; it is represented by the co-ordinate of the eHf point on the eYf axis. For individual seats, the centreplane of the seat coincides with the centreplane of the occupant. For other seats, the centreplane of the occupant is specified by the manufacturer;
No.080 2010-06-30
certificate of conformity [REG. No 443/2009] @ certificate of conformity reduce CO2 emissions from light-duty vehicles (b) "certificate of conformity" means the certificate referred to in Article 18 of Directive 2007/46/EC; REG. No 443/2009
CFV [No.049 2010-08-31223] @ CFV Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
CFV Critical flow venturi
No.049 2010-08-31
Chafer [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Chafer @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Chafer" means material in the bead area to protect the carcass against chafing or abrasion by the wheel rim.
No.108 2006-07-04
Chafer [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Chafer Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Chafer" means material in the bead area to protect the carcass against chafing or abrasion by the wheel rim.
No.109 2006-07-04
Chair [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Chair Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the Child Restraint System and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
No.129 2014-03-29
chair (Child-safety) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Child-safety chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child-safety chair" means a child restraint incorporating a chair in which the child is held.
No.044 2007-11-23
chair (safety, Child) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Child-safety chair Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Child-safety chair" means a Child Restraint System incorporating a chair in which the child is held.
No.129 2014-03-29
chair (safety, Child-) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Child-safety chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child-safety chair" means a child restraint incorporating a chair in which the child is held.
No.044 2011-09-09
Chair [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
2.4.1. "carry-cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearwardfacing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.
No.044 2007-11-23
Chair [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position;
2.4.1. "carry cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearward- facing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the childfs head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.
No.044 2011-09-09
Chair support [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Chair support Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Chair support" means that part of a Child Restraint System by which the chair can be raised.
No.129 2014-03-29
Chair support [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Chair support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Chair support" means that part of a child restraint by which the chair can be raised.
No.044 2007-11-23
Chair support [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Chair support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Chair support" means that part of a child restraint by which the chair can be raised.
No.044 2011-09-09
chamber (compression, Spring) [No.013 2010-09-30A08] @ Spring compression chamber Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 8] Provisions relating to specific conditions for spring braking systems
1. DEFINITION
1.2. "Spring compression chamber" means the chamber where the pressure variation that induces the compression of the spring is actually produced.
No.013 2010-09-30
change function (Traffic-) [No.123 2010-08-24] @ Traffic-change function Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.19. "Traffic-change function" means any front-lighting function or a mode thereof, or part(s) thereof only, or any combination of these, intended to avoid glare and provide sufficient illumination in case where a vehicle being equipped with a system designed for one traffic direction only is temporarily used in a country with the opposite direction of traffic.
No.123 2010-08-24
Character of the vehicle [No.013 2016-02-18] š Character of the vehicle Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Character of the vehicle" means a descriptive term for a vehicle — tractor for semi-trailer, truck, bus, semi-trailer, full trailer, centre-axle trailer.
No.013 2016-02-18
characteristic (Principal) [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Principal characteristic safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Principal characteristic" means a characteristic that appreciably modifies the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way not without significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The term also covers the trade names or marks as specified by the holder of the approval.
No.043 2014-02-12
characteristic (Principal) [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Principal characteristic Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Principal characteristic" means a characteristic which appreciably modifies the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way not without significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The term also covers the trade names or marks as specified by the holder of the approval;
No.043 2010-08-31
characteristic (Secondary) [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Secondary characteristic safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Secondary characteristic" means a characteristic capable of modifying the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way which is of significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The extent of such modification is assessed in relation to the indices of difficulty.
No.043 2014-02-12
characteristic (Secondary) [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Secondary characteristic Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Secondary characteristic" means a characteristic capable of modifying the optical and/or mechanical properties of a safety glazing material in a way which is of significance to the function which it is intended to perform in a vehicle. The extent of such modification is assessed in relation to the indices of difficulty.
No.043 2010-08-31
characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U [No.055 2010-08-28] @ characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or D c value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is: [Ž® D=]
For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is: [Ž® Dc=]
For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6, the value is: [Ž® D=]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer ( 1 ).
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers ( 2 ) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s 2 )
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [Ž® V=]
No.055 2010-08-28
characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U [No.055 2006-12-27] @ characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal
forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for
horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support
imposed vertical loads, the value is: [D= Ž®]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. 2
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass 2.
For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers 3 the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9.81 m/s2)
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph
2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3.5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [V= Ž®]
where:
a is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
For air suspension (or suspension systems with equivalent damping characteristics)
a = 1.8 m/s2
For other types of suspension:
a = 2.4 m/s2
X is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1)
L is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1)
Note: (If less than 1.0, the value of 1.0 shall be used) [Ž®]
No.055 2006-12-27
charge (Electric state of) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Electric state of charge Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013 2016-02-18
charge (Electric state of) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Electric state of charge Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery;
No.013H 2015-12-22
charge (Electric state of) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Electric state of charge Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Electric regenerative braking" means a braking system which, during deceleration, provides for the conversion of vehicle kinetic energy into electrical energy.
2.21.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system.
2.21.2. "Electric regenerative braking system of category A" means an electric regenerative braking system which is not part of the service braking system.
2.21.3. "Electric regenerative braking systems of category B" means an electric regenerative braking system which is part of the service braking system.
2.21.4. "Electric state of charge" means the instantaneous ratio of electric quantity of energy stored in the traction battery relative to the maximum quantity of electric energy which could be stored in this battery.
2.21.5. "Traction battery" means an assembly of accumulators constituting the storage of energy used for powering the traction motor(s) of the vehicle.
No.013 2010-09-30
Charge (State Of) [No.083 2012-02-15A14] @ SOC (State Of Charge) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 14] EMISSIONS TEST PROCEDURE FOR HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES (HEV)
[Appendix] Electrical energy/power storage device State Of Charge (SOC) profile for OVC HEV Type I Test
No.083 2012-02-15
Charge (State of) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ SOC (State of Charge) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "State of Charge (SOC)" means the available electrical charge in a tested-device expressed as a percentage of its rated capacity.
No.100 2015-03-31
charging the rechargeable energy storage system (Coupling system for) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.
No.095 2015-07-10
charging the REESS (Coupling system for) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Coupling system for charging the REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.
No.100 2015-03-31
charging the RESS (Coupling system for) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Coupling system for charging the RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet,
No.094 2012-09-20
charging the RESS (Coupling system for) [No.010 2012-09-20] @ Coupling system for charging the RESS Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Coupling system for charging the RESS" means the electrical circuit installed in the vehicle used for charging the RESS.
No.010 2012-09-20
charging the RESS (Coupling system for) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Coupling system for charging the RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet;
No.012 2013-03-27
chassis (Electrical) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Electrical chassis protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose electrical potential is taken as reference;
No.012 2013-03-27
chassis (Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Electrical chassis Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose electrical potential is taken as reference,
No.094 2012-09-20
chassis (Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Electrical chassis Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose electrical potential is taken as reference.
No.095 2015-07-10
chassis (Electrical) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Electrical chassis Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose potential is taken as reference.
No.100 2011-02-14
chassis (Electrical) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Electrical chassis Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electrical chassis" means a set made of conductive parts electrically linked together, whose potential is taken as reference.
No.100 2015-03-31
Chassis connected to the electric circuit [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Chassis connected to the electric circuit Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Chassis connected to the electric circuit" means AC and DC electric circuits galvanically connected to the electrical chassis.
No.100 2015-03-31
check (Self) [No.131 2014-07-19] @ Self-check Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Self-check" means an integrated function that checks for a system failure on a semi-continuous basis at least while the system is active.
No.131 2014-07-19
check valve [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Non-return valve or check valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.20. "Non-return valve or check valve" means an automatic valve that allows gas/fluid to flow in only one direction.
No.110 2015-06-30
Child restraining strap [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Child-restraining strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt (harness) and restrains only the body of the child.
No.129 2014-03-29
Child restraint [No.016 2015-11-20] @ Child restraint Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Child restraint" means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129.
No.016 2015-11-20
Child restraint [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Child restraint Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Child restraint" means an arrangement of components which may comprise a combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments, and in some cases a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle by limiting the mobility of the wearerfs body.
No.094 2012-09-20
child restraint (adjuster mounted directly on) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ adjuster mounted directly on child restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Adjusting device" means a device enabling the restraint or its attachments to be adjusted to the physique of the wearer, the configuration of the vehicle, or both. The adjusting device may either be part of the buckle or be a retractor or any other part of the safety belt;
2.10.1. "quick adjuster" means an adjusting device which can be operated by one hand in one smooth movement;
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which
is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.
No.044 2007-11-23
child restraint (adjuster mounted directly on) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ adjuster mounted directly on child restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10.2. "adjuster mounted directly on child restraint" means an adjuster for the integral harness which is directly mounted on the child restraint, as opposed to being directly supported by the webbing that it is designed to adjust.
No.044 2011-09-09
Child restraint [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Child restraint Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Child restraint" means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44.
No.016 2007-11-30
Child restraint [No.016 2011-09-09] @ Child restraint Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Child restraint" means a safety device as defined in Regulation No 44.
No.016 2011-09-09
Child restraint [No.094 2010-05-28] @ Child restraint Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Child restraint" means an arrangement of components which may comprise a combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments, and in some cases a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body
No.094 2010-05-28
child restraint fixture [No.014 2015-08-19] @ A child restraint fixture safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "A child restraint fixture" means a fixture according to one out of the eight ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of Regulation No 16 and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used in Regulation No 16, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, so-called either ISO/F2 (B) or ISO/F2X(B1) which is described in Regulation No 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2), is used in this Regulation to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system;
No.014 2015-08-19
Child restraint fixture [No.016 2015-11-20] @ CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the eight ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 to this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.
No.016 2015-11-20
child restraint fixture [No.014 2007-12-06] @ child restraint fixture Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "A child restraint fixture" means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of annex 17 — appendix 2 of Regulation No 16 and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used in Regulation No 16, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B) which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in this Regulation to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.
No.014 2007-12-06
child restraint fixture [No.014 2011-04-28] @ a child restraint fixture safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "a child restraint fixture" means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 to Regulation No 16 and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used in Regulation No 16, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B) which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in this Regulation to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.
No.014 2011-04-28
Child restraint fixture [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Child restraint fixture (CRF) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.
No.016 2007-11-30
Child restraint fixture [No.016 2011-09-09] @ CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.
No.016 2011-09-09
Child Restraint System [No.129 2014-03-29] @ CRS (Child Restraint System) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Child Restraint System" (CRS) means a device capable of accommodating a child occupant in a sitting or supine position. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the childfs body.
No.129 2014-03-29
Child restraint system (category) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ category (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. A "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1, and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 — as being compatible with such a category of child restraint.
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either;
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.
No.044 2011-09-09
Child restraint system (classe) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ classe (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt.
No.044 2011-09-09
child restraint system (ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ ISOFIX child restraint system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system;
No.014 2015-08-19
child restraint system (ISOFIX) [No.016 2015-11-20] @ ISOFIX child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44 or Regulation No 129, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.
No.016 2015-11-20
child restraint system (Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Isofix child restraint system Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Isofix child restraint system2 means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system.
No.014 2007-12-06
child restraint system (Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] @ Isofix child restraint system safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system.
No.014 2011-04-28
child restraint system (Isofix) [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Isofix child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.
No.016 2007-11-30
child restraint system (ISOFIX) [No.016 2011-09-09] @ ISOFIX child restraint system Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 44, which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorages system, fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No 14.
No.016 2011-09-09
child restraint system (Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Isofix child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Isofix child restraint system" means a child restraint system which has to be attached to an Isofix anchorage system fulfilling the requirement of Regulation No 14.
No.044 2007-11-23
child restraint system (ISOFIX) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ ISOFIX child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "ISOFIX child restraint system" means a child restraint system which has to be attached to an ISOFIX anchorage system fulfilling the requirement of Regulation No 14.
No.044 2011-09-09
Child Restraint System (ISOFIX, Universal, Integral) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ i-Size (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "i-Size" (Integral Universal ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems) is a category of Child Restraint System for use in all i-Size seating position of a vehicle, as defined and approved according to Regulation Nos. 14 and 16.
No.129 2014-03-29
Child restraint system (mass group) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ mass group (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.1.1. group 0 for children of a mass less than 10 kg;
2.1.1.2. group 0+ for children of a mass less than 13 kg;
2.1.1.3. group I for children of mass from 9 kg to 18 kg;
2.1.1.4. group II for children of mass from 15 kg to 25 kg;
2.1.1.5. group III for children of mass from 22 kg to 36 kg.
2.1.1.6. ISOFIX Child restraint systems fall into 7 ISOFIX size classes described in Regulation No 16 Annex 17, Appendix 2:
A — ISO/F3: Full Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B — ISO/F2: Reduced Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B1 — ISO/F2X: Reduced Height Forward Facing Toddler CRS
C — ISO/R3: Full Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
D — ISO/R2: Reduced Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
E — ISO/R1: Rearward Facing infant CRS
F — ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry cot)
G — ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry cot)
[•\]
No.044 2011-09-09
Child Restraint System (mounted directly on, Adjuster) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Adjuster mounted directly on Child Restraint System" means an adjuster for the harness belt which is directly mounted on the Child Restraint System, as opposed to being directly supported by the strap that it is designed to adjust.
No.129 2014-03-29
Child restraint system [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Child restraint system (restraint) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Child restraint system (restraint) means an arrangement of components which may comprise the combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments and in some cases a supplementary device as a carry-cot, infant carrier, a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power-driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearer's body.
"Isofix" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.1.1. group 0 for children of a mass less than 10 kg;
2.1.1.2. group 0+ for children of a mass less than 13 kg;
2.1.1.3. group I for children of mass from 9 kg to 18 kg;
2.1.1.4. group II for children of mass from 15 kg to 25 kg;
2.1.1.5. group III for children of mass from 22 kg to 36 kg.
2.1.1.6 Isofix Child restraint systems fall into 7 Isofix size classes described in Regulation No 16 annex 17, appendix 2:
A - ISO/F3: Full Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B - ISO/F2: Reduced Height Forward Facing toddler CRS
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced Height Forward Facing Toddler CRS
C - ISO/R3: Full Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Rearward Facing infant CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
[•\] Mass group /@/ Isofix size category
0 - up to 10 kg / F ISO/L1, G ISO/L2, E ISO/R1
0+ - up to 13 kg / C ISO/R3, D ISO/R2, E ISO/R1
I - 9 to 18 kg / A ISO/F3, B ISO/F2, B1 ISO/F2X, C ISO/R3, D ISO/R2
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.2.1. a "universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 on most vehicle seat positions, and in particular those which have been assessed according to Regulation No 16 - as being compatible with such a category of child restraint;
2.1.2.2. a "restricted" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.1 in designated seat positions for particular vehicle types as indicated by either the child restraint manufacturer or the vehicle manufacturer:
2.1.2.3. a "semi-universal" category for use as specified in paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3.2;
2.1.2.4. a "specific vehicle" category for use either:
2.1.2.4.1. on specific vehicle types, in accordance with paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.3; or
2.1.2.4.2. as a "built in" child restraint.
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.
No.044 2007-11-23
Child restraint system [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Child restraint system Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. Child restraint system ("restraint") means an arrangement of components which may comprise the combination of straps or flexible components with a securing buckle, adjusting devices, attachments and in some cases a supplementary device as a carry cot, infant carrier, a supplementary chair and/or an impact shield, capable of being anchored to a power-driven vehicle. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the wearerfs body.
"ISOFIX" is a system for the connection of child restraint systems to vehicles which has two vehicle rigid anchorages, two corresponding rigid attachments on the child restraint system and a mean to limit the pitch rotation of the child restraint system.
2.1.1. Child restraints fall into five "mass groups":
2.1.2. Child restraints fall into four "categories":
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
No.044 2011-09-09
Child restraint type [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Child restraint type Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child restraint type" means a Child Restraint System which does not differ in such essential respects as:
The category in which the restraint is type approved;
The design, material and construction of the Child Restraint System.
Convertible or modular Child Restraint Systems shall be considered to not differ in their design, material and construction.
No.129 2014-03-29
Child safety chair [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Child-safety chair Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Child-safety chair" means a Child Restraint System incorporating a chair in which the child is held.
No.129 2014-03-29
Child Safety Lock System [No.011 2010-05-13] @ Child Safety Lock System door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Child Safety Lock System" is a locking device which can be engaged and released independently of other locking devices and which, when engaged, prevents operation of the interior door handle or other release device. The lock release/engagement device may be manual or electric and may be located anywhere on or in the vehicle.
No.011 2010-05-13
Child support [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Child support Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Child support" means that part of a Child Restraint System by which the child can be raised within the Child Restraint System.
No.129 2014-03-29
Child support [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Child support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Child support" means that part of a child restraint by which the child can be raised within the child restraint.
No.044 2007-11-23
Child support [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Child support Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Child support" means that part of a child restraint by which the child can be raised within the child restraint.
No.044 2011-09-09
child-restraining strap [No.044 2007-11-23] @ child-restraining strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.
No.044 2007-11-23
child-restraining strap [No.044 2011-09-09] @ child-restraining strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
No.044 2011-09-09
child-restraint attachment strap [No.044 2007-11-23] @ child-restraint attachment strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.
No.044 2007-11-23
child-restraint attachment strap [No.044 2011-09-09] @ child-restraint attachment strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
No.044 2011-09-09
Child-restraint type [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Child-restraint type Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Child-restraint type" means child restraints which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.19.1. the category, and the mass group(s) for which and the position and orientation (as defined in paragraphs 2.15. and 2.16.) in which the restraint is intended to be used;
2.19.2. the geometry of the child restraint;
2.19.3. the dimensions, mass, material and colour of:
- the seat,
- the padding, and
- the impact shield,
2.19.4. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps;
2.19.5. the rigid components (buckle, attachments, etc.).
No.044 2007-11-23
Child-restraint type [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Child-restraint type Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Child-restraint type" means child restraints which do not differ in such essential respects as:
2.19.1. the category, and the mass group(s) for which and the position and orientation (as defined in paragraphs 2.15 and 2.16) in which the restraint is intended to be used;
2.19.2. the geometry of the child restraint;
2.19.3. the dimensions, mass, material and colour of:
the seat;
the padding; and
the impact shield;
2.19.4. the material, weave, dimensions and colour of the straps;
2.19.5. the rigid components (buckle, attachments, etc.).
No.044 2011-09-09
Child-safety chair [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Child-safety chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child-safety chair" means a child restraint incorporating a chair in which the child is held.
No.044 2007-11-23
Child-safety chair [No.044 2011-09-09] @ Child-safety chair Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Child-safety chair" means a child restraint incorporating a chair in which the child is held.
No.044 2011-09-09
Chunking [No.030 2008-07-30] @ Chunking Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.23. "Chunking" means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread; No.030 2008-07-30
Chunking [No.054 2008-07-11] @ Chunking Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.23. "Chunking" means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread; No.054 2008-07-11
Chunking [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Chunking Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Chunking" means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread.
No.075 2011-03-30
Chunking [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Chunking Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Chunking" means the breaking away of small pieces of rubber from the tread;
No.106 2010-09-30
Chunking [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Chunking @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Chunking" means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread.
No.108 2006-07-04
Chunking [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Chunking Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Chunking" means the breaking away of pieces of rubber from the tread.
No.109 2006-07-04
CIL (Coefficient of luminous intensity) [No.003 2009-01-31] @ Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL) Retro-reflecting devices 2.10. "Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)" means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation. No.003 2009-01-31
CIL [No.003 2011-12-06] @ CIL (Coefficient of luminous intensity) Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)" means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation.
No.003 2011-12-06
circle of vision (Semi-) [No.071 2004-03-31] @ Semi-circle of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Semi-circle of vision" means the semi-circle described by a radius of 12 m around the point
situated in the horizontal plane of the road at the vertical below the reference point so that the arc — seen from the direction in which the vehicle travels — is situated in front of the tractor and that the diameter delimiting the semi-circle forms a right angle with the longitudinal axis of the tractor (see figure 2);
No.071 2004-03-31
circle of vision (Semi-) [No.071 2010-07-31] @ Semi-circle of vision Field of vision, agricultural tractors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Semi-circle of vision" means the semi-circle described by a radius of 12 m around the point situated in the horizontal plane of the road at the vertical below the reference point so that the arc – seen from the direction in which the vehicle travels – is situated in front of the tractor and that the diameter delimiting the semi-circle forms a right angle with the longitudinal axis of the tractor (see figure 2).
No.071 2010-07-31
circuit (Electrical) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Electrical circuit protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected high voltage live parts which is designed to be electrically energised in normal operation;
No.012 2013-03-27
circuit (Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Electrical circuit Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected high voltage live parts which is designed to be electrically energised in normal operation,
No.094 2012-09-20
circuit (Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Electrical circuit Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Electrical circuit" means an assembly of connected high voltage live parts which is designed to be electrically energised in normal operation.
No.095 2015-07-10
Circuit closed tell tale [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether or not it is operating correctly;
No.053 2013-06-18
Circuit closed tell tale [No.074 2013-06-18] @ Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether or not it is operating correctly;
No.074 2013-06-18
Circuit-closed tell-tale [Directive 2009/061/EC] @ Circuit-closed tell-tale installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.17. Circuit-closed tell-tale
"Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a tell-tale showing that a device has been switched on but not showing whether it is operating correctly or not.
Directive 2009/061/EC
circuit-closed telltale [Directive 2009/067/EC] @ circuit-closed telltale installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15. circuit-closed telltale
means a telltale showing that a device has been switched on but not showing whether it is operating correctly or not.
Directive 2009/067/EC
Circuit-closed tell-tale [No.086 2010-09-30] @ Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a tell-tale showing that a device has been switched on but not showing whether it is operating correctly or not.
No.086 2010-09-30
circulation (re, gas, Exhaust) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Exhaust-gas recirculation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.34. "Exhaust-gas recirculation" means a technology that reduces emissions by routing exhaust gases that have been exhausted from the combustion chamber(s) back into the engine to be mixed with incoming air before or during combustion. The use of valve timing to increase the amount of residual exhaust gas in the combustion chamber(s) that is mixed with incoming air before or during combustion is not considered exhaust-gas recirculation for the purposes of this Regulation;
No.096 2014-03-22
Class (CNG components for use in vehicle) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Class (CNG components for use in vehicles) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
CNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure and function, according to figure 1-1.
Class 0 : High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 : Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 : Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 : Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 : Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.
No.110 2011-05-07
Class (LPG components for use in vehicle) [No.067 2008-03-14] @ Class (LPG components for use in vehicles) LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
LPG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the maximum operating pressure and function, according to Figure 1.
Class 1 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing liquid LPG at vapour pressure or increased vapour pressure up to 3 000 kPa.
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing vaporized LPG with a maximum operating pressure below 450 kPa and over 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure.
Class 2A Low pressure parts for a limited pressure range including tubes and fittings containing vaporized LPG with a maximum operating pressure below 120 kPa and over 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure.
Class 3 Shut-off valves and pressure relief valves, when operating in the liquid phase.
LPG components designed for a maximum operating pressure below 20 kPa above atmospheric pressure are not subjected to this Regulation.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in his own class with regard to maximum operating pressure and function.
[ƒtƒ[ƒ`ƒƒ[ƒg] Figure 1 Classification with regard to maximum operating pressure and function
No.067 2008-03-14
Class [No.123 2006-12-27] @ Class Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Class" of a passing beam (C, V, E or W) means the designation of a passing beam, identified by particular provisions according to this Regulation and Regulation No. 48 1/;"
No.123 2006-12-27
Class 0`4 (CNG components for use in vehicle) [No.110 2008-03-14] @ CNG components for use in vehicles (Class 0`4) Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
CNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure and function, according to figure 1-1.
Class 0 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.
No.110 2008-03-14
Class 0`5 [No.110 2015-06-30] @ CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 3. CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
Class 0 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
Class 5 Parts in contact with temperature range extending below – 40Ž.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.
CNG and/or LNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure, temperature and function, according to Figure 1-1.
No.110 2015-06-30
Class A / B Headlamp [No.112 2014-08-22] @ Classes (A or B) Headlamps headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.
No.112 2014-08-22
class A M 2 or M 3 vehicle [REG. No 661/2009] @ class A M 2 or M 3 vehicle safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + ƒ¿ 3. "class A M 2 or M 3 vehicle" means an M 2 or M 3 vehicle with a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers, in addition to the driver, designed to carry standing passengers and having seats and provision for standing passengers; REG. No 661/2009
Class A, B (Vehicle) [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Vehicle (Class A, B) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. For vehicles having a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are two classes of vehicles:
2.1.2.1. "Class A": vehicles designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has seats and shall have provision for standing passengers.
2.1.2.2. "Class B": vehicles not designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has no provision for standing passengers.
No.107 2010-09-29
Class A, B, C (vehicle) [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Class A, B, C (vehicle) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2. For vehicles having a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the
driver, there are two classes of vehicles:
2.1.2.1. "Class A": vehicles designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has seats and shall have provision for standing passengers.
2.1.2.2. "Class B": vehicles not designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has no provision for standing passengers.
No.107 2006-12-27
Class A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, S, T [No.055 2010-08-28] @ Class A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, S, T mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows:
2.6.1. Class A Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head — see annex 5, paragraph 1.
2.6.1.1. Class A50-1 to 50-5 Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing.
2.6.1.2. Class A50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets.
2.6.2. Class B Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 2.
2.6.2.1. Class B50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads.
2.6.3. Class C Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye — see annex 5, paragraph 3:
2.6.3.1. Class C50-1 to 50-7 Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.3.2. Class C50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.4. Class D Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4:
2.6.4.1. Class D50-A Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment.
2.6.4.2. Class D50-B Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment.
2.6.4.3. Class D50-C and 50-D Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment.
2.6.4.4. Class D50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes.
2.6.5. Class E Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices — see annex 5, paragraph 5.
Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted.
Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked.
This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle.
2.6.6. Class F Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the load-bearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 6.
2.6.7. Class G Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer — see annex 5, paragraph 7.
2.6.7.1. Class G50 Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.7.2. Class G50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.8. Class H Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 8:
2.6.8.1. Class H50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins.
2.6.9. Class J Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel — see annex 5, paragraph 9.
2.6.10. Class K Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes — see annex 5, paragraph 10.
2.6.11. Class L Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4.
2.6.12. Class S Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards.
2.6.13. Class T Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair.
No.055 2010-08-28
class B / F3 (Front fog lamp) [No.019 2014-08-22] @ classes "B" or "F3" (Front fog lamp) Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Front fog lamps of different types" are front fog lamps that differ in such essential respects as:
1.4.2. Different "classes" ("B" or "F3") identified by particular photometric provisions:1.4.3. The characteristics of the optical system; (basic optical design, type/category of light source, LED module, DLS etc.),
No.019 2014-08-22
class I M 2 or M 3 vehicle [REG. No 661/2009] @ class I M 2 or M 3 vehicle safety, fuel efficiency, gear shift indicators, tyres + ƒ¿ 2. "class I M 2 or M 3 vehicle" means an M 2 or M 3 vehicle with a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver constructed with areas for standing passengers to allow frequent passenger movement; REG. No 661/2009
Class I, II, III (vehicle) [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Class I, II, III (vehicle) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1. For vehicles having a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are three classes of vehicles:
2.1.1.1. "Class I": vehicles constructed with areas for standing passengers, to allow frequent passenger movement.
2.1.1.2. "Class II": vehicles constructed principally for the carriage of seated passengers, and designed to allow the carriage of standing passengers in the gangway and/or in an area which does not exceed the space provided for two double seats.
2.1.1.3. "Class III": vehicles constructed exclusively for the carriage of seated passengers.
2.1.1.4. A vehicle may be regarded as belonging in more than one Class. In such a case it may be approved for each Class to which it corresponds.
No.107 2006-12-27
Class I`III (Vehicle) [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Vehicle (Class I`III) Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.1. For vehicles having a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are three classes of vehicles:
2.1.1.1. "Class I": vehicles constructed with areas for standing passengers, to allow frequent passenger movement.
2.1.1.2. "Class II": vehicles constructed principally for the carriage of seated passengers, and designed to allow the carriage of standing passengers in the gangway and/or in an area which does not exceed the space provided for two double seats.
2.1.1.3. "Class III": vehicles constructed exclusively for the carriage of seated passengers.
2.1.1.4. A vehicle may be regarded as belonging in more than one Class. In such a case it may be approved for each Class to which it corresponds.
No.107 2010-09-29
Class IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB, IVA. (Retro reflecting device) [No.003 2011-12-06] @ Class IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB, IVA. (Retro-reflecting device) Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. Retro-reflecting devices are divided into three classes according to their photometric characteristics: Class IA or IB, Class IIIA or IIIB, and Class IVA.
2.14. Retro-reflecting devices of Class IB and IIIB are devices combined with other signal lamps which are not watertight according to Annex 8, paragraph 1.1, and which are integrated into the body of a vehicle.
No.003 2011-12-06
Class of a passing beam [No.123 2010-08-24] @ Class of a passing beam Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Class" of a passing beam (C, V, E or W) means the designation of a passing beam, identified by particular provisions according to this Regulation and Regulation No 48 ( 1 );
No.123 2010-08-24
Class of mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Class of mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(a) Class I: "Interior rear-view mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.1 of this Regulation;
(b) Classes II and III: "Main exterior rear-view mirror", giving the fields of vision defined in para graphs 15.2.4.2 and 15.2.4.3 of this Regulation;
(c) Class IV: "Wide-angle exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.4 of this Regulation;
(d) Class V: "Close-proximity exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.5 of this Regulation;
(e) Class VI: "Front mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.6 of this Regulation;
(f) Class VII: Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork, giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.7 of this Regulation.
No.046 2014-08-08
Class of mirror [No.046 2010-07-10] @ Class of mirror Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13. "Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions.They are classified as follows:
- Class I: "Interior rear-view mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.1.
- Class II and III: "Main exterior rear-view mirror", giving the fields of vision defined in paragraphs 15.2.4.2 and 15.2.4.3.
- Class IV: "Wide-angle exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined inparagraph 15.2.4.4.
- Class V: "Close-proximity exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined inparagraph 15.2.4.5.
- Class VI: "Front mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.6.
- Class VII: Mirrors intended for L category vehicles with bodywork.
No.046 2010-07-10
Class of rear view mirror [No.081 2012-07-13] @ Class of rear-view mirrors Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Class of rear-view mirrors" means all devices having one or several features or functions in common.
The rear-view mirrors mentioned in this Regulation are grouped in Class "L".
No.081 2012-07-13
Class of rear-view mirror [Directive 2009/059/EC] @ Class of rear-view mirror Tractor (agricultural or forestry) 1.4. "Class of rear-view mirror" means all rear-view mirrors having one or more common characteristics or functions. Interior rear-view mirrors are grouped in class I. Exterior rear-view mirrors are grouped in class II. Directive 2009/059/EC
Class Vehicle [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Class I, II, III, A, B Vehicle Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Vehicle" means a vehicle of category M2 or M3 within the scope defined by paragraph 1 above.
2.1.1. For vehicles having a capacity exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are three classes of vehicles:
2.1.1.1. "Class I": vehicles constructed with areas for standing passengers, to allow frequent passenger movement;
2.1.1.2. "Class II": vehicles constructed principally for the carriage of seated passengers, and designed to allow the carriage of standing passengers in the gangway and/or in an area which does not exceed the space provided for two double seats;
2.1.1.3. "Class III": vehicles constructed exclusively for the carriage of seated passengers;
2.1.1.4. A vehicle may be regarded as belonging in more than one Class. In such a case it may be approved for each Class to which it corresponds.
2.1.2. For vehicles having a capacity not exceeding 22 passengers in addition to the driver, there are two classes of vehicles:
2.1.2.1. "Class A":vehicles designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has seats and shall have provision for standing passengers.
2.1.2.2. "Class B":vehicles not designed to carry standing passengers; a vehicle of this class has no provision for standing passengers.
No.107 2015-06-18
classe (Child restraint system) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ classe (Child restraint system) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3. The retention system of child restraint systems may be of two classes:
an integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is independent of any means directly connected to the vehicle;
a non-integral class if the retention of the child within the restraint system is dependent upon any means directly connected to the vehicle;
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt.
No.044 2011-09-09
Classe (Headlamp of different) [No.113 2014-06-14] @ Headlamps of different Classes (A or B or C or D or E) headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Headlamps of different gClasses (A or B or C or D or E)" mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.
1.6. However, in the case of a system consisting of two headlamps a device intended for the installation on the left side of the vehicle and the corresponding device intended for the installation on the right side of the vehicle shall be considered to be of the same type.
No.113 2014-06-14
Classes (A or B or C or D) (lamp of different, Head-) [No.113 2005-12-16] @ Headlamps of different Classes (A or B or C or D) Symmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. "Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B or C or D)" means headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.
No.113 2005-12-16
Classes (A or B) (lamp of different, Head-) [No.112 2005-12-16] @ Headlamps of different Classes (A or B) Asymmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.
No.112 2005-12-16
Classes A, B(Headlamp of different) [No.112 2010-08-31] @ Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.4. Headlamps of different "Classes" (A or B) mean headlamps identified by particular photometric provisions.
No.112 2010-08-31
classification code (Tyre) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Tyre classification code Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Tyre classification code" means the optional marking detailed in annex 10 that identifies the category of use and the particular type of tread pattern and application as specified by ISO 4251-4.
No.106 2010-09-30
CLASSIFICATION CODE (TYRE) [No.106 2010-09-30A10] @ TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE Tyres (agricultural vehicles) [ANNEX 10] TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE (Optional marking)
[•\] Classification code / Nomenclature
F-1 / Agricultural tractor steering wheel tyres: single rib tread
F-2 / Agricultural tractor steering wheel tyres: multiple rib tread
F-3 / Steering wheel tyres: industrial service (construction application)
G-1 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): traction service
G-2 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): flotation traction service
G-3 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): maximum flotation service
I-1 / Agricultural implement tyres: multi-rib tread
I-2 / Agricultural implement tyres: moderate traction service
I-3 / Agricultural implement tyres: traction tread
I-4 / Agricultural implement tyres: plough tail wheel service
I-5 / Agricultural implement tyres: steering service
I-6 / Agricultural implement tyres: Smooth tread
LS-1 / Logging and Forestry Service Tyres: regular tread
LS-2 / Logging and Forestry service tyres: intermediate tread
LS-3 / Logging and Forestry service tyres: deep tread
LS-4 / Logging and Forestry Service Tyres: shallow tread
R-1 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: regular tread
R-2 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: cane and rice service (deep tread)
R-3 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: flotation service (shallow tread)
R-4 / Drive wheel tyres: industrial service (construction application)
No.106 2010-09-30
CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENT [No.110 2015-06-30] @ CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 3. CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
Class 0 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
Class 5 Parts in contact with temperature range extending below – 40Ž.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.
CNG and/or LNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure, temperature and function, according to Figure 1-1.
No.110 2015-06-30
CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLE [No.073 2004-03-31A3] @ CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES Lateral protection (goods vehicles and their trailers) [ANNEX 3] CLASSIFICATION OF VEHICLES
1. Category N: Power-driven vehicles having at least four wheels or having three wheels when the maximum mass exceeds
1/metric/ton, and used for the carriage of goods
1.1. Category N2: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 3.5 but not exceeding 12 metric tons.
1.2. Category N3: Vehicles used for the carriage of goods and having a maximum mass exceeding 12 metric tons.
2. Category O: Trailers (including semi-trailers)
2.1. Category O3: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 3.5, but not exceeding 10 metric tons.
2.2. Category O4: Trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 10 metric btons.
No.073 2004-03-31
Classification pressure [No.067 2008-03-14] @ Classification pressure LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.1. "Pressure" means relative pressure versus atmospheric pressure, unless otherwise stated.
2.1.1. "Service pressure" means the settled pressure at a uniform gas temperature of 15 ‹C.
2.1.2. "Test pressure" means the pressure to which the component is subjected during the approval test.
2.1.3. "Working pressure" means the maximum pressure to which the component is designed to be subjected and on the basis of which its strength is determined.
2.1.4. "Operating pressure" means the pressure under normal operating conditions.
2.1.5. "Maximum operating pressure" means the maximum pressure in a component which might arise during operation.
2.1.6. "Classification pressure" means the maximum allowable operating pressure in a component according to its classification.
No.067 2008-03-14
CLD [No.049 2010-08-31223] @ CLD Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2.3. Abbreviations
CLD Chemiluminescent detector
No.049 2010-08-31
cleat (Tread) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Tread lug (or cleat) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Tread lug (or cleat)" means the solid-block element protruding from the base of the tread pattern;
No.106 2010-09-30
Clockwise [No.060 2014-10-15] @ Clockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Clockwise" means the direction of rotation around the axis of the part considered, following the motion of the hands of a clock when viewed from the upper or the outer side of the part considered.
No.060 2014-10-15
clockwise (Anti) [No.060 2014-10-15] @ Anticlockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Anticlockwise" has the inverse meaning of eClockwisef.
No.060 2014-10-15
clockwise (Anti-) [No.060 2004-03-31] @ Anticlockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Clockwise" means the direction of rotation around the axis of the part considered, following the motion of the hands of a clock when viewed from the upper or the outer side of the part considered;
2.11.1. "Anticlockwise" has the inverse meaning;
No.060 2004-03-31
Clockwise [No.060 2004-03-31] @ Clockwise Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Clockwise" means the direction of rotation around the axis of the part considered, following the motion of the hands of a clock when viewed from the upper or the outer side of the part considered;
2.11.1. "Anticlockwise" has the inverse meaning;
No.060 2004-03-31
Close proximity exterior mirror [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Close-proximity exterior mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.13."Class of mirror" means all devices having one or more common characteristics or functions. They are classified as follows:
(d) Class V: "Close-proximity exterior mirror", giving the field of vision defined in paragraph 15.2.4.5 of this Regulation;
No.046 2014-08-08
Close-coupling device (CCD) [No.102 2008-12-30] @ Close-coupling device (CCD) Close coupling devices 2.1.1. "Close-coupling device (CCD)" means a device which automatically provides sufficient space between the bodies of towing vehicles and trailers if additional clearance is needed during angular movement between them. Coupling devices having no adjusting effect on lengths and/or angles within the device are not covered by this Regulation; No.102 2008-12-30
closed tell tale (Circuit) [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether or not it is operating correctly;
No.053 2013-06-18
closed tell tale (Circuit) [No.074 2013-06-18] @ Circuit-closed tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Circuit-closed tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether or not it is operating correctly;
No.074 2013-06-18
Closed-circuit tell-tale [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Closed-circuit tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.19. "Closed-circuit tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether it is operating correctly or not; No.048 2008-05-23
Closed-circuit tell-tale [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Closed-circuit tell-tale Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Closed-circuit tell-tale" means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether it is operating correctly or not;
No.048 2011-12-06
closure warning system (Door) [No.011 2010-05-13] @ Door closure warning system door latches and door retention components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Door closure warning system" is a system that will activate a visual signal located where it can be clearly seen by the driver when a door latch system is not in its fully latched position and while the vehicle ignition is activated.
No.011 2010-05-13
CNG [No.110 2015-06-30] @ CNG (Compressed Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.43. "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG)" means natural gas that has been compressed and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.
No.110 2015-06-30
CNG (Container or cylinder) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ CNG-1`4 (Container or cylinder) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" (or cylinder) means any vessel used for the storage of compressed natural gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal;
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped);
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped);
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).
No.110 2011-05-07
CNG components for use in vehicle (Class) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Class (CNG components for use in vehicles) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
CNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure and function, according to figure 1-1.
Class 0 : High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 : Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 : Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 : Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 : Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.
No.110 2011-05-07
CNG components for use in vehicle (Class0`4) [No.110 2008-03-14] @ CNG components for use in vehicles (Class0`4) Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
CNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure and function, according to figure 1-1.
Class 0 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.
No.110 2008-03-14
CNG Electronic control unit [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Electronic control unit (CNG/LNG) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.38. "Electronic control unit (CNG/LNG)" means a device that controls the gas demand of the engine, and other engine parameters, and cuts off automatically the automatic valve, required by safety reason.
No.110 2015-06-30
CNG retrofit system (Approval of an) [No.115 2014-11-07] @ Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Approval of an LPG or CNG retrofit system" means the approval of the type of retrofit system to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG or CNG.
2.1.1. Specific LPG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.2. Specific CNG retrofit system of an approved type may consist of several components as classified and approved according to Regulation No 110, Part I and the specific vehicle instruction manual.
2.1.3. "A vehicle is considered mono-fuel", when, after the retrofit operation, it is designed primarily for permanent running on LPG or CNG, but may still have a petrol system for emergency purposes, where the capacity of the petrol tank does not exceed 15 litres.
2.1.4. "A vehicle is considered bi-fuel", when after the retrofit operation, it is equipped with a gas storage and a separate petrol storage with a capacity exceeding 15 litres, and is designed to run on only one fuel at a time. The simultaneous use of both fuels is limited in amount or duration.
2.1.5. "Master-slave system" means a retrofit system in which the LPG Electronic Control Unit (ECU) or CNG ECU is able to translate the petrol ECU control strategy in LPG or CNG operation.
2.1.6. "Original vehicle" means a vehicle before the installation of the retrofit system.
No.115 2014-11-07
CNG retrofit system (component of) [No.115 2014-11-07] @ components of CNG retrofit systems LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. For definitions of the components of CNG retrofit systems refer to Regulation No 110.
No.115 2014-11-07
CNG retrofit system of an approved type (Specific) [No.115 2014-11-07] @ Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Specific LPG or CNG retrofit system of an approved type" means systems, which do not differ in such respect as:
2.2.1. Retrofit system manufacturer (responsible for retrofit approval application);
2.2.2. Pressure regulator/vaporiser type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.3. Gas fuelling system type by the same manufacturer (i.e. induction mixer, injector device, vapour or liquid, single or multi-point injection system);
2.2.4. Sensors and actuators set types;
2.2.5. The fuel container type (i.e. LPG liquid take off/vapour pressure, LPG vapour take off, LPG liquid take off/pressurised by pump, pressurised CNG take off), the safety devices and fuel container accessories, as required by Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments, or Regulation No 110, where applicable (i.e. relief valve);
2.2.6. Fuel container fitting devices;
Note: With respect to paragraphs 2.2.4, 2.2.5 and 2.2.6 above, the manufacturer of the retrofit can insert in his installation manual other components, included in the approval, as interchangeable items (see para. 7).
2.2.7. ECU type by the same manufacturer;
2.2.8. Basic software principles and control strategy;
2.2.9. Installation manual (see para. 7);
2.2.10. End-user manual (see para. 7).
No.115 2014-11-07
CNG system [No.110 2015-06-30] @ CNG system using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.10. "CNG system" means an assembly of components (container(s) or cylinder(s), valves, flexible fuel lines, etc.) and connecting parts (rigid fuel lines, pipes fitting, etc.) fitted on motor vehicles using CNG in their propulsion system.
No.110 2015-06-30
CNG system [No.110 2008-03-14P2] @ CNG system Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) PART II
14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.3. "CNG system" means an assembly of components (container(s) or cylinder(s), valves, flexible fuel lines, etc.) and connecting parts (rigid fuel lines, pipes fitting, etc.) fitted on motor vehicles using CNG in their propulsion system.
No.110 2008-03-14
CNG system [No.110 2011-05-07p2] @ CNG system using compressed natural gas (CNG) PART II 14. DEFINITIONS
14.1.3. "CNG system" means an assembly of components (container(s) or cylinder(s), valves, flexible fuel lines, etc.) and connecting parts (rigid fuel lines, pipes fitting, etc.) fitted on motor vehicles using CNG in their propulsion system.
No.110 2011-05-07
CNG-1`4 [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Type of container using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.13."Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect of the dimensional and material characteristics as specified in Annex 3A. 4.13.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped)
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped)
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).
No.110 2015-06-30
CNG-1`4 [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ CNG-1, -2, -3, -4 Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
1. SCOPE
This annex sets out minimum requirements for light-weight refillable gas cylinders. The cylinders are intended only for the on-board storage of high pressure compressed natural gas as a fuel for automotive vehicles to which the cylinders are to be fixed. Cylinders may be of any steel, aluminium or non-metallic material, design or method of manufacture suitable for the specified service conditions. This annex does not cover metal liners or cylinders of stainless steels or of welded construction. Cylinders covered by this annex are Classified in Class 0, as described in paragraph 2. of this Regulation, and are:
CNG-1 Metal
CNG-2 Metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped)
CNG-3 Metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped)
CNG-4 Resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite)
yˆÈ‰º—ªz
No.110 2008-03-14
CNG-fuelling (Electronic control unit) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Electronic control unit (CNG-fuelling) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.24. "Electronic control unit (CNG-fuelling)" means a device which controls the gas demand of the engine, and other engine parameters, and cuts off automatically the automatic valve, required by safety reason.
No.110 2011-05-07
Coating [No.005 2014-05-29] @ Coating Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.005 2014-05-29
Coating [No.019 2014-08-22] @ Coating Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.019 2014-08-22
Coating [No.057 2014-05-01] @ Coating Headlamps (motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.057 2014-05-01
Coating [No.072 2014-03-14] @ Coating Headlamps (HS1) (motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.072 2014-03-14
Coating [No.098 2014-06-14] @ Coating gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.098 2014-06-14
Coating [No.112 2014-08-22] @ Coating headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing-beam or a driving-beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or light-emitting diode (LED) modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.112 2014-08-22
Coating [No.113 2014-06-14] @ Coating headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.113 2014-06-14
Coating [No.001 2001-05-14] @ Coating Asymmetric headlamps (R2 and/or HS1) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of alens;
No.001 2001-05-14
Coating [No.001 2010-07-10] @ Coating Asymmetric headlamps (R2 and/or HS1) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.001 2010-07-10
Coating [No.005 2001-05-14] @ Coating Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.005 2001-05-14
Coating [No.008 2001-05-14] @ Coating Headlamps (H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.008 2001-05-14
Coating [No.008 2010-07-10] @ Coating Headlamps (H1, H2, H3, HB3, HB4, H7, H8, H9, HIR1, HIR2 and/or H11 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.008 2010-07-10
Coating [No.019 2010-07-10] @ Coating Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.019 2010-07-10
Coating [No.020 2001-06-25] @ Coating Asymmetric headlamps (H4) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.020 2001-06-25
Coating [No.020 2010-07-10] @ Coating Asymmetric headlamps (H4) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.020 2010-07-10
coating [No.031 2001-06-25] @ coating Asymmetric headlamps (halogen sealed beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "coating," means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.031 2001-06-25
Coating [No.031 2010-07-17] @ Coating asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.031 2010-07-17
Coating [No.098 2001-06-25] @ Coating Headlamps with gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.098 2001-06-25
Coating [No.098 2010-06-30] @ Coating gas-discharge light sources 1. DEFINITIONS
1.3. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.098 2010-06-30
Coating [No.112 2005-12-16] @ Coating Asymmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.112 2005-12-16
Coating [No.112 2010-08-31] @ Coating headlamps emitting an asymmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament lamps and/or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.112 2010-08-31
Coating [No.113 2005-12-16] @ Coating Symmetrical headlamps (filament lamps) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.2. "Coating" means any product or products applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.113 2005-12-16
Coating [No.123 2006-12-27] @ Coating Adaptive Front-lighting Systems 1. DEFINITIONS
1.15. "Coating" means any product(s) applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.123 2006-12-27
Coating [No.123 2010-08-24] @ Coating Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.15. "Coating" means any product(s) applied in one or more layers to the outer face of a lens;
No.123 2010-08-24
CODE (CLASSIFICATION, TYRE) [No.106 2010-09-30A10] @ TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE Tyres (agricultural vehicles) [ANNEX 10] TYRE CLASSIFICATION CODE (Optional marking)
[•\] Classification code / Nomenclature
F-1 / Agricultural tractor steering wheel tyres: single rib tread
F-2 / Agricultural tractor steering wheel tyres: multiple rib tread
F-3 / Steering wheel tyres: industrial service (construction application)
G-1 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): traction service
G-2 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): flotation traction service
G-3 / Garden tractor tyres (implement tyres): maximum flotation service
I-1 / Agricultural implement tyres: multi-rib tread
I-2 / Agricultural implement tyres: moderate traction service
I-3 / Agricultural implement tyres: traction tread
I-4 / Agricultural implement tyres: plough tail wheel service
I-5 / Agricultural implement tyres: steering service
I-6 / Agricultural implement tyres: Smooth tread
LS-1 / Logging and Forestry Service Tyres: regular tread
LS-2 / Logging and Forestry service tyres: intermediate tread
LS-3 / Logging and Forestry service tyres: deep tread
LS-4 / Logging and Forestry Service Tyres: shallow tread
R-1 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: regular tread
R-2 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: cane and rice service (deep tread)
R-3 / Agricultural tractor drive wheel tyres: flotation service (shallow tread)
R-4 / Drive wheel tyres: industrial service (construction application)
No.106 2010-09-30
Code (Identification) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Identification Code Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Identification Code" identifies the brake discs or brake drums covered by the braking system approval according to this regulation. It contains at least the manufacturer's trade name or trademark and an identification number.
No.013 2016-02-18
code (Identification) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Identification code Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Identification code" identifies the brake discs or brake drums covered by the braking system approval according to this regulation. It contains at least the manufacturer's trade name or trademark and an identification number.
No.013H 2015-12-22
code (Identification) [No.090 2012-07-13] @ Identification code Replacement brake linings and their assemblies 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. Definitions regarding the approval of a replacement brake drum or a replacement brake disc.
2.3.2. "Identification code" identifies the brake discs or brake drums covered by the braking system approval according to Regulations Nos 13 and 13-H. It contains at least the manufacturer's trade name or trademark and an identification number.
The vehicle manufacturer shall provide on request of the technical service and/or approval authority the necessary information, which makes the link between the braking system type- approval and the corresponding identification code.
No.090 2012-07-13
code (Rolling) [No.097 2012-05-083] @ Rolling code alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.8. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.
No.097 2012-05-08
code (Rolling) [No.116 2012-02-16P1] @ Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.6. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.
No.116 2012-02-16
code (Rolling) [No.116 2012-02-16P4] @ Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.8. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.
No.116 2012-02-16
code (Rolling) [No.116 2010-06-30P1] @ Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.6. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.
No.116 2010-06-30
code (Rolling) [No.116 2010-06-30P4] @ Rolling code Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.8. "Rolling code" means an electronic code consisting of several elements the combination of which changes at random after each operation of the transmitting unit.
No.116 2010-06-30
code (trouble, Diagnostic) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ DTC (Diagnostic trouble code) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Diagnostic trouble code" (DTC) means a numeric or alphanumeric identifier which identifies or labels a malfunction;
No.049 2013-06-24
code (trouble, Diagnostic) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ DTC (Diagnostic trouble code) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.20. "Diagnostic trouble code (DTC)" means a numeric or alphanumeric identifier which identifies or labels a NO x Control Malfunction.
No.096 2014-03-22
code (Tyre classification) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Tyre classification code Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.40. "Tyre classification code" means the optional marking detailed in annex 10 that identifies the category of use and the particular type of tread pattern and application as specified by ISO 4251-4.
No.106 2010-09-30
coefficient (braking, Peak) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ PBC (Peak braking coefficient) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.
No.013H 2015-12-22
coefficient (braking, Peak) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Peak braking coefficient (PBC) Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Peak braking coefficient (PBC)": means the measure of tyre to road surface friction based on the maximum deceleration of a rolling tyre.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL) [No.003 2009-01-31] @ Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL) Retro-reflecting devices 2.10. "Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)" means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation. No.003 2009-01-31
Coefficient of luminous intensity [No.003 2011-12-06] @ CIL (Coefficient of luminous intensity) Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)" means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation.
No.003 2011-12-06
Coefficient of retro reflection [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol R') Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "Coefficient of retro-reflection (symbol RŒ)" means the quotient of the coefficient of luminous intensity R of a plane retro-reflecting surface and its area A
[Ž®]
No.104 2014-03-14
cold inflation pressure (Recommended) [No.064 2010-11-26] @ Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec) Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Recommended cold inflation pressure (Prec )" means the pressure recommended for each tyre position by the vehicle manufacturer, for the intended service conditions (e.g. speed and load) of the given vehicle, as defined on the vehicle placard and/or the vehicle owner's manual.
No.064 2010-11-26
cold start [No.083 2015-07-03] @ cold start Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. In the context of In Use Performance Ratio Monitoring (IUPRM), "cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start of less than or equal to 35 ‹C and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.
No.083 2015-07-03
Cold start [No.083a 2015-07-03] @ Cold start Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.35. "Cold start" means an engine coolant temperature (or equivalent temperature) at engine start less than or equal to 35Ž and less than or equal to 7 K higher than ambient temperature (if available) at engine start.
No.083 2015-07-03
Cold start device [No.083 2008-05-06] @ Cold start device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2.9. "Cold start device" means a device that temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start; No.083 2008-05-06
Cold start device [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Cold start device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Cold start device" means a device that temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start;
No.083 2012-02-15
Cold start device [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Cold start device Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Cold start device" means a device that temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start.
No.083 2015-07-03
Cold start device [No.101 2012-05-26] @ Cold start device CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Cold start device" means a device which enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine temporarily, to assist starting;
No.101 2012-05-26
Cold start device [No.101 2007-06-19] @ Cold start device CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Cold start device" means a device which enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine temporarily, to assist starting;
No.101 2007-06-19
cold start system or device [REG. No 692/2008] @ cold start system or device emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles
30. "cold start system or device" means a system which temporarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assisting the engine to start; REG. No 692/2008
Cold tyre inflation pressure [No.064 2010-11-26] @ Cold tyre inflation pressure Tyres (temporary use spare wheels/tyres) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Cold tyre inflation pressure" means the tyre pressure at ambient temperature, in the absence of any pressure build-up due to tyre usage.
No.064 2010-11-26
Cold-start device [No.024 2006-11-24] @ Cold-start device Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.4 "Cold-start device" means a device which by its operation temporarily increases the amount of fuel supplied to the engine and is intended to facilitate starting of the engine;
No.024 2006-11-24
collision (Time to) [No.131 2014-07-19] @ TTC (Time to collision) Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Time to collision (TTC)" means the value of time obtained by dividing the distance between the subject vehicle and the target by the relative speed of the subject vehicle and the target, at an instant in time.
No.131 2014-07-19
collision alert signal (Rear end) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ RECAS (Rear-end collision alert signal) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Rear-end collision alert signal (RECAS)" means an automatic signal given by the leading vehicle to the following vehicle. It warns that the following vehicle needs to take emergency action to avoid a collision
No.048 2011-12-06
Collision warning phase [No.131 2014-07-19] @ Collision warning phase Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Collision warning phase" means the phase directly preceding the emergency braking phase, during which the AEBS warns the driver of a potential forward collision.
No.131 2014-07-19
Colour of the fluorescent light of the device [No.069 2010-07-31] @ Colour of the fluorescent light of the device Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. Fluorescence
2.5.1. When certain substances are brought near to a source of ultraviolet or blue radiations, they emit radiations which are nearly always of longer wavelength than those producing the effect. This phenomenon is called fluorescence. By day and in twilight, fluorescent colours are brighter than normal colours because they reflect part of the light falling upon them and in addition they emit light. At night, they are not brighter than ordinary coloursEN
2.5.2. "Colour of the fluorescent light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the fluorescent light are given in paragraph 2.32 of Regulation No 48.
No.069 2010-07-31
colour of the light emitted by the lamp [No.048 2011-12-06] @ colours of the light emitted by the lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 5. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.15. The colours of the light emitted by the lamps are the following:
Main-beam headlamp: White
Dipped-beam headlamp: White
Front fog lamp: White or selective yellow
Reversing lamp: White
Direction-indicator lamp: Amber
Hazard warning signal: Amber
Stop lamp: Red
Emergency stop signal: Amber or red
Rear-end collision alert signal: Amber
Rear registration plate lamp: White
Front position lamp: White
Rear position lamp: Red
Front fog lamp: White or selective yellow
Rear fog lamp: Red
Parking lamp: White in front, red at the rear, amber if reciprocally incorporated in the side direction-indicator lamps or in the side-marker lamps.
Side-marker lamp: Amber; however the rearmost side- marker lamp can be red if it is grouped or combined or reciprocally incorporated with the rear position lamp, the rear end-outline marker lamp, the rear fog lamp, the stop lamp or is grouped or has part of the light-emitting surface in common with the rear retro-reflector.
End-outline marker lamp: White in front, red at the rear
Daytime running lamp: White
Rear retro-reflector, non-triangular: Red
Rear retro-reflector, triangular: Red
Front retro-reflector, non- triangular: Identical to incident light Side retro-reflector, non-triangular: Amber; however the rearmost side retro-reflector can be red if it is grouped or has part of the light-emitting surface in common with the rear position lamp, the rear end outline marker lamp, the rear fog lamp, the stop lamp, the red rearmost side-marker lamp or the rear retro-reflector, non-triangular.
Cornering lamp: White
Conspicuity marking: White to the front White or yellow to the side; Red or yellow to the rear
Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS): White
Exterior courtesy lamp: White
No.048 2011-12-06
Colour of the light emitted from a device [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Colour of the light emitted from a device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. Colour of the light emitted from a device
2.29.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] W12,W23, , ,W61
2.29.2. "Selective-yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] SY12,SY23, ,
2.29.3. "Amber" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] A12,A23, ,
2.29.4. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] R12,R23, ,
No.048 2011-12-06
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.005 2014-05-29] @ Colour of the light emitted from the device Asymmetric headlamps (Sealed Beam) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device." The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.
No.005 2014-05-29
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.019 2014-08-22] @ Colour of the light emitted from the device Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted, given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval, shall apply to this Regulation.
No.019 2014-08-22
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Colour of the light emitted from the device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.
No.053 2013-06-18
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.074 2013-06-18] @ Colour of the light emitted from the device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation
No.074 2013-06-18
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.113 2014-06-14] @ Colour of the light emitted from the device headlamps emitting a symmetrical passing beam or a driving beam or both and equipped with filament, gas-discharge light sources or LED modules 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.
No.113 2014-06-14
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.019 2010-07-10] @ Colour of the light emitted from the device Front fog lamps 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device." The definitions of the colour of the light emitted, givenin Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for typeapproval, shall apply to this Regulation.
No.019 2010-07-10
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.031 2010-07-17] @ Colour of the light emitted from the device asymmetrical sealed-beam headlamps (SB) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Colour of the light emitted from the device". The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.
No.031 2010-07-17
Colour of the light emitted from the device [No.086 2010-09-30] @ Colour of the light emitted from the device Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Colour of the light emitted from the device" The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.
No.086 2010-09-30
colour of the light reflected (Daytime) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Daytime colour of the light reflected Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. Daytime colour of the light reflected from a device
2.31.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] W12,W23, ,
2.31.2. "Yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] Y12,T23, ,
2.31.3. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] R12,R23, ,
No.048 2011-12-06
Colour of the light retro-reflected (Night time) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.30. Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected from a device excluding retro-reflective tires according to Regulation No 88
2.30.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] W12,W23, ,
2.30.2. "Yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: Y12,Y23, ,
2.30.3. "Amber" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries [•\] A12,A23, ,
2.30.4. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] R12,R23, ,
No.048 2011-12-06
Colour of the reflected light of the device [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Colour of the reflected light of the device Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.5. "Colour of the reflected light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraphs 2.30 of Regulation No 48.
No.104 2014-03-14
Colour of the reflected light of the device [No.003 2011-12-06] @ Colour of the reflected light of the device Retro-reflecting devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Colour of the reflected light of the device" The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraph 2.30 of Regulation No 48.
No.003 2011-12-06
Colour of the reflected light of the device [No.069 2010-07-31] @ Colour of the reflected light of the device Rear marking plates for slow moving vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. Definition of photometric terms
2.4.4. "Colour of the reflected light of the device." The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraphs 2.30 and 2.31 of Regulation No 48.
No.069 2010-07-31
COLOUR OF WHITE LIGHT [No.119A4 2014-03-25] @ COLOUR OF WHITE LIGHT Cornering lamps [ANNEX 4] COLOUR OF WHITE LIGHT (Chromaticity coordinates)
1. For checking the colorimetric characteristics, a source of light at a colour temperature of 2 856 K, corresponding to illuminant A of the international commission (CIE), shall be used. For lamps equipped with non-replaceable light sources (filament lamps and other), or light sources (replaceable or non-replaceable) operated together with an electronic light source control gear, the colorimetric characteristics should be verified with the light sources present in the lamp, in accordance with paragraph 7 of this Regulation.
2. The replaceable light source shall be subjected to the intensity, which produces the same colour as the illuminant A of the CIE.
No.119 2014-03-25
column (Steering) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Steering column protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Steering column" means the housing enclosing the steering shaft;
No.012 2013-03-27
Combination [No.062 2013-03-27] @ Combination Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Combination" means one of the specifically planned and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system;
No.062 2013-03-27
Combination [No.116 2012-02-16P1] @ Combination Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.4. "Combination" means one of the specifically developed and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system.
No.116 2012-02-16
Combination [No.018 2008-10-15] @ Combination Anti-theft 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Combination" means one of the specifically planned and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system;
No.018 2008-10-15
Combination [No.018 2010-05-13] @ Combination protection against unauthorized use 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Combination" means one of the specifically planned and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system;
No.018 2010-05-13
Combination [No.062 2004-03-31] @ Combination Anti-theft (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Combination" means one of the specifically planned and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system;
No.062 2004-03-31
Combination [No.116 2010-06-30P1] @ Combination Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 5. PART I: APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE OF CATEGORY M1 AND N1 WITH REGARD TO ITS DEVICES TO PREVENT UNAUTHORISED USE
5.1. DEFINITIONS
5.1.4. "Combination" means one of the specifically developed and constructed variations of a locking system which, when properly activated, permits operation of the locking system
No.116 2010-06-30
Combined [No.053 2013-06-18] @ Combined Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L3) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.4. "Combined" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces, but a common light source and a common lamp body;
No.053 2013-06-18
Combined [No.074 2013-06-18] @ Combined Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (L1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "lamp" means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamp and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps;
2.5.4. "Combined" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces, but a common light source and a common lamp body;
No.074 2013-06-18
Combined brake [No.060 2014-10-15] @ Combined brake Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Combined brake" means a system of operation (by hydraulic action or mechanical linkage, or both) whereby both the front and the rear brakes of the vehicle are brought into operation at least partially by the use of only one control.
No.060 2014-10-15
Combined brake system [No.078 2015-01-30] @ CBS (Combined brake system) Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Combined brake system (CBS)" means:
For vehicle categories L1 and L3:a service brake system where at least two brakes on different wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle categories L2 and L5:a service brake system where the brakes on all wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control.
For vehicle category L4:a service brake system where the brakes on at least the front and rear wheels are operated by the actuation of a single control. (If the rear wheel and sidecar wheel are braked by the same brake system, this is regarded as the rear brake.)
No.078 2015-01-30
Combined braking system [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Combined braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Combined braking system" means
2.9.1. in the case of vehicles of categories L1 and L3, a system whereby at least two brakes on different wheels are actuated in combination by the operation of a single control. This method of actuation requires a control which is independent of the second braking device which operates on one wheel only;
2.9.2. in the case of vehicles of categories L2 and L5, a braking device which operates on all the wheels;
2.9.3. in the case of vehicles of category L4, a braking device which operates at least on the front and rear wheel. Therefore a braking device which operates simultaneously on the rear wheel and on the sidecar wheel is regarded as a rear brake.
No.078 2004-03-31
combined deNOx- particulate filter [No.049 2008-04-12] @ combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);
No.049 2008-04-12
combined deNOx- particulate filter [No.049 2010-08-31] @ combined deNOx- particulate filter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "combined deNOx- particulate filter" means an exhaust aftertreatment system designed to concurrently reduce emissions of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and particulate pollutants (PT);
No.049 2010-08-31
Combined endurance braking system [No.013 2016-02-18] š Combined endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device.
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems;
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device;
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.
No.013 2016-02-18
Combined endurance braking system [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Combined endurance braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Endurance braking system" means an additional braking system having the capability to provide and to maintain a braking effect over a long period of time without a significant reduction in performance. The term "endurance braking system" covers the complete system including the control device,
2.15.1. The endurance braking system may comprise a single device or a combination of several devices. Each device may have its own control.
2.15.2. Control configurations for endurance braking systems:
2.15.2.1. "Independent endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is separated from that of the service and other braking systems,
2.15.2.2. "Integrated endurance braking system" means an endurance braking system whose control device is integrated with that of the service braking system in such a way that both endurance and service braking systems are applied simultaneously or suitably phased by operation of the combined control device,
2.15.2.3. "Combined endurance braking system" means an integrated endurance braking system, which in addition has a cut-out device, which allows the combined control to apply the service braking system alone.
No.013 2010-09-30
Combined lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] @ Combined lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.4. Combined lamps
"Combined lamps" means devices having separate lenses but a common light source and a common lamp body.
Directive 2009/061/EC
combined lamp [Directive 2009/067/EC] @ combined lamps installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.5. combined lamps
means lamps having separate illuminating surfaces but a common light source and a common lamp body;
Directive 2009/067/EC
Combined lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Combined lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.5. "Combined lamps" means devices having separate illuminating surfaces (1), but a common light source and a common lamp body; No.048 2008-05-23
Combined lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Combined lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.5. "Combined lamps" means devices having separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis ( 3 ), but a common light source and a common lamp body;
No.048 2011-12-06
Combined lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] @ Combined lamps Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.4. "Combined lamps" means devices having separate lenses but a common light source and a common lamp body;
No.086 2010-09-30
Combined service brake [No.060 2004-03-31] @ Combined service brake Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Combined service brake" means a system of operation (by hydraulic action or mechanical linkage, or both) whereby both the front and the rear brakes of the vehicle are brought into operation at least partially by the use of only one control;
No.060 2004-03-31
combustion engine vehicle (Internal) [No.101 2012-05-26] @ Internal combustion engine vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Internal combustion engine vehicle" means vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine only;
No.101 2012-05-26
combustion engine vehicle (Internal) [No.101 2007-06-19] @ Internal combustion engine vehicle CO2 emission/fuel consumption (M1) and electric energy consumption and range (M1 and N1) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Internal combustion engine vehicle" means vehicle powered by an internal combustion engine only;
No.101 2007-06-19
combustion heater (Type of) [No.122 2010-06-30P2] @ Type of combustion heater Heating systems 6. PART II . APPROVAL OF A HEATING SYSTEM WITH REGARD TO ITS OPERATIONAL SAFETY
6.1. Definitions
6.1.3. "Type of combustion heater" means devices which do not differ in essential respects such as:
- fuel type (e.g. liquid or gaseous),
- transfer medium (e.g. air or water),
- vehicle location (e.g. passenger compartment or load area).
No.122 2010-06-30
Combustion heater [No.122 2010-06-30P2] @ Combustion heater Heating systems 6. PART II . APPROVAL OF A HEATING SYSTEM WITH REGARD TO ITS OPERATIONAL SAFETY
6.1. Definitions
6.1.2. "Combustion heater" means a device directly using liquid or gaseous fuel and not using the waste heat from the engine used for propulsion of the vehicle.
No.122 2010-06-30
commanded braking (Automatically) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013H 2015-12-22
commanded braking (Automatically) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Automatically commanded braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013 2010-09-30
commanded braking (Automatically) [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Automatically commanded braking Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Automatically commanded braking" means a function within a complex electronic control system where actuation of the braking system(s) or brakes of certain axles is made for the purpose of generating vehicle retardation with or without a direct action of the driver, resulting from the automatic evaluation of on-board initiated information.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Commanded stop phase [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Commanded stop phase using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.75. "Commanded stop phase" defines the period of time during which the combustion engine is switched off automatically for fuel saving and is allowed to start again automatically
No.110 2015-06-30
Common space [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Common space Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Common space" means an area on which more than one tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol, or other message may be displayed but not simultaneously.
No.013H 2015-12-22
Common space [No.060 2014-10-15] @ Common space Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Common space" means an area on which more than one tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol, or other message may be displayed but not simultaneously.
No.060 2014-10-15
Common space [No.121 2016-01-08] @ Common space Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbol) may be displayed but not simultaneously.
No.121 2016-01-08
Common space [No.130 2014-06-18] @ Common space Lane Departure Warning Systems (LDWS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbols) may be displayed, but not simultaneously.
No.130 2014-06-18
Common space [No.131 2014-07-19] @ Common space Advanced emergency Braking Systems (AEBS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbol) may be displayed, but not simultaneously.
No.131 2014-07-19
Common space [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Common space Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Common space" means an area on which more than one tell-tale, indicator, identification symbol, or other message may be displayed but not simultaneously.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Common space [No.121 2010-07-10] @ Common space Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Common space" means an area on which two or more information functions (e.g. symbol) may bedisplayed but not simultaneously.
No.121 2010-07-10
communication (Data) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Data communication Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Data communication" means the transfer of digital data under the rules of a protocol.
No.013 2016-02-18
communication (Data) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Data communication Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Data communication" means the transfer of digital data under the rules of a protocol.
No.013 2010-09-30
communication staircase (Inter-) [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Intercommunication staircase Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.37. "Intercommunication staircase" means a staircase which allows communication between the upper and lower decks
No.107 2010-09-29
compartment (Driver) [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Driver's compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for driver's exclusive use except in the case of an emergency and containing the driver's seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving or operating the vehicle.
No.107 2015-06-18
compartment (Driver's) [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Driver's compartment Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for the driver's exclusive use and containing the driver's seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving the vehicle.
No.066 2007-12-06
compartment (Driver's) [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Driver's compartment Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for the driverfs exclusive use and containing the driverfs seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving the vehicle.
No.066 2011-03-30
compartment (Driver's) [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Driver's compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for driver's exclusive use except in the case of an emergency and containing the driver's seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving or operating the vehicle.
No.107 2006-12-27
compartment (Driver's) [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Driver's compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Driver's compartment" means the space intended for driverfs exclusive use except in the case of an emergency and containing the driverfs seat, the steering wheel, controls, instruments and other devices necessary for driving or operating the vehicle.
No.107 2010-09-29
compartment (Engine) [No.108 2015-04-21] @ Engine compartment burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.3. "Engine compartment" means the compartment in which the engine is installed and in which a combustion heater may be installed.
No.108 2015-04-21
compartment (heating, Separate) [No.108 2015-04-21] @ Separate heating compartment burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.4. "Separate heating compartment" means a compartment for a combustion heater located outside the interior compartment and the engine compartment.
No.108 2015-04-21
compartment (Interior) [No.108 2015-04-21] @ Interior compartment burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.2. "Interior compartment" means any compartment intended for passengers, drivers and/or crew bounded by the interior facing surface(s) of:
(a) the ceiling;
(b) the floor;
(c) the front, rear and side walls,
(d) the doors;
(e) the outside glazing.
No.108 2015-04-21
compartment (Luggage) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Luggage compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.18. "Luggage compartment" means the space in the vehicle for luggage accommodation, bounded by the roof, hood, floor, side walls, as well as by the barrier and enclosure provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with live parts, being separated from the passenger compartment by the front bulkhead or the rear bulkhead.
No.100 2011-02-14
compartment (Luggage) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Luggage compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Luggage compartment" means the space in the vehicle for luggage accommodation, bounded by the roof, hood, floor, side walls, as well as by the barrier and enclosure provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with live parts, being separated from the passenger compartment by the front bulkhead or the rear bulk head.
No.100 2015-03-31
compartment (Passenger) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Passenger compartment protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. Passenger compartment
2.16.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant's protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support.
2.16.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.
No.012 2013-03-27
compartment (Passenger) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Passenger compartment Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. Passenger compartment
2.7.1. "Passenger compartment with regard to occupant protection" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
2.7.2. "Passenger compartment for electric safety assessment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the electrical protection barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with high voltage live parts.
No.094 2012-09-20
compartment (Passenger) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Passenger compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, window glass, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the power train from direct contact with live parts
No.100 2011-02-14
compartment (Passenger) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Passenger compartment Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, window glass, front bulkhead and rear bulkhead, or rear gate, as well as by the barriers and enclosures provided for protecting the occupants from direct contact with live parts.
No.100 2015-03-31
compartment (Passenger) [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Passenger compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Passenger compartment" means a space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes, toilets or baggage/goods compartments.
No.107 2015-06-18
compartment (passenger) [No.034 2011-04-28] @ passenger compartment Fire risks PART I - APPROVAL OF VEHICLES WITH REGARD TO THEIR FUEL TANKS
4. DEFINITIONS5. REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID FUEL TANKS
4.3. "passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing, front bulkhead, and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear seat back support;
No.034 2011-04-28
compartment (Passenger) [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Passenger compartment Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Passenger compartment" means the space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes or toilets.
No.066 2007-12-06
compartment (Passenger) [No.066 2011-03-30] @ Passenger compartment(s) Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Passenger compartment(s)" means the space(s) intended for passengersf use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes or toilets.
No.066 2011-03-30
compartment (Passenger) [No.094 2010-05-28] @ Passenger compartment Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
No.094 2010-05-28
compartment (Passenger) [No.095 2007-11-30] @ Passenger compartment Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupant accommodation, bounded by the roof, floor, side walls, doors, outside glazing and front bulkhead and the plane of the rear compartment bulkhead or the plane of the rear-seat back support;
No.095 2007-11-30
compartment (Passenger) [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Passenger compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Passenger compartment" means a space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes, toilets or baggage/goods compartments.
No.107 2006-12-27
compartment (Passenger) [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Passenger compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Passenger compartment" means a space intended for passengers' use excluding any space occupied by fixed appliances such as bars, kitchenettes, toilets or baggage/goods compartments.
No.107 2010-09-29
compartment (Passenger) [No.118 2010-07-10] @ Passenger compartment Fire resistance of interior materials 2. DEFINITIONS: General
2.2. "Passenger compartment" means the space for occupantsf accommodation including bar, kitchen, toilet, etc.), bounded by:
- the roof,
- the floor,
- the side walls,
- the doors,
- the outside glazing,
- the rear compartment bulkhead, or the plane of the rear seat,
- back support,
- at the driver's side of the longitudinal vertical median plane of the vehicle, the vertical transversal plane through the driver's R-point as defined in Regulation No 17,
- at the opposite side of the longitudinal vertical median plane of the vehicle, the front bulkhead.
No.118 2010-07-10
compartment (Passenger) [No.122 2010-06-30] @ Passenger compartment Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.7. "Passenger compartment" means the interior part of the vehicle used to accommodate the driver and any passengers.
No.122 2010-06-30
compartment (passenger, Heating system for the) [No.122 2010-06-30] @ Heating system for the passenger compartment Heating systems 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.4. "Heating system for the passenger compartment" means any type of device designed to increase the temperature of the passenger compartment.
No.122 2010-06-30
compartment (Separate) [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Separate compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Separate compartment" means a space in the vehicle which may be occupied by passengers or crew when the vehicle is in use and which is separated from any other passenger or crew space, except where any partition allows passengers to see into the next passenger space, and is connected by a gangway without doors.
No.107 2015-06-18
compartment (Separate) [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Separate compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Separate compartment" means a space in the vehicle which may be occupied by passengers or crew when the vehicle is in use and which is separated from any other passenger or crew space, except where any partition allows passengers to see into the next passenger space, and is connected by a gangway without doors.
No.107 2006-12-27
compartment (Separate) [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Separate compartment Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Separate compartment" means a space in the vehicle which may be occupied by passengers or crew when the vehicle is in use and which is separated from any other passenger or crew space, except where any partition allows passengers to see into the next passenger space, and is connected by a gangway without doors
No.107 2010-09-29
compatibility (Electromagnetic) [No.010 2012-09-20] @ EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Electromagnetic compatibility" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.
No.010 2012-09-20
compatibility (Electromagnetic) [No.010 2010-05-08] @ Electromagnetic compatibility Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Electromagnetic compatibility" means the ability of a vehicle or component(s) or separate technical unit(s) to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.
No.010 2010-05-08
competition (designed for, Tyre) [No.117 2011-11-23] @ Tyres designed for competition Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Tyres designed for competition" means tyres intended to be fitted to vehicles involved in motor sport competition and not intended for non-competitive on-road use.
No.117 2011-11-23
complete system [No.123 2006-12-27A4] @ complete system Adaptive Front-lighting Systems [Annex 4] TESTS FOR STABILITY OF PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE OF SYSTEMS IN OPERATION
(a) "complete system" shall be understood to mean the complete right and left side of a system itself including electronic light source control-gear(s) and/or supply and operating device(s) and those surrounding body parts and lamps which could influence its thermal dissipation. Each installation unit of the system and lamp(s), if any, of the complete system may be tested separately;
No.123 2006-12-27
complete vehicle (test on a, Rollover) [No.066 2007-12-06] @ Rollover test on a complete vehicle Strength of superstructure (buses) 2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Rollover test on a complete vehicle" means a test on a complete, full-scale vehicle to prove the required strength of the superstructure.
No.066 2007-12-06
Component [No.097 2012-05-08a] @ Component alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Component" means a device subject to the requirements of this Regulation and intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved independently of a vehicle where this Regulation makes express provisions for so doing.
No.097 2012-05-08
Component [No.116 2012-02-16] @ Component Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 2. DEFINITIONS: GENERAL
2.1. "Component" means a device subject to the requirements of this Regulation and intended to be part of a vehicle, which may be type-approved independently of a vehicle where this Regulation makes express provisions for so doing;
No.116 2012-02-16
COMPONENT (CLASSIFICATION OF) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 3. CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
Class 0 High pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 3 MPa and up to 26 MPa.
Class 1 Medium pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 2 Low pressure parts including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 20 kPa and up to 450 kPa.
Class 3 Medium pressure parts as safety valves or protected by safety valve including tubes and fittings containing CNG at a pressure higher than 450 kPa and up to 3 000 kPa (3 MPa).
Class 4 Parts in contact with gas subject to the pressure lower than 20 kPa.
Class 5 Parts in contact with temperature range extending below – 40Ž.
A component can consist of several parts, each part classified in its own class with regard to maximum working pressure and function.
CNG and/or LNG components for use in vehicles shall be classified with regard to the working pressure, temperature and function, according to Figure 1-1.
No.110 2015-06-30
component (emission related, Critical) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Critical emission-related components Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Critical emission-related components" means the following components which are designed primarily for emission control: any exhaust after-treatment system, the ECU and its associated sensors and actuators, and the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system including all related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing;
No.049 2013-06-24
component (emission related, Critical) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Critical emission-related components Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.15. "Critical emission-related components" means the components which are designed primarily for emission control, that is, any exhaust after-treatment system, the electronic engine control unit and its associated sensors and actuators, and the EGR system including all related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing;
No.096 2014-03-22
component (Multi functional) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Multi-functional component using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.7. "Multi-functional component" means any of the above mentioned specific components combined or fitted together as a component.
No.110 2015-06-30
component (Specific) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Specific components using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.6. "Specific components" means:
(a) Container (cylinder or tank);
(b) Accessories fitted to the container;
(c) Pressure regulator;
(d) Automatic valve;
(e) Manual valve;
(f) Gas supply device;
(g) Gas flow adjuster;
(h) Flexible fuel line;
(i) Rigid fuel line;
(j) Filling unit or receptacle;
(k) Non-return valve or check valve;
(l) Pressure relief valve (discharge valve) primary and secondary;
(m) Pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
(n) Filter;
(o) Pressure or temperature sensor/indicator;
(p) Excess flow valve;
(q) Service valve;
(r) Electronic control unit;
(s) Gas-tight housing;
(t) Fitting;
(u) Ventilation hose;
(v) Pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered);
(w) Fuel rail;
(x) Heat exchanger/vaporiser;
(y) Natural gas detector;
(z) Fuel pump (for LNG).
No.110 2015-06-30
component (Specific) [No.110 2008-03-14] @ Specific component Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.2. "Specific component" means:
(a) container (or cylinder),
(b) accessories fitted to the cylinder
(c) pressure regulator,
(d) automatic valve,
(e) manual valve,
(f) gas supply device,
(g) gas flow adjuster,
(h) flexible fuel line,
(i) rigid fuel line,
(j) filling unit or receptacle,
(k) non-return valve or non-return valve,
(l) pressure relief valve (discharge valve),
(m) pressure relief device (temperature triggered),
(n) filter,
(o) pressure or temperature sensor/indicator,
(p) excess flow valve,
(q) service valve,
(r) electronic control unit,
(s) gas-tight housing,
(t) fitting,
(u) ventilation hose.
2.2.1. Many of the components mentioned above can be combined or fitted together as a "multi-functional component".
No.110 2008-03-14
component (Specific) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Specific component using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.2. "Specific component" means:
(a) container (or cylinder);
(b) accessories fitted to the cylinder;
(c) pressure regulator;
(d) automatic valve;
(e) manual valve;
(f) gas supply device;
(g) gas flow adjuster;
(h) flexible fuel line;
(i) rigid fuel line;
(j) filling unit or receptacle;
(k) non-return valve or non-return valve;
(l) pressure relief valve (discharge valve);
(m) pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
(n) filter;
(o) pressure or temperature sensor/indicator;
(p) excess flow valve;
(q) service valve;
(r) electronic control unit;
(s) gas-tight housing;
(t) fitting;
(u) ventilation hose;
(v) pressure relief device (PRD) (pressure triggered).
2.2.1. Many of the components mentioned above can be combined or fitted together as a "multi- functional component".
No.110 2011-05-07
component (Type of a) [No.108 2015-04-21] @ Type of a component burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.1. "Type of a component" means components which do not differ in such essential respects as:
6.1.1.1. The manufacturer's type designation,
6.1.1.2. The intended use (seat upholstery, roof lining, insulation, etc.),
6.1.1.3. The base material(s) (e.g. wool, plastic, rubber, blended materials),
6.1.1.4. The number of layers in the case of composite materials, and
6.1.1.5. Other characteristics in so far as they have an appreciable effect on the performance prescribed in this Regulation.
No.108 2015-04-21
component (Type of a) [No.118 2010-07-10II] @ Type of a component Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.1. "Type of a component" means components which do not differ in such essential respects as:
6.1.1.1. the manufacturer's type designation,
6.1.1.2. the intended use (seat upholstery, roof lining, etc.),
6.1.1.3. the base material(s) (e.g. wool, plastic, rubber, blended materials),
6.1.1.4. the number of layers in the case of composite materials, and
6.1.1.5. other characteristics in so far as they have an appreciable effect on the performance prescribed inthis Regulation.
No.118 2010-07-10
component (Type of) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Type of components using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.39. "Type of components" as mentioned in paragraphs 4.17 to 4.38 (above) means components that do not differ in such essential respect as materials, working pressure and operating temperatures.
No.110 2015-06-30
component (Type of) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Type of components using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.25. "Type of components" as mentioned in paragraphs 2.6 to 2.23 above means components which do not differ in such essential respect as materials, working pressure and operating temperatures.
No.110 2011-05-07
Component of a braking system [No.013 2016-02-18] š Component of a braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of a braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system;
No.013 2016-02-18
Component of a braking system [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Component of a braking system Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of a braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system;
No.013 2010-09-30
Component of an exhaust system [No.041 2012-11-14] @ Component of an exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.5. "Component of an exhaust or silencing system" means one of the individual components which together form the exhaust system (such as exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the intake system (air filter) if any.
If the engine has to be equipped with an intake system (air filter and/or intake noise absorber) in order to comply with the maximum permissible sound levels, the filter and/or absorber shall be treated as components having the same importance as the exhaust system.
No.041 2012-11-14
Component of an silencing system [No.041 2012-11-14] @ Component of an exhaust or silencing system noise (motor cycles) 2. DEFINITIONS, TERMS AND SYMBOLS
2.5. "Component of an exhaust or silencing system" means one of the individual components which together form the exhaust system (such as exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the intake system (air filter) if any.
If the engine has to be equipped with an intake system (air filter and/or intake noise absorber) in order to comply with the maximum permissible sound levels, the filter and/or absorber shall be treated as components having the same importance as the exhaust system.
No.041 2012-11-14
component of CNG retrofit system [No.115 2014-11-07] @ components of CNG retrofit systems LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. For definitions of the components of CNG retrofit systems refer to Regulation No 110.
No.115 2014-11-07
component of LPG retrofit system [No.115 2014-11-07] @ components of LPG retrofit systems LPG-CNG retrofit systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. For definitions of the components of LPG retrofit systems refer to Regulation No 67, 01 series of amendments.
No.115 2014-11-07
Component of the braking equipment [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Component of the braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of the braking equipment" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking equipment.
No.013H 2015-12-22
Component of the braking equipment [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Component of the braking equipment Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component of the braking equipment" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking equipment.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Component of the braking system [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Components of the braking system Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Components of the braking system" means one of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking system.
No.078 2015-01-30
component of the entrance angle (First) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ First component of the entrance angle (symbol ƒÀ1) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.10. "First component of the entrance angle (symbol ƒÀ 1 )" means the angle from the illumination axis to the plane containing the reference axis and the first axis; range: – 180‹ ƒ ƒÀ1 ƒ 180‹;
No.104 2014-03-14
component of the entrance angle (Second) [No.104 2014-03-14] @ Second component of the entrance angle (symbol ƒÀ2) Retro-reflective markings (heavy and long vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3.11. "Second component of the entrance angle (symbol ƒÀ 2 )" means the angle from the plane containing the observation half-plane to the reference axis; range – 90‹ ƒ ƒÀ2 ƒ 90‹;
No.104 2014-03-14
Component(s) of the braking device [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Component(s) of the braking device Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Component(s) of the braking device" means one or more of the individual parts which, when assembled, constitute the braking device;
No.078 2004-03-31
composite container (All-) [No.067 2008-03-14] @ All-composite container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" means any vessel used for the storage of liquefied petroleum gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
(i) a standard cylindrical container with a cylindrical shell, two dished ends either torispherical or elliptical and the required openings;
(ii) a special container: other containers than standard cylindrical containers. The dimensional characteristics are given in Annex 10, Appendix 5;
2.3.2. "All-composite container" means a container made only of composite materials with a non metallic liner.
2.3.3. "Batch of containers" means a maximum of 200 containers of the same type produced consecutively on the same production line.
No.067 2008-03-14
Composite cylinder [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Composite cylinder using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.53. "Composite cylinder" means a cylinder made of resin impregnated continuous filament wound over a metallic or non-metallic liner. Composite cylinders using non-metallic liners are referred to as all-composite cylinders.
No.110 2015-06-30
composite cylinder (Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Batch - composite cylinders using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.49. "Batch — composite cylinders" means a "batch" i.e. a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.
No.110 2015-06-30
composite cylinder [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ composite cylinder Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.8. composite cylinder: A cylinder made of resin impregnated continuous filament wound over a metallic or non-metallic liner. Composite cylinders using non-metallic liners are referred to as all-composite cylinders.
No.110 2008-03-14
composite cylinders (batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ batch - composite cylinders Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.4. batch - composite cylinders: A "batch" shall be a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having
the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.
No.110 2008-03-14
Composite material [No.108 2015-04-21] @ Composite material burning behaviour and/or the capability to repel fuel or lubricant of materials 6.1. Definitions
6.1.3. "Composite material" means a material composed of several layers of similar or different materials intimately held together at their surfaces by cementing, bonding, cladding, welding, etc. When different materials are connected together intermittently (for example, by sewing, high-frequency welding, riveting), such materials shall not be considered as composite materials.
No.108 2015-04-21
Composite material [No.118 2010-07-10II] @ Composite material Fire resistance of interior materials 6. PART II - APPROVAL OF A COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO ITS BURNING BEHAVIOUR
6.1. Definitions
6.1.3. "Composite material" means a material composed of several layers of similar or different materialsintimately held together at their surfaces by cementing, bonding, cladding, welding, etc. When different materials are connected together intermittently (for example, by sewing, high-frequency welding, riveting), such materials shall not be considered as composite materials.
No.118 2010-07-10
Compressed Natural Gas [No.110 2015-06-30] @ CNG (Compressed Natural Gas) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.43. "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG)" means natural gas that has been compressed and stored for use as a vehicle fuel.
No.110 2015-06-30
compression chamber (Spring) [No.013 2010-09-30A08] @ Spring compression chamber Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 8] Provisions relating to specific conditions for spring braking systems
1. DEFINITION
1.2. "Spring compression chamber" means the chamber where the pressure variation that induces the compression of the spring is actually produced.
No.013 2010-09-30
Compression ignition engine [No.024 2006-11-24] @ Compression ignition (C.I.) engine Diesel smoke and power 2. DEFINITIONS COMMON TO PARTS I, II AND III
2.3 "Compression ignition (C.I.) engine" means an engine which operates on the compression-ignition principle (e.g. diesel engine);
No.024 2006-11-24
Concealable illuminating lamp [Directive 2009/061/EC] @ Concealable illuminating lamp installation of lighting and light-signalling devices on wheeled agricultural and forestry tractors [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.5.6. Concealable illuminating lamp
"Concealable illuminating lamp" means a headlamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the headlamp or by any other suitable means. The term eretractablef is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork.
Directive 2009/061/EC
Concealable illuminating lamp [No.086 2010-09-30] @ Concealable illuminating lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (agricultural or forestry) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.6. "Concealable illuminating lamp" means a headlamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the headlamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;
No.086 2010-09-30
Concealable lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Concealable lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.8. "Concealable lamp" means a lamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use.
This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the lamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;
No.048 2008-05-23
Concealable lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Concealable lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.8. "Concealable lamp" means a lamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the lamp or by any other suitable means. The term "retractable" is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;
No.048 2011-12-06
condensation (Aqueous) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Aqueous condensation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.5. "Aqueous condensation" means the precipitation of water-containing constituents from a gas phase to a liquid phase. Aqueous condensation is a function of humidity, pressure, temperature, and concentrations of other constituents such as sulphuric acid. These parameters vary as a function of engine intake-air humidity, dilution-air humidity, engine air-to-fuel ratio, and fuel composition - including the amount of hydrogen and sulphur in the fuel;
No.096 2014-03-22
conditioning cycle (pre-) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] @ preconditioning cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"preconditioning cycle" means the running of at least three consecutive OBD test cycles or emission test cycles for the purpose of achieving stability of the engine operation, the emission control system and OBD monitoring readiness;
No.049 2008-04-12
Conductive connection [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Conductive connection Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Conductive connection" means the connection using connectors to an external power supply when the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) is charged.
No.100 2011-02-14
Conductive connection [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Conductive connection Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Conductive connection" means the connection using connectors to an external power supply when the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS) is charged.
No.100 2015-03-31
conductive part (Exposed) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Exposed conductive part protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.
No.012 2013-03-27
conductive part (Exposed) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Exposed conductive part Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools,
No.094 2012-09-20
conductive part (Exposed) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Exposed conductive part Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.20. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection degree IPXXB and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.
No.095 2015-07-10
conductive part (Exposed) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Exposed conductive part Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection degree IPXXB, and which becomes electrically energized under isolation failure conditions.
No.100 2011-02-14
conductive part (Exposed) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Exposed conductive part Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Exposed conductive part" means the conductive part which can be touched under the provisions of the protection IPXXB, and which becomes electrically energised under isolation failure conditions. This includes parts under a cover that can be removed without using tools.
No.100 2015-03-31
Confirmed DTC [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Confirmed and active DTC Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.10. "Confirmed and active DTC" means a DTC that is stored during the time the NCD system concludes that a malfunction exists.
No.096 2014-03-22
CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION [No.083 2015-07-03] @ COP (CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 8. CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION (COP)
8.1. Every vehicle bearing an approval mark as prescribed under this Regulation shall conform, with regard to components affecting the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by the engine, emissions from the crankcase and evaporative emissions, to the vehicle type approved. The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the 1958 Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/ 505/Rev.2), with the following requirements: [—ª]
No.083 2015-07-03
conformity of production testing [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Routine testing (or conformity of production testing) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.54. "Routine testing" (or conformity of production testing), means the testing of a number of restraint systems selected from a single batch to verify the extent to which they satisfy the requirements.
No.129 2014-03-29
connect (dis-, Automatic) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Automatic disconnect Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train,
No.094 2012-09-20
connect (dis, Automatic) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Automatic disconnect Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Automatic disconnect" means a device that when triggered, galvanically separates the electrical energy sources from the rest of the high voltage circuit of the electrical power train.
No.095 2015-07-10
connected to the electric circuit (Chassis) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Chassis connected to the electric circuit Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.39. "Chassis connected to the electric circuit" means AC and DC electric circuits galvanically connected to the electrical chassis.
No.100 2015-03-31
connection (Conductive) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Conductive connection Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Conductive connection" means the connection using connectors to an external power supply when the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) is charged.
No.100 2011-02-14
connection (Conductive) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Conductive connection Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Conductive connection" means the connection using connectors to an external power supply when the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS) is charged.
No.100 2015-03-31
connector (Automated) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Automated connector Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Automated connector" means a system through which the electric and pneumatic connection, between the towing vehicle and towed vehicle is made automatically without direct intervention of a human operator.
No.013 2016-02-18
connector (ISOFIX top tether) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ ISOFIX top tether connector Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.
No.044 2011-09-09
connector (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ ISOFIX top tether connector safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage;
No.014 2015-08-19
connector (tether, top, ISOFIX) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ ISOFIX top tether connector Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "ISOFIX top tether strap" means a webbing strap (or equivalent) which extends from the top of an ISOFIX Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX top tether anchorage, and which is equipped with an adjustment device, a tension-relieving device, and an ISOFIX top tether connector.
2.13.1. "ISOFIX top tether anchorage" means a feature fulfilling the requirements of Regulation No. 14, such as a bar, located in a defined zone, designed to accept an ISOFIX top tether connector and transfer its restraint force to the vehicle structure.
2.13.2. "ISOFIX top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage.
2.13.3. "ISOFIX top tether hook" means an ISOFIX top tether connector typically used to attach an ISOFIX top tether strap to an ISOFIX top tether anchorage as defined in Figure 3 of Regulation No. 14.
2.13.4. "ISOFIX top tether attachment" is a device to secure the ISOFIX top tether strap to the ISOFIX Child Restraint System.
No.129 2014-03-29
connector (tether, top, Isofix) [No.014 2007-12-06] @ Isofix top tether connector Seat-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Isofix top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top tether anchorage.
No.014 2007-12-06
connector (tether, top, Isofix) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ Isofix top tether connector Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Isofix top tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top tether anchorage.
No.044 2007-11-23
connector (top-tether, Isofix) [No.014 2011-04-28] @ Isofix top-tether connector safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Isofix top-tether connector" means a device intended to be attached to an Isofix top-tether anchorage.
No.014 2011-04-28
Conspicuity marking [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Conspicuity marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.17. "Conspicuity marking" means a device intended to increase the conspicuity of a vehicle, when viewed from the side or rear, by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;g No.048 2008-05-23
Conspicuity marking [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Conspicuity marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.17. "Conspicuity marking" means a device intended to increase the conspicuity of a vehicle, when viewed from the side or rear (or in the case of trailers, additionally from the front), by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;
2.7.17.1. "Contour marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal and vertical dimensions (length, width and height) of a vehicle;
2.7.17.1.1. "Full contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the outline of the vehicle by a continuous line;
2.7.17.1.2. "Partial contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the horizontal dimension of the vehicle by a continuous line, and the vertical dimension by marking the upper corners;
2.7.17.2. "Line marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal dimensions (length and width) of a vehicle by a continuous line;
No.048 2011-12-06
Constant speed engine [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Constant-speed engine Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.11. "Constant-speed engine" means an engine whose type approval or certification is limited to constant-speed operation. Engines whose constant-speed governor function is removed or disabled are no longer constant-speed engines;
No.096 2014-03-22
Constant speed operation [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Constant-speed operation Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.12. "Constant-speed operation" means engine operation with a governor that automatically controls the operator's demand to maintain engine speed, even under changing load. Governors do not always maintain exactly constant speed. Typically, speed can decrease (0,1 to 10) per cent below the speed at zero load, such that the minimum speed occurs near the engine's point of maximum power;
No.096 2014-03-22
constituent part of the mirror (curvature of the, radius of) [No.046 2014-08-08] @ The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.12."The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.
No.046 2014-08-08
constituent parts of the rear view mirror (Radius of curvature of the) [No.081 2012-07-13] @ Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.
No.081 2012-07-13
contact (Direct) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Direct contact protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with high voltage live parts;
No.012 2013-03-27
contact (Direct) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Direct contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with high voltage live parts,
No.094 2012-09-20
contact (Direct) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Direct contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with high voltage live parts.
No.095 2015-07-10
contact (Direct) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Direct contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with live parts.
No.100 2011-02-14
contact (Direct) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Direct contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Direct contact" means the contact of persons with live parts.
No.100 2015-03-31
contact (direct, In-) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Indirect contact protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.26. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts;
No.012 2013-03-27
contact (Indirect) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Indirect contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts,
No.094 2012-09-20
contact (Indirect) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Indirect contact Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts.
No.095 2015-07-10
contact (Indirect) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Indirect contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts
No.100 2011-02-14
contact (Indirect) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Indirect contact Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Indirect contact" means the contact of persons with exposed conductive parts.
No.100 2015-03-31
contact surface (floor, Vehicle) [No.014 2015-08-19] @ Vehicle floor contact surface safety-belt anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Vehicle floor contact surface" means the area which results from the intersection of the upper surface of the vehicle floor (incl. trim, carpet, foam, etc.) with the support leg foot assessment volume and is designed to withstand the support leg forces of an i-Size child restraint system defined in Regulation No 129;
No.014 2015-08-19
contact surface (foot, Support leg) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Support-leg foot contact surface Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Support-leg" means an anti–rotation device permanently attached to a Child Restraint System creating a load path between the Child Restraint System and the vehicle structure. A support- leg shall be adjustable in length (Z direction) and may be additionally adjustable in other directions.
2.15.1. "Support-leg foot" means one or more part(s) of the support-leg of the Child Restraint System intended (by design) to engage with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to transmit the loading from the support-leg to the vehicle structure during a frontal impact.
2.15.2. "Support-leg foot contact surface" means the surface of the support-leg foot physically in contact with the vehicle floor contact surface and designed to spread the loads across the vehicle structure.
2.15.3. "Support-leg foot assessment volume" describes a spatial volume which denotes both the extent and limitations for the movement of the support-leg foot. It corresponds to the support-leg foot assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 10 of Regulation No. 14.
2.15.4. "Support-leg dimension assessment volume" means a volume defining the maximum dimensions of a support-leg, corresponding to the support-leg installation assessment volume for vehicles, as defined in Annex 17 of Regulation No. 16, ensuring the dimensional installation of a support-leg of an i-Size CRS in an i-Size seating position of a vehicle.
No.129 2014-03-29
Container [No.110 2015-06-30] @ "Container" (or cylinder) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.12. "Container" (or cylinder) means any storage system used for compressed natural gas.
No.110 2015-06-30
container (Accessory fitted to the) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Accessories fitted to the container or tank using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.16. "Accessories fitted to the container or tank" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container or tank:
4.16.1. "Manual valve" means valve which is operated manually.
4.16.2. "Pressure sensor/indicator" means a pressurised device which indicates the gas or liquid pressure.
4.16.3. "Excess flow valve" means valve which automatically shuts off or limits, the gas flow when the flow exceeds a set design value.
4.16.4. "Gas-tight housing" means a device that vents gas leakage to outside the vehicle including the gas ventilation hose.
No.110 2015-06-30
container (accessory fitted to the) [No.067 2008-03-14] @ Accessories fitted to the container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following equipment which may be either separate or combined:
(a) 80 per cent stop valve
(b) level indicator
(c) pressure relief valve
(d) remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve
(e) fuel pump
(f) multivalve
(g) gas-tight housing
(h) power supply bushing
(i) non-return valve
(j) pressure relief device
2.5.1. "80 per cent stop valve" means a device that limits the filling at maximum 80 per cent of the capacity of the container;
2.5.2. "Level indicatorf means a device to verify the level of liquid in the container;
2.5.3. "Pressure relief valve (discharge valve)" means a device to limit the pressure build-up in the container;
2.5.3.1. "Pressure relief device" means a device aimed to protect the container from burst which can occur in case of fire, by venting the LPG contained;
2.5.4. "Remotely controlled service valve with excess flow valve" means a device which allows the establishment and interruption of LPG supply to the evaporator/pressure regulator; remotely controlled means that the service valve is controlled by the electronic control unit; when the engine of the vehicle is not running the valve is closed; an excess flow valve means a device to limit the flow of LPG;
No.067 2008-03-14
container (accessory fitted to the) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Accessories fitted to the container using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.5. "Accessories fitted to the container" means the following components (but not limited to them), either separate or combined, when fitted to the container:
2.5.1. Manual valve;
2.5.2. Pressure sensor/indicator;
2.5.3. Pressure relief valve (discharge valve);
2.5.4. Pressure relief device (temperature triggered);
2.5.5. Automatic cylinder valve;
2.5.6. Excess flow valve;
2.5.7. Gas-tight housing.
No.110 2011-05-07
container (Type of) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Type of container using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.13."Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect of the dimensional and material characteristics as specified in Annex 3A. 4.13.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped)
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped)
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).
No.110 2015-06-30
container (Type of) [No.067 2008-03-14] @ Type of container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.4. "Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect to the following characteristics as specified in Annex 10:
(a) the trade name(s) or trade mark(s),
(b) the shape (cylindrical, special shape),
(c) the openings (plate for accessories/metal ring),
(d) the material,
(e) the welding process (in case of metal containers),
(f) the heat treatment (in case of metal containers),
(g) the production line,
(h) the nominal wall thickness,
(i) the diameter
(j) the height (in case of special containers)
No.067 2008-03-14
container (Type of) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Type of container using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.4. "Type of container" means containers which do not differ in respect of the dimensional and material characteristics as specified in Annex 3.
No.110 2011-05-07
Container [No.067 2008-03-14] @ Container LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" means any vessel used for the storage of liquefied petroleum gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
(i) a standard cylindrical container with a cylindrical shell, two dished ends either torispherical or elliptical and the required openings;
(ii) a special container: other containers than standard cylindrical containers. The dimensional characteristics are given in Annex 10, Appendix 5;
2.3.2. "All-composite container" means a container made only of composite materials with a non metallic liner.
2.3.3. "Batch of containers" means a maximum of 200 containers of the same type produced consecutively on the same production line.
No.067 2008-03-14
Container [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Container (or cylinder) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" (or cylinder) means any vessel used for the storage of compressed natural gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal;
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped);
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped);
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).
No.110 2011-05-07
Continuous braking [No.013 2016-02-18] š Continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.9.1. A single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.9.2. The energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by the same source (which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.9.3. The braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;
No.013 2016-02-18
continuous braking (Semi) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Semi-continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Semi-continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.10.1. A single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.10.2. The energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by two different sources (one of which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.10.3. The braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;
No.013 2016-02-18
continuous braking (Semi-) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Semi-continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Semi-continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.10.1. a single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.10.2. the energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by two different sources (one of which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.10.3. the braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;
No.013 2010-09-30
Continuous braking [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Continuous braking Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Continuous braking" means the braking of a combination of vehicles through an installation having the following characteristics:
2.9.1. a single control which the driver actuates progressively, by a single movement, from his driving seat;
2.9.2. the energy used for braking the vehicles constituting the combination is furnished by the same source (which may be the muscular energy of the driver);
2.9.3. the braking installation ensures simultaneous or suitably-phased braking of each of the constituent vehicles of the combination, whatever their relative positions;
No.013 2010-09-30
Continuous regeneration [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Continuous regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;
No.049 2013-06-24
Continuous regeneration [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Continuous regeneration Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.13. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either in a sustained manner or at least once over the applicable transient test cycle or ramped-modal cycle; in contrast to periodic (infrequent) regeneration;
No.096 2014-03-22
continuous regeneration [No.049 2008-04-12] @ continuous regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust aftertreatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per ETC test. Such a regeneration process will not require a special test procedure;
No.049 2008-04-12
continuous regeneration [No.049 2010-08-31] @ continuous regeneration Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust aftertreatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per ETC test. Such a regeneration process will not require a special test procedure;
No.049 2010-08-31
Contour marking [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Contour marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.17.1. "Contour marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal and vertical dimensions (length, width and height) of a vehicle; No.048 2008-05-23
Contour marking [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Contour marking Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.17.1. "Contour marking" means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal and vertical dimensions (length, width and height) of a vehicle;
2.7.17.1.1. "Full contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the outline of the vehicle by a continuous line;
2.7.17.1.2. "Partial contour marking" means a contour marking that indicates the horizontal dimension of the vehicle by a continuous line, and the vertical dimension by marking the upper corners;
No.048 2011-12-06
contrast (Luminance) [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Luminance contrast devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.4."Luminance contrast" means the brightness ratio between an object and its immediate background/surrounding that allows the object to be distinguished from its background/surroundings.
No.046 2014-08-08
contrast (Luminance) [No.046 2010-07-10] @ Luminance contrast Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.4. "Luminance contrast" means the brightness ratio between an object and its immediatebackground/surrounding that allows the object to be distinguished from itsbackground/surroundings.
No.046 2010-07-10
control [Directive 2009/080/EC] @ control identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators for two or three-wheel motor vehicles [ANNEX I] 1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "control" means any part of the vehicle or component directly actuated by the driver which causes a change in the state or operation of the vehicle or one of the parts thereof;
Directive 2009/080/EC
Control [No.013 2016-02-18] š Control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver (or in the case of some trailers, by an assistant) to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or in appropriate cases the kinetic energy of a trailer, or a combination of these various kinds of energy;
2.4.1. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.
No.013 2016-02-18
Control [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Control Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or a combination of these various kinds of energy.
No.013H 2015-12-22
Control [No.060 2014-10-15] @ Control Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means any part of the vehicle or a device directly actuated by the driver which changes the state or functioning of the vehicle or any part thereof.
No.060 2014-10-15
Control [No.078 2015-01-30] @ Control Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the rider in order to supply or control the energy required for braking the vehicle to the transmission.
No.078 2015-01-30
Control [No.121 2016-01-08] @ Control Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Control" means that hand-operated part of a device that enables the driver to bring about a change in the state or functioning of a vehicle or vehicle's subsystem.
No.121 2016-01-08
control (Coupling force) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Coupling force control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Coupling force control" means a system/function to balance automatically the braking rate of towing vehicle and trailer.
No.013 2010-09-30
control (Directional) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Directional control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.1. A vehicle stability function includes one or both of the following: (a) Directional control; (b) Roll-over control.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll- over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.
No.013 2016-02-18
control (Electric regenerative braking) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Electric regenerative braking control Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17.1. "Electric regenerative braking control" means a device which modulates the action of the electric regenerative braking system;
No.013H 2015-12-22
control (emission, diagnostic system for, on-board) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ on-board diagnostic system for emission control (OBD) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "OBD" means an on-board diagnostic system for emission control, which has the capability of detecting the occurrence of a malfunction and of identifying the likely area of malfunction by means of fault codes stored in computer memory;
No.049 2010-08-31
control (force, Coupling) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Coupling force control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Coupling force control" means a system/function to balance automatically the braking rate of towing vehicle and trailer.
No.013 2016-02-18
control (Forwar) [No.046 2010-07-10II] @ Forward control Rear-view mirrors 12. DEFINITIONS
12.5. "Forward control" means a configuration in which more than half of the engine length is rearward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub in the forwardquarter of the vehicle length.
No.046 2010-07-10
control (Forward) [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Forward control devices for indirect vision II. INSTALLATION OF DEVICES FOR INDIRECT VISION
12. DEFINITIONS
12.5."Forward control" means a configuration in which more than half of the engine length is rear ward of the foremost point of the windshield base and the steering wheel hub in the forward quarter of the vehicle length.
No.046 2014-08-08
control (Roll over) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Roll-over control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.34. "Vehicle Stability Function" means an electronic control function for a vehicle which improves the dynamic stability of the vehicle.
2.34.1. A vehicle stability function includes one or both of the following: (a) Directional control; (b) Roll-over control.
2.34.2. Control functions within a vehicle stability function:
2.34.2.1. "Directional control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that assists the driver, in the event of under-steer and over-steer conditions, within the physical limits of the vehicle in maintaining the direction intended by the driver in the case of a power-driven vehicle, and assists in maintaining the direction of the trailer with that of the towing vehicle in the case of a trailer.
2.34.2.2. "Roll-over control" means a function within a vehicle stability function that reacts to an impending roll- over in order to stabilise the power-driven vehicle or towing vehicle and trailer combination or the trailer during dynamic manoeuvres within the physical limits of the vehicle.
No.013 2016-02-18
control (System) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ System control (AFS) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.4. "System control" means that part(s) of the AFS receiving the AFS control signals from the vehicle and controlling the operation of the lighting units automatically;
No.048 2011-12-06
control (System) [No.123 2010-08-24] @ System control Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) 1. DEFINITIONS
1.8. "System control" means that part(s) of the system receiving the signals from the vehicle and controlling the operation of the lighting units automatically;
No.123 2010-08-24
Control [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver (or in the case of some trailers, by an assistant) to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or in appropriate cases the kinetic energy of a trailer, or a combination of these various kinds of energy;
2.4.1. "Actuation" means both application and release of the control.
No.013 2010-09-30
Control [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ Control Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or energy from another source controlled by the driver, or a combination of these various kinds of energy.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Control [No.060 2004-03-31] @ Control Driver operated controls - identification of controls, tell-tales and indicators (moped/motorcycles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means any part of the vehicle or a device directly actuated by the driver which changes the state or functioning of the vehicle or any part thereof;
No.060 2004-03-31
Control [No.078 2004-03-31] @ Control Braking (category L) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control" means the part actuated directly by the driver to furnish to the transmission the energy required for braking or controlling it. This energy may be the muscular energy of the driver, or the energy from another source controlled by the driver, or a combination of these various kinds of energy;
No.078 2004-03-31
Control [No.121 2010-07-10] @ Control Hand controls, tell-tales and indicators 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Control" means that hand-operated part of a device that enables the driver to bring about a changein the state or functioning of a vehicle or vehicle's subsystem.
No.121 2010-07-10
control area [No.049 2008-04-12] @ control area Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "control area" means the area between the engine speeds A and C and between 25 to 100 per cent
load;
No.049 2008-04-12
control area [No.049 2010-08-31] @ control area Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "control area" means the area between the engine speeds A and C and between 25 to 100 per cent load;
No.049 2010-08-31
control device (Pollution) [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Pollution control devices Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Pollution control devices" means those components of a vehicle that control and/or limit exhaust and evaporative emissions;
No.083 2012-02-15
control device (Pollution) [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Pollution control devices Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Pollution control devices" means those components of a vehicle that control and/or limit exhaust and evaporative emissions.
No.083 2015-07-03
control device (pollution, Original) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Original pollution control device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Original pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of such devices covered by the type approval granted for the vehicle concerned;
No.049 2013-06-24
control device (pollution, Replacement) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Replacement pollution control device Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.56. "Replacement pollution control device" means a pollution control device or an assembly of such devices intended to replace an original pollution control device and which can be approved as a separate technical unit;
No.049 2013-06-24
Control Diagnostic system (NOx) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ NCD (NOx Control Diagnostic system) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.52. "NO x Control Diagnostic system (NCD)" means a system on-board the engine which has the capability of
(a) Detecting a NO x Control Malfunction;
(b) Identifying the likely cause of NO x control malfunctions by means of information stored in computer memory and/or communicating that information off-board;
No.096 2014-03-22
Control equipment [No.097 2008-12-30] @ Control equipment Alarm systems 2.4. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting, unsetting and testing of a VAS and for sending an alarm condition to warning devices; No.097 2008-12-30
Control equipment [No.097 2012-05-083] @ Control equipment alarm systems PART III — APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
26. DEFINITIONS
26.2. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting and/or unsetting of an immobiliser.
No.097 2012-05-08
Control equipment [No.097 2012-05-08a] @ Control equipment alarm systems PART I — APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting, unsetting and testing of a VAS and for sending an alarm condition to warning devices;
No.097 2012-05-08
Control equipment [No.116 2012-02-16P2] @ Control equipment Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.5. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting, unsetting and testing of a VAS and for sending an alarm condition to warning devices.
No.116 2012-02-16
Control equipment [No.116 2012-02-16P4] @ Control equipment Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.2. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting and/or unsetting of an immobiliser
No.116 2012-02-16
Control equipment [No.116 2010-06-30P2] @ Control equipment Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 6. PART II: APPROVAL OF VEHICLE ALARM SYSTEMS
6.1. DEFINITIONS
6.1.5. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting, unsetting and testing of a VAS and for sending an alarm condition to warning devices.
No.116 2010-06-30
Control equipment [No.116 2010-06-30P4] @ Control equipment Unauthorised use (anti-theft and alarm systems) 8. PART IV: APPROVAL OF IMMOBILISERS AND APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS IMMOBILISER
8.1. DEFINITIONS
8.1.2. "Control equipment" means equipment necessary for the setting and/or unsetting of an immobiliser.
No.116 2010-06-30
control line (Electric) [No.013 2016-02-18] š Electric control line Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Electric control line" means the electrical connection between two vehicles which provides the braking control function to a towed vehicle within a combination. It comprises the electrical wiring and connector and includes the parts for data communication and the electrical energy supply for the trailer control transmission.
No.013 2016-02-18
control line (Electric) [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Electric control line Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Electric control line" means the electrical connection between power-driven vehicle and trailer which provides the braking control function to the trailer. It comprises the electrical wiring and connector and includes the parts for data communication and the electrical energy supply for the trailer control transmission.
No.013 2010-09-30
Control Malfunction (NOx) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ NCM (NOx Control Malfunction) Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.53. "NO x Control Malfunction (NCM)" means an attempt to tamper with the NO x control system of an engine or a malfunction affecting that system that might be due to tampering, that is considered by this Regulation as requiring the activation of a warning or an inducement system once detected;
No.096 2014-03-22
control monitoring system (Emission) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.19. "Emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NO x control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5;
"Emission control system" means the elements of design and emission strategies developed or calibrated for the purpose of controlling emissions;
No.049 2013-06-24
control monitoring system (emission) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NOx control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5.
No.049 2008-04-12
control monitoring system (emission) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ emission control monitoring system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control monitoring system" means the system that ensures correct operation of the NOx control measures implemented in the engine system according to the requirements of paragraph 5.5.
No.049 2010-08-31
control signal (AFS) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ AFS control signal (V, E, W, T) Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.28.5. "AFS control signal" (V, E, W, T) means the input to the AFS in accordance with the paragraph 6.22.7.4 of this Regulation;
No.048 2011-12-06
control strategy (Emission) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Emission control strategy Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.25. "Emission control strategy" means a combination of an emission control system with one base emission control strategy and with one set of auxiliary emission control strategies, incorporated into the overall design of an engine or non-road mobile machinery into which the engine is installed;
No.096 2014-03-22
control strategy (emission) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ emission control strategy (ECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control strategy (ECS)" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle for the purposes of controlling exhaust emissions that includes one BECS and one set of AECS;
No.049 2008-04-12
control strategy (emission) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ emission control strategy (ECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control strategy (ECS)" means an element or set of elements of design that is incorporated into the overall design of an engine system or vehicle for the purposes of controlling exhaust emissions that includes one BECS and one set of AECS;
No.049 2010-08-31
control strategy (emission, auxiliary) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;
No.049 2008-04-12
control strategy (emission, auxiliary) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "auxiliary emission control strategy (AECS)" means an emission control strategy that becomes active or that modifies the base emission control strategy for a specific purpose or purposes and in response to a specific set of ambient and/or operating conditions, e.g. vehicle speed, engine speed, gear used, intake temperature, or intake pressure;
No.049 2010-08-31
control strategy (emission, base) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active
throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;
No.049 2008-04-12
control strategy (emission, base) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ base emission control strategy (BECS) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "base emission control strategy (BECS)" means an emission control strategy that is active throughout the speed and load operating range of the engine unless an AECS is activated. Examples for BECS are, but are not limited to:
(a) engine timing map;
(b) EGR map;
(c) SCR catalyst reagent dosing map;
No.049 2010-08-31
control system (Emission) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] @ Emission control system Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Emission control system" means the electronic engine management controller and any emission-related component in the exhaust or evaporative system which supplies an input to or receives an output from this controller.
No.083 2012-02-15
control system (Emission) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Emission control system Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.24. "Emission control system" means any device, system, or element of design that controls or reduces the emissions of regulated pollutants from an engine;
No.096 2014-03-22
control system (emission) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ emission control system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "emission control system" means the exhaust aftertreatment system, the electronic management controller(s) of the engine system and any emission-related component of the engine system in the exhaust which supplies an input to or receives an output from this(these) controller(s), and when applicable the communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine system electronic control unit(s) (EECU) and any other power train or vehicle control unit with respect to emissions management;
No.049 2008-04-12
control system (emission) [No.049 2010-08-31] @ emission control system Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "emission control system" means the exhaust aftertreatment system, the electronic management controller(s) of the engine system and any emission-related component of the engine system in the exhaust which supplies an input to or receives an output from this(these) controller(s), and when applicable the communication interface (hardware and messages) between the engine system electronic control unit(s) (EECU) and any other power train or vehicle control unit with respect to emissions management;
No.049 2010-08-31
control system (Remote) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ Remote control systems Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. Remote control systems are devices and components which enable the coupling device to be operated from the side of the vehicle or from the driving cab of the vehicle.
No.055 2006-12-27
control system (Remote) [No.055 2010-08-28] @ Remote control systems mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. Remote control systems are devices and components which enable the coupling device to be operated from the side of the vehicle or from the driving cab of the vehicle.
No.055 2010-08-28
Control System (Stability, Electronic) [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ ESC (Electronic Stability Control) System Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Electronic Stability Control System" or "ESC System" means a system that has all of the following attributes:
2.25.1. That improves vehicle directional stability by at least having the ability to automatically control individually the braking torques of the left and right wheels on each axle ( 2 ) to induce a correcting yaw moment based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.2. That is computer controlled with the computer using a closed-loop algorithm to limit vehicle oversteer and to limit vehicle understeer based on the evaluation of actual vehicle behaviour in comparison with a determination of vehicle behaviour demanded by the driver;
2.25.3. That has a means to determine directly the value of the vehiclefs yaw rate and to estimate its side-slip or side- slip derivative with respect to time;
2.25.4. That has a means to monitor driver steering inputs; and
2.25.5. That has an algorithm to determine the need, and a means to modify propulsion torque, as necessary, to assist the driver in maintaining control of the vehicle.
No.013H 2015-12-22
control transmission [No.013 2016-02-18] š control transmission Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission". The control and supply lines between towing vehicles and trailers shall not be considered as parts of the transmission.
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy.
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.
No.013 2016-02-18
Control transmission [No.013H 2015-12-22] @ Control transmission Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy;
No.013H 2015-12-22
Control transmission [No.079 2008-05-27] @ Control transmission Steering equipment 2.3.2.1. "Control transmission" means all components by means of which signals are transmitted for control of the steering equipment. No.079 2008-05-27
Control transmission [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Control transmission Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission". The control and supply lines between towing vehicles and trailers shall not be considered as parts of the transmission.
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy.
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.
No.013 2010-09-30
control transmission [No.013H 2010-08-31] @ control transmission Braking (passenger cars) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Transmission" means the combination of components comprised between the control and the brake and linking them functionally. The transmission may be mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or mixed. Where the braking power is derived from or assisted by a source of energy independent of the driver, the reserve of energy in the system is likewise part of the transmission.
The transmission is divided into two independent functions: the control transmission and the energy transmission. Whenever the term "transmission" is used alone in this Regulation, it means both the "control transmission" and the "energy transmission":
2.5.1. "Control transmission" means the combination of the components of the transmission which control the operation of the brakes, including the control function and the necessary reserve(s) of energy;
2.5.2. "Energy transmission" means the combination of the components which supply to the brakes the necessary energy for their function, including the reserve(s) of energy necessary for the operation of the brakes.
No.013H 2010-08-31
Control tyre [No.117 2008-08-29] @ Control tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2.14. "Control tyre" means a normal production tyre that is used to establish the wet grip performance of tyre sizes unable to be fitted to the same vehicle as the standard reference test tyre . see paragraph 2.2.2.16 of Annex 5 to this Regulation. No.117 2008-08-29
Control tyre [No.117 2011-11-23] @ Control tyre Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.3. "Control tyre" means a normal production tyre that is used to establish the wet grip performance of tyre sizes unable to be fitted to the same vehicle as the standard reference test tyre – see paragraph 2.2.2.16 of Annex 5 to this Regulation.
No.117 2011-11-23
control unit (Electronic) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Electronic control unit Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.23. "Electronic control unit" means an engine's electronic device that uses data from engine sensors to control engine parameters;
No.096 2014-03-22
control unit (Electronic) [No.067 2008-03-14] @ Electronic control unit LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.12. "Electronic control unit" means a device which controls the LPG demand of the engine and cuts off automatically the power to the shut-off valves of the LPG-system in case of a broken fuel supply pipe caused by an accident, or by stalling of the engine
No.067 2008-03-14
control unit (electronic, Type of) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Type of electronic control unit using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.40. "Type of electronic control unit" as mentioned in paragraph 4.38 means components that do not differ in such essential respect as the basic software principles excluding minor changes.
No.110 2015-06-30
control unit (electronic, Type of) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Type of electronic control unit using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.26. "Type of electronic control unit" as mentioned in paragraph 2.24 means components which do not differ in such essential respect as the basic software principles excluding minor changes.
No.110 2011-05-07
Controlled tension winding [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Controlled tension winding using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.54. "Controlled tension winding" means a process used in manufacturing hoop wrapped composite cylinders with metal liners by which compressive stresses in the liner and tensile stresses in the over-wrap at zero internal pressure are obtained by winding the reinforcing filaments under significant high tension.
No.110 2015-06-30
controlled tension winding [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ controlled tension winding Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.9. controlled tension winding: A process used in manufacturing hoop wrapped composite cylinders with metal liners by which compressive stresses in the liner and tensile stresses in the over-wrap at zero internal pressure are obtained by winding the reinforcing filaments under significant high tension.
No.110 2008-03-14
Controller [No.078 2004-03-31A4] @ Controller Braking (category L) [ANNEX 4] REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VEHICLES OF CATEGORIES L1 AND L3 EQUIPPED WITH ANTI-LOCK DEVICES
2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Controller" means a component designed to evaluate the data transmitted by the sensor(s) and to transmit a signal to the modulator;
No.078 2004-03-31
conventional number "d" [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ conventional number "d" @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing:
2.21.1. The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.2. The nominal aspect ratio except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.3. A conventional number "d" (the "d" symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.
No.108 2006-07-04
Conversion efficiency of NMC E [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Conversion efficiency of NMC (non-methane cutter) E Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.14. "Conversion efficiency of non-methane cutter (NMC) E" means the efficiency of the conversion of a NMC that is used for removing the non-methane hydrocarbons from the sample gas by oxidizing all hydrocarbons except methane. Ideally, the conversion for methane is 0 per cent (E CH4 = 0) and for the other hydrocarbons represented by ethane is 100 per cent (E C2H6 = 100 per cent). For the accurate measurement of NMHC, the two efficiencies shall be determined and used for the calculation of the NMHC emission mass flow rate for methane and ethane. Contrast with "penetration fraction";
No.096 2014-03-22
conversion system (energy, Electric) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Electric energy conversion system protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion;
No.012 2013-03-27
conversion system (energy, Electric) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Electric energy conversion system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electric energy for electric propulsion.
No.100 2011-02-14
conversion system (energy, Electric) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Electric energy conversion system Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Electric energy conversion system" means a system that generates and provides electric energy for electric propulsion.
No.100 2015-03-31
conversion system (energy, Electrical) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Electrical energy conversion system Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Electrical energy conversion system" means a system (e.g. fuel cell) that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion,
No.094 2012-09-20
conversion system (energy, Electrical) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Electrical energy conversion system Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Electrical energy conversion system" means a system (e.g. fuel cell) that generates and provides electrical energy for electrical propulsion.
No.095 2015-07-10
converter (catalytic, Original equipment) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Original equipment catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Original equipment catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters covered by the type approval delivered for the vehicle and whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83.
No.103 2007-06-19
converter (catalytic, Replacement) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. "Replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters for which approval can be obtained according to this Regulation, other than those defined in paragraph 2.1 above.
No.103 2007-06-19
converter (catalytic, replacement, Approval of a) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Approval of a replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Approval of a replacement catalytic converter" means the approval of a converter intended to be fitted as a replacement part on one or more specific types of vehicles with regard to the limitation of pollutant emissions, noise level and effect on vehicle performance and, where applicable, on the on-board diagnostic (OBD).
No.103 2007-06-19
converter (catalytic, replacement, Deteriorated) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Deteriorated replacement catalytic converter" means a converter that has been aged or artificially deteriorated to such an extend that it fulfils the requirements laid out in paragraph 1 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to Regulation No 83.
No.103 2007-06-19
converter (catalytic, replacement, Original) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Original replacement catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. "Original replacement catalytic converter" means a catalytic converter or an assembly of catalytic converters whose types are indicated in the documents related to Annex 2 to Regulation No 83, but are offered in the market as separate technical units by the holder of the vehicle type-approval.
No.103 2007-06-19
converter (catalytic, Type of) [No.103 2007-06-19] @ Type of catalytic converter Replacement catalytic converters 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Type of catalytic converter" means catalytic converters which do not differ in such essential aspects as:
(i) number of coated substrates, structure and material
(ii) type of catalytic activity (oxidising, three-way, c)
(iii) volume, ratio of frontal area and substrate length
(iv) catalyst material content
(v) catalyst material ratio
(vi) cell density
(vii) dimensions and shape
(viii) thermal protection
No.103 2007-06-19
converter (Electronic) [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Electronic converter protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.33. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electrical power for electrical propulsion;
No.012 2013-03-27
converter (Electronic) [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Electronic converter Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electrical power for electrical propulsion,
No.094 2012-09-20
converter (Electronic) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Electronic converter Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electrical power for electrical propulsion.
No.095 2015-07-10
converter (Electronic) [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Electronic converter Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electric power for electric propulsion.
No.100 2011-02-14
converter (Electronic) [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Electronic converter Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. "Electronic converter" means a device capable of controlling and/or converting electric power for electric propulsion.
No.100 2015-03-31
convertible car [No.021 2008-07-16] @ convertible car Interior fittings 2.7. "convertible car" means a vehicle where, in certain configurations, there is no rigid part of the vehicle body above the belt line with the exception of the front rof supports and/or the rollover bars and/or the seat belt anchorage points; (see Annex X, explanatory notes, paragraphs 2.5 and 2.7); No.021 2008-07-16
COP [No.083 2015-07-03] @ COP (CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 8. CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION (COP)
8.1. Every vehicle bearing an approval mark as prescribed under this Regulation shall conform, with regard to components affecting the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by the engine, emissions from the crankcase and evaporative emissions, to the vehicle type approved. The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the 1958 Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/ 505/Rev.2), with the following requirements: [—ª]
No.083 2015-07-03
Cord [No.030 2008-07-30] @ Cord Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.5. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic tyre (1); No.030 2008-07-30
Cord [No.054 2008-07-11] @ Cord Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.5. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic tyre; No.054 2008-07-11
Cord [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Cord Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic tyre.
No.075 2011-03-30
Cord [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Cord Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the tyre;
No.106 2010-09-30
Cord [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Cord @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic-tyre.
No.108 2006-07-04
Cord [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Cord Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Cord" means the strands forming the fabric of the plies in the pneumatic-tyre.
No.109 2006-07-04
Cord separation [No.030 2008-07-30] @ Cord separation Tyres (motor vehicles and their trailers) 2.24. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating; No.030 2008-07-30
Cord separation [No.054 2008-07-11] @ Cord separation Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.24. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their coating; No.054 2008-07-11
Cord separation [No.075 2011-03-30] @ Cord separation Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.
No.075 2011-03-30
Cord separation [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Cord separation Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.36. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating;
No.106 2010-09-30
Cord separation [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Cord separation @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.
No.108 2006-07-04
Cord separation [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Cord separation Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.28. "Cord separation" means the parting of the cords from their rubber coating.
No.109 2006-07-04
Cornering lamp [No.048 2008-05-23] @ Cornering lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2.7.26. "Cornering lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination of that part of the road which is located near the forward corner of the vehicle at the side towards which the vehicle is going to turn; No.048 2008-05-23
Cornering lamp [No.119 2014-03-25] @ Cornering lamp Cornering lamps [SCOPE]
This Regulation applies to cornering lamps for vehicles of categories M, N and T.
1. DEFINITIONS
1.1. "Cornering lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination of that part of the road which is located near the forward corner of the vehicle at the side towards which the vehicle is going to turn.
1.2. "Cornering lamps of different types" means lamps which differ in such essential respects as:
(a) The trade name or mark;
(b) The characteristics of the optical system (level of intensity, light distribution angles, category of light source, light source module, etc.);
A change of the colour of the filament lamp or the colour of any filter does not constitute a change of type.
1.3. The definitions of the colour of the light emitted given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.
1.4. References made in this Regulation to standard (étalon) filament lamp(s) and to Regulation No 37 shall refer to Regulation No 37 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval.
No.119 2014-03-25
Cornering lamp [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Cornering lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.26. "Cornering lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination of that part of the road which is located near the forward corner of the vehicle at the side towards which the vehicle is going to turn;
No.048 2011-12-06
Corrective steering function [No.079 2008-05-27] @ Corrective steering function Steering equipment 2.3.4.2. "Corrective steering function" means the discontinuous control function within a complex electronic control system whereby, for a limited duration, changes to the steering angle of one or more wheels may result from the automatic evaluation of signals initiated on-board the vehicle, in order to maintain the basic desired path of the vehicle or to influence the vehicle"s dynamic behaviour.
Systems that do not themselves positively actuate the steering system but that, possibly in conjunction with passive infrastructure features, simply warn the driver of a deviation from the ideal path of the vehicle, or of an unseen hazard, by means of a tactile warning transmitted through the steering control, are also considered to be corrective steering.
No.079 2008-05-27
cot (Carry) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Carry cot Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.24. "Carry cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision.
No.129 2014-03-29
cot (carry-) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ carry-cot Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Chair" means a structure which is a constituent part of the child restraint and is intended to accommodate a child in a seated position.
2.4.1. "carry-cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle;
2.4.3. "infant carrier" means a restraint system intended to accommodate the child in a rearwardfacing semi-recumbent position. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of the frontal collision.
No.044 2007-11-23
cot (carry) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ carry cot Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.1. "carry cot" means a restraint system intended to accommodate and restrain the child in a supine or prone position with the child's spine perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. It is so designed as to distribute the restraining forces over the child's head and body excluding its limbs in the event of a collision;
No.044 2011-09-09
cot restraint (Carry) [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Carry-cot restraint Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry-cot to the structure of the vehicle.
No.129 2014-03-29
cot restraint (carry-) [No.044 2011-09-09] @ carry-cot restraint Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4.2. "carry-cot restraint" means a device used to restrain a carry cot to the structure of the vehicle;
No.044 2011-09-09
counter (cycle, Ignition) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Ignition cycle counter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Ignition cycle counter" means a counter indicating the number of engine starts a vehicle has experienced;
No.049 2013-06-24
Coupling (hitch) height [No.117 2008-08-29] @ Coupling (hitch) height Tyre noise and wet grip 2.18. "Coupling (hitch) height" means the height when measured perpendicularly from the centre of the articulation point of the trailer towing coupling or hitch to the ground, when the towing vehicle and trailer are coupled together. The vehicle and trailer must be standing on level pavement surface in its test mode complete with the appropriate tyre(s) to be used in the particular test. No.117 2008-08-29
Coupling (hitch) height [No.117 2011-11-23] @ Coupling (hitch) height Tyre noise and wet grip 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. Wet Grip measurements – Specific definitions
2.17.7. "Coupling (hitch) height" means the height when measured perpendicularly from the centre of the articulation point of the trailer towing coupling or hitch to the ground, when the towing vehicle and trailer are coupled together. The vehicle and trailer shall be standing on level pavement surface in its test mode complete with the appropriate tyre(s) to be used in the particular test.
No.117 2011-11-23
coupling (Service) [No.067 2008-03-14] @ Service coupling LPG equipment 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.17. "Service coupling" means a coupling in the fuel line between the fuel container and the engine. If a mono-fuel vehicle is out of fuel the engine can be operated by means of a service fuel container which can be coupled to the service coupling;
No.067 2008-03-14
coupling device or component (type of) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ type of coupling device or component Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "type of coupling device or component" means a device or component which does not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. the manufacturer's or supplier s trade name or mark;
2.10.2. the class of coupling as defined in paragraph 2.6.;
2.10.3. the external shape, principal dimensions or fundamental difference in design including materials used; and
2.10.4. the characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U as defined in paragraph 2.11.
No.055 2006-12-27
coupling device or component (type of) [No.055 2010-08-28] @ type of coupling device or component mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. "type of coupling device or component" means a device or component which does not differ in such essential respects as:
2.10.1. the manufacturer's or supplier s trade name or mark;
2.10.2. the class of coupling as defined in paragraph 2.6;
2.10.3. the external shape, principal dimensions or fundamental difference in design including materials used; and
2.10.4. the characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U as defined in paragraph 2.11.
No.055 2010-08-28
coupling devices and components (mechanical, standard) [No.055 2010-08-28] @ standard mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer.
No.055 2010-08-28
coupling devices and components (mechanical) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "mechanical coupling devices and components means" all those items on the frame, load-bearing parts of the bodywork and the chassis of the motor vehicle and trailer by means of which they are connected together to form the combination of vehicles or the articulated vehicles. Fixed or detachable parts for the attachment or operation of the mechanical coupling device or component are included.
No.055 2006-12-27
coupling devices and components (mechanical) [No.055 2006-12-27a] @ mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows:
2.6.1. Class A Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head - see annex 5, paragraph 1.
2.6.1.1. Class A50-1 to 50-5 Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing.
2.6.1.2. Class A50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets.
2.6.2. Class B Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle - see annex 5, paragraph 2.
2.6.2.1. Class B50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads.
2.6.3. Class C Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye - see annex 5, paragraph 3.:
2.6.3.1. Class C50-1 to 50-7 Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.3.2. Class C50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.4. Class D Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings - see annex 5, paragraph 4.:
2.6.4.1. Class D50-A Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment.
2.6.4.2. Class D50-B Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment.
2.6.4.3. Class D50-C and 50-D Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment.
2.6.4.4. Class D50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes.
2.6.5. Class E Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices - see annex 5, paragraph 5.
Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted.
Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked.
This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle.
2.6.6. Class F Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the loadbearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle - see annex 5, paragraph 6.
2.6.7. Class G Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer - see annex 5, paragraph 7.
2.6.7.1. Class G50 Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.7.2. Class G50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.8. Class H Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle - see annex 5, paragraph 8.:
2.6.8.1. Class H50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins.
2.6.9. Class J Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel - see annex 5, paragraph 9.
2.6.10. Class K Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes - see annex 5, paragraph 10.
2.6.11. Class L Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings - see annex 5, paragraph 4.
2.6.12. Class S Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards.
2.6.13. Class T Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair.
No.055 2006-12-27
coupling devices and components (mechanical) [No.055 2010-08-28] @ mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "mechanical coupling devices and components means" all those items on the frame, load-bearing parts of the bodywork and the chassis of the motor vehicle and trailer by means of which they are connected together to form the combination of vehicles or the articulated vehicles. Fixed or detachable parts for the attachment or operation of the mechanical coupling device or component are included.
No.055 2010-08-28
coupling devices and components (mechanical, miscellaneous, non-standard) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6. such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.
No.055 2006-12-27
coupling devices and components (mechanical, miscellaneous, standard, non-) [No.055 2010-08-28] @ non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6 such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.
No.055 2010-08-28
coupling devices and components (mechanical, standard) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ standard mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.3. standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer
No.055 2006-12-27
coupling devices and components (standard, mechanical, non-) [No.055 2010-08-28] @ non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.
No.055 2010-08-28
coupling devices and components (standard, non-mechanical) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.
No.055 2006-12-27
coupling devices and components are classified according to type (mechanical) [No.055 2010-08-28] @ mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows:
2.6.1. Class A Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head — see annex 5, paragraph 1.
2.6.1.1. Class A50-1 to 50-5 Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing.
2.6.1.2. Class A50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets.
2.6.2. Class B Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 2.
2.6.2.1. Class B50-X Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads.
2.6.3. Class C Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye — see annex 5, paragraph 3:
2.6.3.1. Class C50-1 to 50-7 Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.3.2. Class C50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.
2.6.4. Class D Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4:
2.6.4.1. Class D50-A Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment.
2.6.4.2. Class D50-B Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment.
2.6.4.3. Class D50-C and 50-D Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment.
2.6.4.4. Class D50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes.
2.6.5. Class E Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices — see annex 5, paragraph 5.
Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted.
Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked.
This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle.
2.6.6. Class F Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the load-bearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 6.
2.6.7. Class G Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer — see annex 5, paragraph 7.
2.6.7.1. Class G50 Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.7.2. Class G50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.
2.6.8. Class H Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 8:
2.6.8.1. Class H50-X Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins.
2.6.9. Class J Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel — see annex 5, paragraph 9.
2.6.10. Class K Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes — see annex 5, paragraph 10.
2.6.11. Class L Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4.
2.6.12. Class S Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards.
2.6.13. Class T Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair.
No.055 2010-08-28
Coupling force control [No.013 2016-02-18] š Coupling force control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Coupling force control" means a system/function to balance automatically the braking rate of towing vehicle and trailer.
No.013 2016-02-18
Coupling force control [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Coupling force control Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.27. "Coupling force control" means a system/function to balance automatically the braking rate of towing vehicle and trailer.
No.013 2010-09-30
coupling requirement (automatic) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ automatic coupling requirement Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.
In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook.
No.055 2006-12-27
coupling requirement (automatic) [No.055 2010-08-28] @ automatic coupling requirement mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.2. automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.
In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook.
No.055 2010-08-28
Coupling system [No.100 2009-02-14] @ Coupling system Electric vehicle safety 2.10. "Coupling system" means all the parts used to connect the vehicle to an external electric power supply (alternative or direct current supply). No.100 2009-02-14
Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.
No.095 2015-07-10
Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system [No.100 2011-02-14] @ Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.4. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.
No.100 2011-02-14
Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Coupling system for charging the REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.
No.100 2015-03-31
Coupling system for charging the REESS [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.
No.095 2015-07-10
Coupling system for charging the REESS [No.100 2015-03-31] @ Coupling system for charging the REESS (Rechargeable Energy Storage System) Electric vehicle safety 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Coupling system for charging the Rechargeable Energy Storage System (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electric power supply including the vehicle inlet.
No.100 2015-03-31
Coupling system for charging the RESS [No.094 2012-09-20] @ Coupling system for charging the RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a frontal collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet,
No.094 2012-09-20
Coupling system for charging the RESS [No.010 2012-09-20] @ Coupling system for charging the RESS Electro-magnetic compatibility 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Coupling system for charging the RESS" means the electrical circuit installed in the vehicle used for charging the RESS.
No.010 2012-09-20
Coupling system for charging the RESS [No.012 2013-03-27] @ Coupling system for charging the RESS (rechargeable energy storage system) protection of the driver against the steering mechanism in the event of impact 2. DEFINITIONS
2.29. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the RESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet;
No.012 2013-03-27
Coupling system for REESS (charging the) [No.095 2015-07-10] @ Coupling system for charging the REESS (rechargeable energy storage system) Protection of the occupants in the event of a lateral collision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Coupling system for charging the rechargeable energy storage system (REESS)" means the electrical circuit used for charging the REESS from an external electrical power supply including the vehicle inlet.
No.095 2015-07-10
Courtesy lamp (Exterior) [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Exterior Courtesy lamp Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Lamp"
2.7.29. "Exterior Courtesy lamp" means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination to assist the entry and exit of the vehicle driver and passenger or in loading operations;
No.048 2011-12-06
crack (Technical) [No.124 2006-12-27] @ Technical crack (Replacement) Wheels for passenger vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Technical crack" is a material separation with a propagation of more than 1 mm occurring during a dynamic test (defects caused by the production process are not to be taken into account).
No.124 2006-12-27
Crankcase [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Crankcase Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.7. "Crankcase" means the spaces in, or external to, an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapours can be emitted;
No.049 2013-06-24
crankcase [REG. No 595/2009] @ crankcase emissions 5. "crankcase" means the spaces in, or external to, an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapours can be emitted; REG. No 595/2009
crankcase (Engine) [No.083 2012-02-15] @ Engine crankcase Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Engine crankcase" means the spaces in or external to an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapour can escape;
No.083 2012-02-15
crankcase (Engine) [No.083 2015-07-03] @ Engine crankcase Emissions (engine fuel requirements) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Engine crankcase" means the spaces in or external to an engine which are connected to the oil sump by internal or external ducts through which gases and vapour can escape.
No.083 2015-07-03
crankcase emission (Open) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Open crankcase emissions Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.54. "Open crankcase emissions" means any flow from an engine's crankcase that is emitted directly into the environment;
No.096 2014-03-22
crew (Member of the) [No.107 2015-06-18] @ Member of the crew Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Member of the crew" means a person assigned to operate as a co-driver or the possible assistant.
No.107 2015-06-18
crew (Member of the) [No.107 2006-12-27] @ Member of the crew Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Member of the crew" means a person assigned to operate as a co-driver or the possible assistant.
No.107 2006-12-27
crew (Member of the) [No.107 2010-09-29] @ Member of the crew Category M2 or M3 vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.23. "Member of the crew" means a person assigned to operate as a co-driver or the possible assistant.
No.107 2010-09-29
CRF [No.016 2015-11-20] @ CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the eight ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 to this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.
No.016 2015-11-20
CRF [No.016 2007-11-30] @ Child restraint fixture (CRF) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven Isofix size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from figure 1 to figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the Isofix child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle Isofix positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any Isofix anchorages system.
No.016 2007-11-30
CRF [No.016 2011-09-09] @ CRF (Child restraint fixture) Seat belts 2. DEFINITIONS
2.38. "Child restraint fixture" (CRF) means a fixture according to one out of the seven ISOFIX size classes defined in paragraph 4 of Annex 17 — Appendix 2 of this Regulation, and particularly whose dimensions are given from Figure 1 to Figure 7 in the previous mentioned paragraph 4. Those child restraint fixtures (CRF) are used, in this Regulation, to check what are the ISOFIX child restraint systems size classes which can be accommodated on the vehicle ISOFIX positions. Also one of the CRF, the so-called ISO/F2 (B), which is described in Figure 2 of the previous mentioned paragraph 4, is used in Regulation No 14 to check the location and the possibility of access to any ISOFIX anchorages system.
No.016 2011-09-09
CRF pitch angle [No.129 2014-03-29] @ CRF pitch angle Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "CRF pitch angle" is the angle between the bottom surface of the fixture ISO/F2 (B) as defined in Regulation No. 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2, Figure 2) and the horizontal Z plane of the vehicle as defined in Regulation No. 14 (Annex 4, Appendix 2), with the fixture installed in the vehicle as defined in Regulation No. 16 (Annex 17, Appendix 2).
No.129 2014-03-29
Criteria (Injury, Head) [No.043 2014-02-12] @ HIC (Head Injury Criteria) safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "HIC (Head Injury Criteria)" value means a value for the characteristics of skull-brain injury arising from the deceleration forces which result from a blunt perpendicular impact with the glazing.
No.043 2014-02-12
Criteria (Injury, Head) [No.043 2010-08-31] @ HIC (Head Injury Criteria) Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "HIC" (Head Injury Criteria) value means a value for the characteristics of skull-brain injury arising from the deceleration forces which result from a blunt perpendicular impact with the glazing.
No.043 2010-08-31
Critical emission related component [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Critical emission-related components Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Critical emission-related components" means the following components which are designed primarily for emission control: any exhaust after-treatment system, the ECU and its associated sensors and actuators, and the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system including all related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing;
No.049 2013-06-24
Critical emission related component [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Critical emission-related components Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.15. "Critical emission-related components" means the components which are designed primarily for emission control, that is, any exhaust after-treatment system, the electronic engine control unit and its associated sensors and actuators, and the EGR system including all related filters, coolers, control valves and tubing;
No.096 2014-03-22
Critical emission related maintenance [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Critical emission-related maintenance Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Critical emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance to be performed on critical emission-related components
No.049 2013-06-24
Critical emission related maintenance [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Critical emission-related maintenance Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.16. "Critical emission-related maintenance" means the maintenance to be performed on critical emission-related components;
No.096 2014-03-22
Critical field of vision [No.046 2010-07-10] @ Critical field of vision Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.10. "Critical field of vision" means the area in which a critical object has to be detected by means ofa device for indirect vision and that is defined by an angle and one or more detection distances.
No.046 2010-07-10
Critical object [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Critical object devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.6."Critical object" means a cylindrical object with a height of 0,50 m and a diameter of 0,30 m.
No.046 2014-08-08
Critical object [No.046 2010-07-10] @ Critical object Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.6. "Critical object" means a circular object with a diameter D0 = 0,8 m
(2) A system for indirect vision is intended to detect relevant road users. The relevancy of a road user is defined by his or herposition and (potential) speed. More or less in proportion with the speed of the pedestrian-cyclist- moped driver, thedimensions of these road users increase as well. For detection purposes a moped driver (D = 0,8 m) at 40 m distancewould be equal to a pedestrian (D = 0,5 m) at a distance of 25 m. Considering the speeds, the moped driver would beselected as the criterion for the detection size; for that reason an object with a size of 0,8 m shall be used for determiningthe detection performance.
No.046 2010-07-10
Critical perception [No.046 2014-08-08] @ Critical perception devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.7."Critical perception" means the level of perception that can just be obtained under critical condi tions via the viewing system used. This corresponds to the situation in which the representative scale of the critical object is multiple times larger than the smallest detail that can be perceived via the viewing system.
No.046 2014-08-08
Critical perception [No.046 2010-07-10] @ Critical perception Rear-view mirrors 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.2.7. "Critical perception" means the level of perception that the human eye is generally capable ofachieving under various conditions. For traffic conditions the limiting value for a critical perception is eight arc-minutes of visual angle.
No.046 2010-07-10
Crotch strap [No.129 2014-03-29] @ Crotch strap Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. "Crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the Child Restraint System and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact.
No.129 2014-03-29
crotch strap [No.044 2007-11-23] @ crotch strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Strap" means a flexible component designed to transmit forces.
2.8.1. "lap strap" means a strap which, either in the form of a complete belt or in the form of a component of such a belt, passes across the front of, and restrains, the child's pelvic region;
2.8.2. "shoulder restraint" means that part of a belt which restrains the child's upper torso;
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the child's thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
2.8.4. "child-restraining strap" means a strap which is a constituent part of the belt and restrains only the body of the child;
2.8.5. "child-restraint attachment strap" means a strap which attaches the child restraint to the structure of the vehicle and may be a part of the vehicle-seat retaining device;
2.8.6. "harness belt" means a belt assembly comprising a lap belt, shoulder restraints and, where fitted, a crotch strap;
2.8.7. "Y-shaped belt" means a belt where the combination of straps is formed by a strap to be guided between the child's legs and a strap for each shoulder.
No.044 2007-11-23
crotch strap [No.044 2011-09-09] @ crotch strap Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8.3. "crotch strap" means a strap (or divided straps, where two or more pieces of webbing make it) attached to the child restraint and the lap strap and is so positioned as to pass between the childfs thighs; it is designed to prevent the child sliding under the lap belt in normal use and prevent the lap belt moving up off the pelvis in an impact;
No.044 2011-09-09
CRS [No.129 2014-03-29] @ CRS (Child Restraint System) Enhanced Child Restraint Systems (ECRS) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Child Restraint System" (CRS) means a device capable of accommodating a child occupant in a sitting or supine position. It is so designed as to diminish the risk of injury to the wearer, in the event of a collision or of abrupt deceleration of the vehicle, by limiting the mobility of the childfs body.
No.129 2014-03-29
Cryogenic temperature [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Cryogenic temperature using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.69. "Cryogenic temperature" for the purpose of this Regulation means temperatures below - 40Ž.
No.110 2015-06-30
Cumulative luminous flux [No.128 2014-05-29] @ Cumulative luminous flux Light Emitting Diode (LED) light sources 3.1. Definitions
3.1.12. Cumulative luminous flux: luminous flux emitted by the light source under operating conditions, within a cone enclosing the specified solid angle and centred on the reference axis.
No.128 2014-05-29
Cure [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Cure @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Cure" is the term used to describe the change in physical properties of the new material which is brought about usually by the application of heat and pressure for a set period of time under controlled conditions.
No.108 2006-07-04
Cure [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Cure Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.45. "Cure" is the term used to describe the change in physical properties of the new material which is brought about usually by the application of heat and pressure for a set period of time under controlled conditions.
No.109 2006-07-04
cured (Pre-) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Pre-cured @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.41. "Tread material" is material in a condition suitable for replacing the worn tread. It can be in several forms for example:
2.41.1. "Camel-back" - pre-cut lengths of material which have been extruded to give the required cross section profile and subsequently fitted cold to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.2. "Strip-wound" - a ribbon of tread material which is directly extruded and wound on to the prepared casing and built up to the required cross sectional contour. The new material must be cured.
2.41.3. "Direct extrusion" - tread material extruded to give the required cross sectional profile and directly extruded on to the prepared casing. The new material must be cured.
2.41.4. "Pre-cured" - a previously formed and cured tread applied directly to the prepared casing. The new material must be bonded to the casing.
No.108 2006-07-04
curvature (Radius o) [No.061 2010-06-30] @ Radius of curvature external projections forward of the cab's rear panel 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature" means the radius of the arc of a circle which comes closest to the rounded form of the component under consideration.
No.061 2010-06-30
curvature (Radius of) [No.026 2005-12-16] @ Radius of curvature External projections 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Radius of curvature" means the radius of the arc of a circle which comes closest to the rounded form
of the component under consideration.
No.026 2005-12-16
Curvature [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Curvature "r" Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Curvature "r"" means the approximate value of the smallest radius of arc of the windscreen as measured in the most curved area.
No.043 2010-08-31
curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface (radii of, Principal) [No.081 2012-07-13] @ ri and r'i (Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface) Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.5. "Principal radii of curvature at one point obtained on the reflecting surface (ri) and (r'i)" means the values obtained using the apparatus defined in Annex 6, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface contained in a plane parallel to the greatest dimension of the mirror and passing through its centre and on the arc perpendicular to it;
No.081 2012-07-13
curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (radius of) [No.046 2014-08-08] @ rp (The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.7."The radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetical average of the principal radii of curvature ri and riŒ i.e.:
rp=(ri+ri')/2
No.046 2014-08-08
curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (Radius of) [No.081 2012-07-13] @ rp (Radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Radius of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (rp)" means the arithmetic average of the principal radii of curvature ri and r'i, i.e.: rp = [Ž®]
No.081 2012-07-13
curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (radius of, principal) [No.046 2014-08-08] @ ri (The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface) devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.6."The principal radii of curvature at one point on the reflecting surface (ri)" means the values obtained with the apparatus defined in Annex 7, measured on the arc of the reflecting surface passing through the centre of this surface parallel to the segment b, as defined in paragraph 6.1.2.1.2.1 of this Regulation and on the arc perpendicular to this segment.
No.046 2014-08-08
curvature of the constituent part of the mirror (radius of) [No.046 2014-08-08] @ The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror devices for indirect vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.1.12."The radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.
No.046 2014-08-08
curvature of the constituent parts of the rear view mirror (Radius of) [No.081 2012-07-13] @ Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror Rear-view mirrors (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.8. "Radius of curvature of the constituent parts of the rear-view mirror" means the radius "c" of the arc of the circle which most closely approximates to the curved form of the part in question.
No.081 2012-07-13
Curvature r [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Curvature "r" safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Curvature "r" " means the approximate value of the smallest radius of arc of the windscreen as measured in the most curved area.
No.043 2014-02-12
Curved pane [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Curved pane safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Pane" means any single piece of glazing other than a windscreen;
2.17.1. "Curved pane" means a pane with a height of segment "h" greater than 10 mm per linear meter;
2.17.2. "Flat pane" means a pane with a height of segment equal to or less than 10 mm per linear meter.
No.043 2014-02-12
Curved windscreen [No.043 2014-02-12] @ Curved windscreen safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Group of windscreens" means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental-aggression resistance tests.
2.16.1. "Flat windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting no normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear meter;
2.16.2. "Curved windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting a normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear meter.
No.043 2014-02-12
Curved windscreen [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Curved windscreen Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.13. "Group of windscreens" means a group comprising windscreens of differing sizes and shapes subjected to an examination of their mechanical properties, their mode of fragmentation and their behaviour in environmental-aggression resistance tests;
2.13.1. "Flat windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting no normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear metre;
2.13.2. "Curved windscreen" means a windscreen exhibiting a normal curvature resulting in a height of segment greater than 10 mm per linear metre.
No.043 2010-08-31
cushion (booster, child restraints) [No.044 2007-11-23] @ booster cushion (child restraints) Child restraint systems 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1.3.1. "partial restraint" means a device, such as a booster cushion, which, when used in conjunction with an adult seat belt, which passes around the body of the child or restrains the device in which the child is placed, forms a complete child restraint system;
2.1.3.2. "booster cushion" means a firm cushion, which can be used with an adult seat belt;
2.1.3.3. "guide strap" means a strap which constrains the shoulder strap of the adult seat belt in a position to suit the child and where the effective position at which the shoulder strap changes direction can be adjusted by means of a device which can be moved up and down the strap to locate the wearer's shoulder, and then locked into that position. This guide strap is not meant to carry a significant part of the dynamic load.
No.044 2007-11-23
cushion (Seat) [No.080 2013-08-24] @ Seat cushion strength of the seats and their anchorages 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Seat cushion" means the part of the seat which is arranged almost horizontally and designed to support a seated passenger;
No.080 2013-08-24
cushion (Seat) [No.080 2010-06-30] @ Seat cushion Strength of seats and their anchorages (large passenger vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.9. "Seat cushion" means the part of the seat which is arranged almost horizontally and designed to support a seated passenger;
No.080 2010-06-30
Cushion gum [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Cushion gum @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Cushion gum" is material used as a bonding layer between new tread and casing and for repairing minor damage.
No.108 2006-07-04
Cushion gum [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Cushion gum Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.43. "Cushion gum" is a material used as a bonding layer between new tread and casing and for repairing minor damage.
No.109 2006-07-04
cut-off [No.123 2010-08-24A8] @ cut-off Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS) [ANNEX 8] PASSING BEAM eCUT-OFFf AND AIMING PROVISIONS
1. CUT-OFF DEFINITION
The "cut-off", when projected on the aiming screen as defined in Annex 9 to this Regulation, shall be sufficiently sharp to permit aiming; it shall comply with the following requirements.
1.1. Shape (see Fig. A.8-1)
1.1.1. The "flat part" shall not deviate vertically by more than
1.1.2. The raised "shoulder part"
No.123 2010-08-24
cycle (Ageing) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Ageing cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1. "Ageing cycle" means the vehicle or engine operation (speed, load, power) to be executed during the service accumulation period;
No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (Ageing) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Ageing cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.2. "Ageing cycle" means the machine or engine operation (speed, load, power) to be executed during the service accumulation period;
No.096 2014-03-22
Cycle (Bench, Diesel, Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] @ SDBC (Standard Diesel Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 2] Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)
1. INTRODUCTION For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphurisation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant. The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an after-treatment system on an ageing bench which follows the SDBC described in this appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system. During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating condition.
No.083 2015-07-03
Cycle (Bench, Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] @ SBC (Standard Bench Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 1] Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)
1. INTRODUCTION The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench which follows the Standard Bench Cycle (SBC) described in this appendix. The SBC requires the use of an ageing bench with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst temperature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first catalyst.
2. CATALYST TEMPERATURE CONTROL
No.083 2015-07-03
cycle (Driving) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Driving cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Driving cycle" means a sequence consisting of an engine start, an operating period (of the vehicle), an engine shut-off, and the time until the next engine start;
No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (driving) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] @ driving cycle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.10. A "driving cycle" consists of engine start-up, driving mode where a malfunction would be detected if present, and engine shut-off.
No.083 2012-02-15
Cycle (Driving, Transient, Harmonised, World) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ WHTC (World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle) Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.6. "Continuous regeneration" means the regeneration process of an exhaust after-treatment system that occurs either permanently or at least once per World Harmonised Transient Driving Cycle (WHTC) hot start test;
No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (preconditioning) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] @ preconditioning cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"preconditioning cycle" means the running of at least three consecutive OBD test cycles or emission test cycles for the purpose of achieving stability of the engine operation, the emission control system and OBD monitoring readiness;
No.049 2008-04-12
Cycle (Road, Standard) [No.083 2015-07-03A9] @ SRC (Standard Road Cycle) Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 9] TYPE V TEST (Description of the endurance test for verifying the durability of pollution control devices)
[Appendix 3] Standard Road Cycle (SRC)
1. INTRODUCTION The Standard Road Cycle (SRC) is a kilometre accumulation cycle. The vehicle may be run on a test track or on a kilometre accumulation dynamometer. The cycle consists of 7 laps of a 6 km course.
The length of the lap may be changed to accommodate the length of the mileage accumulation test track.
No.083 2015-07-03
cycle (Test or duty) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Test (or duty) cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.85. "Test (or duty) cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state or transient operating conditions. Duty cycles are specified in the Annex 5. A single duty cycle may consist of one or more test intervals;
No.096 2014-03-22
cycle (Test) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] @ Test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.18. "Test cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state (WHSC) or transient operating conditions (WHTC).
No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (test) [No.049 2008-04-12] @ test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONSS0
2.1 "test cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by
the engine under steady state (ESC test) or transient operating conditions (ETC, ELR test);
No.049 2008-04-12
cycle (test) [No.049 2010-78-31] @ test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "test cycle" means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state (ESC test) or transient operating conditions (ETC, ELR test);
No.049 2010-08-31
cycle (test, OBD) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] @ OBD test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"OBD test cycle" means a driving cycle which is a version of the ESC test cycle having the same running-order of the 13 individual modes as described in paragraph 2.7.1. of Appendix 1 to Annex 4A to this Regulation but where the length of each mode is reduced to 60 seconds;
No.049 2008-04-12
cycle (test, steady state, modal, Ramped) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Ramped modal steady state test cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.68. "Ramped modal steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined speed and torque ramps between these modes;
No.096 2014-03-22
cycle (test, steady state, Ramped) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] @ Ramped steady state test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.12. "Ramped steady state test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of steady state engine test modes with defined speed and torque criteria at each mode and defined ramps between these modes (WHSC).
No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (test, Transient) [No.049 2013-06-24A4] @ Transient test cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 4] TEST PROCEDURE
3. DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 3.1. Definitions
3.1.20. "Transient test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of normalized speed and torque values that vary relatively quickly with time (WHTC).
No.049 2013-06-24
cycle (test, Transient) [No.096 2014-03-22] @ Transient test cycle Diesel emission (agricultural tractors) 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1.90. "Transient test cycle" means a test cycle with a sequence of normalized speed and torque values that vary relatively quickly with time (NRTC);
No.096 2014-03-22
cycle (warm up) [No.083 2012-02-15A11] @ warm-up cycle Emissions (engine fuel requirements) [ANNEX 11] On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. A "warm-up cycle" means sufficient vehicle operation such that the coolant temperature has risen by a least 22 K from engine starting and reaches a minimum temperature of 343 K (70 ‹C).
No.083 2012-02-15
cycle (warm-up) [No.049 2008-04-12A9] @ warm-up cycle Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) [ANNEX 9A] On-board diagnostic systems (OBD)
2. DEFINITIONS
"warm-up cycle" means sufficient engine operation such that the coolant temperature has risen by at least 22 K from engine starting and reaches a minimum temperature of 343 K (70Ž);
No.049 2008-04-12
cycle counter (Ignition) [No.049 2013-06-24] @ Ignition cycle counter Emissions (diesel, NG & LPG) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. "Ignition cycle counter" means a counter indicating the number of engine starts a vehicle has experienced;
No.049 2013-06-24
cylinder [No.110 2015-06-30] @ "Container" (or cylinder) using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.12. "Container" (or cylinder) means any storage system used for compressed natural gas.
No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder (Composite) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Composite cylinder using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.53. "Composite cylinder" means a cylinder made of resin impregnated continuous filament wound over a metallic or non-metallic liner. Composite cylinders using non-metallic liners are referred to as all-composite cylinders.
No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder (composite) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ composite cylinder Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.8. composite cylinder: A cylinder made of resin impregnated continuous filament wound over a metallic or non-metallic liner. Composite cylinders using non-metallic liners are referred to as all-composite cylinders.
No.110 2008-03-14
cylinder (composite, Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Batch - composite cylinders using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.49. "Batch — composite cylinders" means a "batch" i.e. a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.
No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder (Finished) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Finished cylinders using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.56. "Finished cylinders" means completed cylinders that are ready for use, typical of normal production, complete with identification marks and external coating including integral insulation specified by the manufacturer, but free from non-integral insulation or protection.
No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Container (or cylinder) using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.3. "Container" (or cylinder) means any vessel used for the storage of compressed natural gas;
2.3.1. A container can be:
CNG-1 metal;
CNG-2 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (hoop wrapped);
CNG-3 metal liner reinforced with resin impregnated continuous filament (fully wrapped);
CNG-4 resin impregnated continuous filament with a non-metallic liner (all composite).
No.110 2011-05-07
cylinder and liner (metal, Batch) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Batch - metal cylinders and liners using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.50. "Batch — metal cylinders and liners" means a "batch" i.e. a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.
No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder valve (Automatic) [No.110 2015-06-30] @ Automatic cylinder valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) 4. DEFINITIONS
4.19. "Automatic cylinder valve" means an automatic valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder that controls the flow of gas to the fuel system. The automatic cylinder valve is also called remote-controlled service valve.
No.110 2015-06-30
cylinder valve (Automatic) [No.110 2011-05-07] @ Automatic cylinder valve using compressed natural gas (CNG) 2. DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF COMPONENTS
2.8. "Automatic cylinder valve" means an automatic valve rigidly fixed to the cylinder which controls the flow of gas to the fuel system. The automatic cylinder valve is also called remote-controlled service valve.
No.110 2011-05-07
cylinders (composite, batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ batch - composite cylinders Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.4. batch - composite cylinders: A "batch" shall be a group of cylinders successively produced from qualified liners having
the same size, design, specified materials of construction and process of manufacture.
No.110 2008-03-14
cylinders (finished) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ finished cylinders Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.11. finished cylinders: Completed cylinders which are ready for use, typical of normal production, complete with identification marks and external coating including integral insulation specified by the manufacturer, but free from nonintegral insulation or protection.
No.110 2008-03-14
cylinders and liners (metal, batch) [No.110 2008-03-14A3] @ batch - metal cylinders and liners Compressed natural gas systems (CNG) [ANNEX 3] GAS CYLINDERS HIGH PRESSURE CYLINDER FOR THE ON-BOARD STORAGE OF NATURAL GAS AS A FUEL FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
3. DEFINITIONS
3.5. batch - metal cylinders and liners: A ebatchf shall be a group of metal cylinders or liners successively produced having the same nominal diameter, wall thickness, design, specified material of construction, process of manufacture, equipment for manufacture and heat treatment, and conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat treatment.
No.110 2008-03-14
Top@Sort MK —pŒê ‘Ώەª–ì ’è‹` Source
D (characteristic values) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal
forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for
horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support
imposed vertical loads, the value is: [D= Ž®]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. 2
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass 2.
For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers 3 the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9.81 m/s2)
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph
2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass 2
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3.5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [V= Ž®]
where:
a is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
For air suspension (or suspension systems with equivalent damping characteristics)
a = 1.8 m/s2
For other types of suspension:
a = 2.4 m/s2
X is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1)
L is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1)
Note: (If less than 1.0, the value of 1.0 shall be used) [Ž®]
No.055 2006-12-27
d (Nominal rim diameter) [No.054 2008-07-11] @ d (Nominal rim diameter) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.18. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted; No.054 2008-07-11
d (Nominal rim diameter) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Nominal rim diameter (d) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.16. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means a conventional number denoting the nominal diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted and corresponding to the diameter of the rim expressed either by size codes (number below 100 — see table for equivalence with millimeters) or in mm (numbers above 100) but not both;
[•\]
No.106 2010-09-30
d (Nominal rim diameter) [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ Nominal rim diameter (d) @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.
No.108 2006-07-04
d (Nominal rim diameter) [No.109 2006-07-04A1] @ Nominal rim diameter (d) Retreaded tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.
No.109 2006-07-04
D (Outer diameter) [No.054 2008-07-11] @ D (Outer diameter) Tyres (commercial vehicles and their trailers) 2.16. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new pneumatic tyre (1); No.054 2008-07-11
D (Outer diameter) [No.106 2010-09-30] @ Outer diameter (D) Tyres (agricultural vehicles) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.14. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new tyre;
No.106 2010-09-30
D (symbol and definition) [No.055 2006-12-27] @ D : Symbols and definitions Mechanical coupling devices 2. DEFINITIONS
2.12. Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.
Av = maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.
C = mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
D = D value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Dc = Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
R = mass of towed vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
T = mass of towing vehicle in tonnes - see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.
Fa = static lifting force in kN.
Fh = horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.
Fs = vertical component of test force in kN.
S = static vertical mass in kg.
U = fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.
V = V-value in kN - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
a = equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle - see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.
e = longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
f = vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.
g = acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9.81 m/s2.
L = theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in meters.
X = length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in meters.
Subscripts:
O = maximum test force
U = minimum test force
a = static force
h = horizontal
p = pulsating
res = resultant
s = vertical
w = alternating force
No.055 2006-12-27
D [No.075 2011-03-30] @ D (Outer diameter) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.15. "Outer diameter (D)" means the overall diameter of an inflated new pneumatic tyre.
2.16.1. The nominal section width (S1) must be expressed in mm except in the case of types of tyre for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation;
2.16.2. The nominal aspect ratio, except in the case of certain types of tyre, for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation;
2.16.3. A conventional number "d" denoting the nominal diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by code (numbers below 100) or in millimetresf (numbers above 100).
2.16.3.1. The values in millimetres of the symbol "d" when indicated by a code are as follows: (in mm)
[•\] Symbol "d" indicated by one or two figures according to the nominal rim diameter / Value of "d"
4 / 102
5 / 127
-- / ---
23 / 584
No.075 2011-03-30
d [No.075 2011-03-30]a @ d (Nominal rim diameter) Tyres (motorcycles/mopeds) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.17. "Nominal rim diameter (d)" means the diameter of the rim on which a tyre is designed to be mounted.
No.075 2011-03-30
d [No.108 2006-07-04A2] @ conventional number "d" @ 2. DEFINITIONS
2.21. "Tyre size designation" means a designation showing:
2.21.1. The nominal section width. This must be expressed in millimetres, except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.2. The nominal aspect ratio except in cases of tyres for which the size designation is shown in the first column of the tables in Annex 5 to this Regulation.
2.21.3. A conventional number "d" (the "d" symbol) denoting the nominal rim diameter of the rim and corresponding to its diameter expressed either by codes (numbers below 100) or in millimetres (numbers above 100). Numbers corresponding to both types of measurements may be used in the designation.
2.21.3.1. The values of the "d" symbols expressed in millimetres are shown below: [•\]
No.108 2006-07-04
D, Dc (and S, V, U [No.055 2010-08-28] @ characteristic values D, Dc , S, V and U mechanical coupling components 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. The characteristic values D, D c , S, V and U are defined or determined as:
2.11.1. The D or D c value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests.
For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is: [Ž® D=]
For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is: [Ž® Dc=]
For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6, the value is: [Ž® D=]
where:
T is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer.
R is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer ( 1 ).
C is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers ( 2 ) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.
g is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s 2 )
U is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.
S is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.
2.11.2. The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.3. The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13, of technically permissible maximum mass ( 1 ).
2.11.4. The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests. [Ž® V=]
No.055 2010-08-28
Dangerous Goods by Road (Carriage of, International, Agreement concerning the, European) [No.013 2010-09-30A05] @ European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) Braking (categories M, N and O) [ANNEX 5] Additional provisions applicable to certain vehicles as specified in the ADR
1. SCOPE
This annex applies to certain vehicles which are subject to section 9.2.3 of Annex B to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General provisions
Power-driven vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant technical requirements of this Regulation. In addition, the following technical provisions shall apply as appropriate.
2.2. Anti-lock braking system of trailers y—ªz
2.3. Endurance braking system y—ªz
2.4. Braking requirements for EX/III vehicles of categories O 1 and O 2 y—ªz
No.013 2010-09-30
data (Reference) [No.029 2010-11-20A4] @ Reference data protection of the occupants of the cab of a commercial vehicle [ANNEX 4] PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING THE eHf POINT AND THE ACTUAL TORSO ANGLE FOR SEATING POSITIONS IN MOTOR VEHICLES
2. Definitions
2.1. "Reference data" means one or several of the following characteristics of a seating position:
2.1.1. the "H" point and the "R" point and their relationship;
2.1.2. the actual torso angle and the design torso angle and their relationship.
No.029 2010-11-20
Data communication [No.013 2016-02-18] š Data communication Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Data communication" means the transfer of digital data under the rules of a protocol.
No.013 2016-02-18
Data communication [No.013 2010-09-30] @ Data communication Braking (categories M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.25. "Data communication" means the transfer of digital data under the rules of a protocol.
No.013 2010-09-30
datum points (Windscreen) [No.125 2010-07-31] @ Windscreen datum points Forward field of vision 2. DEFINITIONS
2.11. "Windscreen datum points" means points situated at the intersection with the windscreen of lines radiating forward from the V points to the outer surface of the windscreen.
No.125 2010-07-31
Daylight opening [No.043 2010-08-31] @ Daylight opening Safety glazing 2. DEFINITIONS
2.22. "Daylight opening" means the whole glazing area, excluding any opaque obscuration but including any shade band.
No.043 2010-08-31
Daytime colour of the fluorescent [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Daytime colour of the fluorescent Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.32. Daytime colour of the fluorescent a device
2.32.1. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] FR12,FR23, ,
No.048 2011-12-06
Daytime colour of the light reflected [No.048 2011-12-0602] @ Daytime colour of the light reflected Installation of lighting and light-signalling devices (M, N and O) 2. DEFINITIONS
2.31. Daytime colour of the light reflected from a device
2.31.1. "White" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] W12,W23, ,
2.31.2. "Yellow" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries: [•\] Y12,T23, ,
2.31.3. "Red" means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) ( 5 ) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity